THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


Scientific  and  Practical  Treatise 


AMERICAN    FOOTBALL 


Scboote  ant>  Colleges 


BY 

A.  ALONZO  STAGG 

AND 

HENRY  L.  WILLIAMS 


HARTFORD,  CONN. 

Press  of  The  Case,  Lockwood  &  Brainard  Company 
1893 


Copyright,  1893, 

by 
A.  A.  STAGG  and  H.  L.  WILLIAMS, 

All  rights  reserved. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE. 

Preface,      3 

Introductory  chapter  for  Beginners  and  Spectators,  7 

Training, 12 

The  Center-rusher,    .        .        .         .        .         .         .  18 

The  Guard 26 

The  Tackle, 34 

The  End-rusher,         .......  43 

The  Quarter-back, 50 

The  Half-backs  and  Full-back,          .        .        .        .  58 

Plays,  with  diagrams, 75 

Index  of  Plays, 216 

Team  Play, 221 

Field  Tactics,      .        . 233 

Signals,       .........  257 

Axioms, 262 

Rules, 265 


711196 


PREFACE. 


THE  game  of  football  is  fast  becoming  the  national 
fall  sport  of  the  American  youth.  Among  the 
larger  eastern  colleges,  where  it  has  been  fostered  and 
developed,  football  has  now  been  raised  to  a  definite 
science,  but  in  the  west  the  game  is,  as  yet,  compara- 
tively in  its  infancy 

The  demand  has  been  rapidly  increasing  among  the 
smaller  colleges  and  large  preparatory  schools  from  year 
to  year  for  competent  coachers,  and  it  is  evident  that 
there  is  felt  a  wide-spread  want  for  some  source  of 
definite  information  which  shall  describe  the  manner  of 
executing  the  various  evolutions,  the  methods  of  inter- 
ference, and  the  more  difficult  and  complicated  points  of 
the  game. 

It  is  with  the  desire  of  meeting  this  want  so  far  as 
is  possible,  and  with  the  hope  of  stimulating  a  love  for 
the  game  and  of  raising  the  standard  of  play  among  the 
school-boys  of  this  country,  to  whom  the  colleges  and 
universities  must  look  for  the  material  out  of  which  to 
construct  their  future  elevens,  that  the  authors  have  pre- 
pared this  volume. 

The  endeavor  has  been  made  to  begin  with  simple 
steps  in  the  early  development  of  the  game  and  advance 
by  gradual  stages  to  the  most  difficult  evolutions  and 
scientific  tactics  which  have  been  mastered  up  to  the 

(3) 


present  day.  In  working  out  this  principle  the  aim 
throughout  has  been  clearness  and  precision. 

While  it  is  the  primary  desire  to  furnish  in  this  work 
a  practical  aid  in  the  attainment  of  a  higher  standard 
of  play  among  the  preparatory  schools  and  colleges,  still 
it  is  hoped  that  the  general  public  will  find  it  an  assist- 
ance to  the  better  understanding  of  American  football, 
which  has  come  to  hold  such  a  prominent  place  in  popu- 
lar favor.  THE  AUTHORS. 

September  15,  1893. 


r      , 
o  z£ 

I"S 

IN   GOAL 
GOAL  LINE           ,GOAL,            GOAL  LINE 

Is! 

iO 

o 

z. 
o 
o 
m 

o: 
o 

I 
0 

o 
o 

h- 

H 
ul 
:      uJ 
>     u. 

1   8 

«O 

</i 

O 

z 
3 
o 

03 

• 
O 

I 

'IS'-sFtJ 
160  FEET 

TOUCH  OR  .BOUNDS  330  FEET  TOUCH  OR  BOUNDS 
IN  TOUCH 

25  YARD   LINE 

3NPI    QHVA  S? 

ID 
O 

133J    091 
1  1J*(9i  1 

§z< 
o~§ 

3NH  1V09           nV09                 3NH  1V09 
1V09     Nl 

H 

INTRODUCTORY   CHAPTER 

FOR 

BEGINNERS  AND   SPECTATORS. 


American  football  is  played  on  a  rectangular  field, 
three  hundred  and  thirty  feet  long  and  one  hundred  and 
sixty  feet  wide,  enclosed  by  heavy  white  lines  marked  in 
lime  upon  the  ground.  For  the  convenience  of  the 
referee  in  fulfilling  his  duties,  the  field  is  marked  by  ad- 
ditional lines  five  yards  apart  crossing  from  side  to  side, 
the  fifth  from  either  end  being  indicated  by  an  especially 
heavy  one  known  as  the  ' '  twenty-five  yard  line. "  The 
"  center  of  the  field  "  is  located  at  the  middle  point  of  the 
eleventh  line. 

At  the  center  of  the  goal  lines  at  each  end  of  the  field 
two  goal  posts,  from  fifteen  to  twenty  feet  high,  are 
erected  eighteen  and  one-half  feet  apart,  and  connected 
by  a  cross-bar  ten  feet  from  the  ground.  Two  ' '  teams  " 
of  eleven  men  each  contest  in  the  game.  Seven  of 
them,  called  the  rushers,  or  forwards,  stand  opposing  a 
corresponding  seven  of  the  opposite  eleven,  whenever 
the  ball  is  down  for  a  "  scrimmage."  The  one  in  the 
middle  is  known  as  the  center  rusher,  or  center,  and  on 
either  side  of  him  are  the  right  and  left  guards,  the  right 
and  left  tackles,  and  the  right  and  left  ends,  respectively. 
The  four  remaining  players  are  the  quarter-back,  right 
and  left  half-backs,  and  the  full-back,  who  stand  behind 

(7) 


8 

the  line  of  rushers  and  occupy  positions  which  vary  ac- 
cording to  whether  they  or  their  opponents  have  the  ball. 
The  positions  which  the  players  will  occupy  when  about 
to  execute  the  different  movements  of  the  game  are  shown 
by  the  diagrams  in  the  chapter  describing  the  various 
evolutions.  At  the  beginning  of  the  game  the  ball  is 
placed  at  the  center  of  the  field.  The  side  in  possession 
of  the  ball  constitutes  the  side  of  attack,  and  endeavors 
to  carry  it  down  the  field  by  kicking  or  running  with  it, 
in  order  to  place  it  on  the  ground  behind  the  opponents' 
goal  line.  The  other  side,  forced  to  act  upon  the  defen- 
sive, are  drawn  up  in  opposition,  and  strive  to  check  their 
advance  and  to  get  possession  of  the  ball  themselves,  so 
that  they  may  no  longer  act  upon  the  defensive,  but 
become,  "in  turn,  the  attacking  party. 

The  rules  of  the  game  (see  final  chapter),  place  certain 
restrictions  upon  the  attacking  side  and  upon  the  defense, 
and  it  is  the  attempt  made  in  accordance  with  these  rules 
by  each  side  to  retain  the  ball  in  their  possession  and 
carry  it  down  the  field  through  all  opposition,  in  order  to 
place  it  behind  their  opponents'  goal,  which  furnishes  in 
rough  outline  the  essential  features  of  the  American 
game  of  football. 

Before  the  game  is  to  begin  the  captains  of  the  re- 
spective teams  decide  by  a  toss  of  the  coin  which  side 
shall  first  be  given  possession  of  the  ball.  The  side  having 
the  ball  then  places  it  down  upon  the  center  of  the  field 
and  arrange  themselves  in  any  formation  which  they  de- 
sire, behind  the  line  on  which  the  ball  is  placed,  in  prepa- 
ration to  force  it  into  the  enemy's  territory.  The  side 
acting  on  the  defensive  are  obliged  to  withdraw  ten  yards 
toward  their  own  goal,  and  are  there  drawn  up  in  oppo- 
sition to  await  the  attack  of  their  opponents  until  after 
the  ball  is  put  in  play. 


As  the  "  center  rusher"  of  the  attacking  side  puts  the 
ball  in  play  by  touching  it  with  his  foot  and  passing  it 
back  to  some  other  player  for  a  run,  or  a  kick  down  the 
field,  the  rushers  upon  the  defensive  side  are  at  liberty  to 
charge  forward  to  meet  the  attack.  The  clash  following 
this  charge  constitutes  the  first  actual  encounter  of  the 
game. 

When  the  runner  with  the  ball  is  caught,  or  "  tackled," 
thrown  upon  the  ground,  and  there  held  so  that  he  can 
advance  no  further,  he  calls  "  down,"  whereupon  the  ball 
is  "  dead"  for  the  moment,  and  cannot  be  carried  for- 
ward or  kicked  until  the  center  rusher  again  puts  it  in 
play  according  to  rule. 

As  soon  as  "  down  "  is  called,  an  imaginary  line,  cross- 
ing the  field  from  side  to  side  and  passing  through  the 
center  of  the  ball,  immediately  comes  into  existence. 
Each  player  must  remain  on  the  side  of  this  line  toward 
his  own  goal  until  after  the  ball  is  "  put  in  play,"  and  it  is 
one  of  the  duties  of  the  umpire  rigidly  to  enforce  this 
regulation.  Should  any  player  cross  this  line  and  fail  to 
return  before  the  ball  is  "  snapped  back  "  it  constitutes  an 
"  off  side  play,"  for  which  the  rules  provide  a  penalty. 

To  again  put  the  ball  in  play  the  center  rusher  places 
his  hand  upon  it  at  the  spot  where  "  down  "  was  called. 
The  rushers  then  "line  up"  opposing  one  another,  the 
line  of  attack  being  drawn  closely  together  for  a  greater 
concentration  of  energy,  while  the  defensive  rushers  are 
slightly  spread  apart  to  facilitate  breaking  through  the 
line  and  stopping  the  advance,  when  the  ball  shall  be 
put  in  play.  The  captain  upon  the  attacking  side  then 
shouts  some  signal,  understood  only  by  his  own  men 
which  indicates  the  evolution  that  he  wishes  his  eleven  to 
execute  ;  whereupon  the  center  rusher  puts  the  ball  in 


play  by  "  snapping  it  back,"  that  is,  by  rolling  it  back 
between  his  legs. 

Immediately  behind  the  center  rusher  the  quarter-back 
has  taken  his  stand.  He  receives  the  ball  as  it  is  "  snap- 
ped back  "  and  instantly  passes  it  to  one  of  the  half-backs 
or  a  man  in  the  line,  for  a  run,  or  to  the  full-back  for  a 
kick  down  the  field.  Thereupon  the  first ' '  scrimmage  "  of 
the  game  takes  place  as  the  opposing  team  attempts  to 
break  through  the  line  and  stop  the  play. 

One  side  is  not  allowed  to  retain  indefinite  possession 
of  the  ball  without  making  gain  or  loss.  The  rules  pro- 
vide that  if  the  side  having  possession  of  the  ball  shall 
fail  to  make  an  aggregate  gain  of  five  yards,  or  a  loss  of 
twenty  yards,  in  three  consecutive  "scrimmages",  the 
ball  shall  be  forfeited  to  the  other  side  at  the  spot  where 
it  was  last  down. 

Advances  by  running  are  made  by  the  player  directing 
his  course  through  one  of  the  six  openings  in  the  rush  line, 
or  around  the  ends,  according  as  the  signal  may  direct. 
The  signal  also  indicates  the  player  who  is  to  receive  the 
ball.  The  runner  is  assisted  in  his  course  by  the  players 
who  border  on  the  opening  through  which  he  is  to  go. 
These  seek  to  enlarge  the  space  by  pushing  their  oppo- 
nents to  one  side.  He  is  further  assisted  by  others  of  his 
owrn  players,  some  of  whom  precede,  to  "block  off"  the 
opponents  from  "  tackling  "  him  in  front,  while  still  others 
follow  to  push  him  further  if  he  is  checked.  The  players 
who  are  to  precede  and  the  players  who  are  to  follow 
change  with  the  play  according  as  each  man  is  enabled 
by  his  position  to  adjust  himself  to  it. 

Four  points  are  scored  when  one  side  carries  the  ball 
across  the  goal  line  and  makes  a  "touch  down."  The 
side  making  the  "  touch  down  "  is  then  allowed  to  carry 
the  ball  out  into  the  field  as  far  as  they  may  desire  in  a 


line  perpendicular  to  the  goal  line  and  passing  through 
the  point  where  it  was  "touched  down,"  in  order  that 
one  of  their  number  may  attempt  to  kick  it  between  the 
goal  posts  above  the  cross-bar.  The  other  side  mean- 
while are  obliged  to  take  their  positions  behind  the  goal 
line.  Should  the  attempt  be  successful,  it  will  constitute 
a  "goal,"  and  two  additional  points  be  added  to  the  score. 
But  whether  the  attempt  be  successful  or  not,  the  ball 
must  be  delivered  to  the  other  side,  who  will  take  it  to  the 
center  of  the  field  and  put  it  in  play  in  the  same  manner 
as  at  the  beginning  of  the  game. 

If  the  ball  can  be  kicked  between  the  posts  and  above 
the  cross-bar  by  a  "  drop-kick  "  or  "  place-kick  "  by  any 
one  of  the  players,  without  having  been  previously  carried 
across  the  goal  line,  it  will  constitute  a  "goal  from  the 
field,"  and  will  count  five  points. 

In  case  the  ball  is  kicked  or  carried  across  the  boundary 
line  on  either  side  it  will  be  "  out  of  bounds  "  and  must 
be  brought  into  the  field  at  right  angles  to  the  line  at  the 
point  where  it  crossed.  This  is  done  by  the  side  which 
first  secures  it  after  it  passes  out  of  bounds. 

It  is  usual  to  bring  the  ball  into  the  field  from  ten  to 
fifteen  yards  and  then  to  place  it  upon  the  ground  for  a 
"  scrimmage  "  as  from  a  regular  down  ;  though  the  ball 
may  be  passed  to  any  one  of  the  players,  in  at  the  point 
where  it  went  out,  provided  that  it  is  thrown  in  at  right 
angles  to  the  side  line  ;  or  it  may  be  "  touched  in  "  at  the 
same  point. 

The  game  is  divided  into  two  halves  of  three-quarters 
of  an  hour  each,  and  the  team  succeeding  in  scoring  the 
greatest  number  of  points  during  that  time  are  declared 
the  winners. 

The  reader  should  thoroughly  acquaint  himself  with  the 
rules  in  detail,  before  passing  on  to  a  study  of  the  book. 


TRAINING. 

In  the  early  days  of  college  athletics  and  amateur 
sports  the  popular  belief  was  universally  accepted  that  a 
most  rigorous  diet  must  be  entered  upon  if  the  young 
aspirant  for  college  honors  would  fit  himself  properly 
to  represent  his  alma  mater  in  the  boat,  on  the  running 
track,  or  in  individual  contests.  Many  an  alumnus  who 
pulled  an  oar  on  the  crew  in  the  fifties  and  sixties,  will 
recall  visions  of  raw  beef,  a  limited  bill  of  fare,  and  a 
prescribed  daily  amount  of  water  that  made  the  train- 
ing of  thirty  years  ago  a  hardship  for  which  dim  dreams 
of  possible  glory  seemed  a  doubtful  compensation. 

These  old  ideas  have  now  changed  almost  entirely, 
and  the  young  collegian  of  to-day,  who  secures  a  position 
on  any  one  of  the  college  teams,  and  obtains  a  seat  at 
the  "  training  table,"  is  an  object  of  envy  rather  than  of 
compassion  to  his  classmates.  The  training  table  diet  of 
to-day  is  almost  sumptuous,  and  few  men  in  college  en- 
joy better  living  than  the  members  of  the  university  ath- 
letic organizations.  Roast  beef,  lamb  chops,  beef  steak, 
roast  lamb,  and  broiled  chicken,  oatmeal,  rice,  mush, 
and  the  cereals,  potatoes  served  in  all  styles  but  fried, 
stale  bread,  onions,  garden  vegetables  in  season,  eggs, 
dry  toast,  apple  sauce,  baked  apples,  prunes,  grapes, 
oranges,  figs,  dates,  and  fruits  in  season  (with  the  ex- 
ception of  raw  apples),  rice  and  bread  puddings,  furnish 
an  abundant  variety  from  which  to  choose. 

A  few  things  only  are  put  upon  the  proscribed  list : 
Pies,  cakes,  salads,  all  forms  of  pork,  veal,  rich  dress- 

(12) 


rngs,  fried  food,  ice-cream,  confectionery,  soda  water, 
so-called  soft  drinks,  (and  it  is  needless  to  say  drinks  of 
a  stronger  nature,)  tea,  coffee,  and  chocolate,  should  be 
cheerfully  and  absolutely  given  up.  From  the  first  day 
of  training  it  should  be  rigidly  enforced  that  all  pipes, 
cigars,  and  cigarettes  be  laid  aside,  absolutely,  until 
the  contests  are  over. 

Regularity  in  all  the  daily  habits  of  life  is  of  the  great- 
est importance.  The  hours  for  rising,  for  meals,  and  for 
retiring  should  not  vary  from  day  to  day;  and  in  so  far 
as  it  is  practicable  to  do  so,  it  would  be  advantageous  to 
have  the  regular  practice  come  at  that  portion  of  the  day 
in  which  the  important  games  of  the  season  will  take 
place. 

That  the  football  player  should  have  long  hours  of 
restful  sleep  is  a  point  too  frequently  overlooked.  While 
it  is  impossible  to  state  a  definite  time  that  shall  apply 
to  all  cases,  a  sleep  from  ten  o'clock  in  the  evening 
until  seven  the  next  morning,  and  a  short  walk  before 
an  early  breakfast,  will  be  found  to  be  of  the  greatest 
benefit  in  all  instances.  Probably  a  large  proportion  of 
the  cases  of  over- training,  that  occur  during  the  foot- 
ball season,  are  caused  by  late  iours,  irregularity  of 
habits,  and  insufficient  rest.  Had  these  points  been  care- 
fully attended  to,  the  hard  work  upon  the  field  would 
have  produced  no  hurtful  result.  When  the  recreation 
period  of  the  players  makes  it  necessary  that  the  daily 
practice  shall  come  immediately  after  the  noon  meal, 
it  will  be  found  more  healthful  to  have  the  practice  hour 
preceded  by  a  light  lunch,  and  postpone  the  hearty 
dinner  until  night.  But  should  the  daily  play  come  in 
the  morning,  or  in  the  middle  of  the  afternoon,  it  will 
be  better  to  have  the  dinner  hour  at  noon. 

Over-training  is  something  which  is  much  easier  to 


prevent  than  to  remedy  when  once  it  is  an  accomplished 
fact.  In  preparatory  schools,  where  a  less  violent  and 
less  tiring  system  of  training  is  followed,  no  thought  need 
be  given  to  this  point,  but  in  the  larger  colleges  one  or 
more  cases  of  over-training  among  the  valuable  men  is 
apt  to  occur  toward  the  end  of  a  season  of  hard  work. 

Should  any  one  of  the  players  get  into  this  condition, 
he  should  be  given  an  absolute  rest  for  several  days,  and 
then  be  allowed  to  play  only  part  of  the  time  during  each 
remaining  day  of  practice.  An  immediate  change  of  diet 
with  a  removal  of  all  training-table  restrictions,  will  also 
be  found  of  value. 

When  a  faithful  worker  finds  himself  coming  upon  the 
field  day  after  day  with  a  worn  and  tired  feeling,  no 
longer  able  to  play  with  his  former  dash  and  energy, 
and  his  speed  gradually  decreasing,  he  should  at  once 
suspect  that  his  muscles  are  becoming  over-tired,  and 
so  fatigued  that  they  cannot  recuperate  between  one 
day's  work  and  the  next. 

The  practice  of  drinking  water  during  the  game  is  ex- 
ceedingly bad,  and  never  should  be  permitted,  though 
rinsing  the  mouth  is  admissible.  The  best  results  will 
be  obtained  if  no  water  whatever  is  swallowed  until  more 
than  an  hour  after  the  practice  is  over.  The  habit  which 
some  players  have  of  chewing  gum  during  the  game  is 
pernicious.  After  the  first  week  or  two  has  passed,  the 
mouth  will  be  found  to  be  far  less  dry  where  no  gum  is 
used,  than  where  a  constant  flow  of  saliva  is  kept  up 
by  £he  act  of  mastication. 

During  the  season  there  undoubtedly  will  be  a  number 
of  rainy  days.  These  by  no  means  should  be  lost.  As  a 
rule,  it  is  best  to  practice  upon  the  field  as  usual,  since  the 
most  important  game  of  the  season  may  come  in  bad 
weather,  and  the  experience  of  having  frequently  played 


in  the  mud  with  a  wet  and  slippery  ball  will  prove  inval- 
uable. 

On  special  occasions  light  work  in  the  gymnasium, 
tackling  the  bag,  and  practicing  the  sjgnals  indoors,  may 
be  substituted  with  advantage.  Every  team  should  be 
provided  with  a  tackling-bag.  This  may  be  made  of 
leather  or  canvas,  and  should  be  from  four  to  five  feet 
long,  a  foot  in  diameter  and  stuffed  with  hay,  hair,  or  ex- 
celsior, to  represent  the  body  of  a  man.  No  better  prac- 
tice can  be  had  for  low  hard  tackling  than  to  have  such  a 
bag  suspended  by  a  long  rope  from  a  rafter  in  the  gym- 
nasium over  a  number  of  floor  mats,  letting  the  men  run 
half  the  length  of  the  floor  and  spring  for  it  from  some 
ten  feet  away  as  it  swings  slowly  backward  and  forward. 
But  except  on  such  special  occasions  when  no  out-door 
practice  is  taken  for  the  day,  indoor  gymnasium  work 
should  be  given  up,  as  the  exercise  upon  the  field  de- 
mands every  energy. 

During  the  last  few  weeks  of  the  season,  when  the  final 
eleven  has  practically  been  decided  upon,  and  team  play 
is  being  developed,  an  opportunity  should  be  found  each 
day  to  send  the  eleven  up  and  down  the  field  in  their  reg- 
ular positions,  upon  short  runs  of  from  five  to  fifteen 
yards,  with  no  opposing  rush  line  drawn  up  against  them, 
in  order  that  the  signals  may  be  thoroughly  drilled  into 
each  player  and  substitute,  and  all  learn  to  work  together 
as  one  man.  It  is  of  the  highest  importance  to  have  a 
number  of  substitutes,  each  of  whom  is  thoroughly  ac- 
quainted with  the  signals,  as  the  replacing  of  a  player  in 
case  of  accident  by  one  in  the  slightest  degree  unfamiliar 
with  the  signals  will  destroy  team  play  and  cause  the 
side  a  loss  much  greater  than  the  value  of  the  man  who 
has  left  the  field. 

The  number  of  regular  games  a  week  a  team  can  play 


i6 


to  advantage  cannot  be  definitely  stated.  The  condition 
of  the  men  and  their  especial  needs  must  determine  this. 
As  a  rule,  more  than  two  match  games  a  week  cannot  be 
played  if  the  best  results  are  to  be  obtained.  A  hard 
game  should  not  be  played  within  less  than  a  week  be- 
fore one  which  is  considered  to  be  of  great  importance, 
if  it  can  be  avoided,  on  account  of  the  danger  of  having 
a  valuable  man  disabled,  and  in  order  that  there  may  be 
an  abundance  of  stored-up  energy  upon  the  day  of  the 
important  contest. 

During  the  last  few  days  before  the  final  game,  the 
practice  should,  be  short,  but  sharp  while  it  lasts,  with  a 
considerable  amount  of  time  devoted  to  practicing  the 
signals,  falling  upon  the  ball,  and  perfecting  team  play. 
On  the  day  immediately  preceding  the  game  an  absolute 
rest  should  be  taken. 

It  is  a  mistake  to  attempt  to  play  the  full  hour  and 
a  half  on  each  day  of  practice  throughout  the  season. 
About  two  half  hours  of  sharp  work,  with  a  rest  of 
five  minutes  between,  will  produce  the  best  results, 
and  in  the  earlier  regular  games  each  half  should  be 
limited  to  thirty  minutes. 

The  daily  practice  of  the  team  upon  the  field  will  not 
afford  sufficient  opportunity  to  the  backs  to  become  pro- 
ficient in  kicking  and  catching  the  ball.  When  it  is  pos- 
sible; a  half  hour  should  be  devoted  by  them  at  some  other 
portion  of  each  day  throughout  the  entire  season  to  punt- 
ing, catching,  and  goal  kicking.  Numerous  minor  sprains 
and  bruises  will  necessarily  be  received  during  the  season, 
for  which  hot  water  and  flannel  bandages  will  be  the  best 
remedy. 

In  case  of  a  sprained  ankle  or  a  serious  bruise  to 
one  of  the  muscles  of  the  leg,  a  long  period  of  disability 
may  result  from  continued  playing,  and  the  captain 


'7 

should  insist  that  a  player  so  hurt  should  leave  the  field 
at  once.  A  thin  leather  anklet  had  better  be  worn  in- 
side the  shoe  by  each  player  in  the  team  as  a  safeguard 
and  protection. 

When  a  man  has  a  bruised  and  sensitive  knee,  a  moist- 
tened  sponge,  the  size  of  a  fist,  placed  just  under  the 
knee  cap  will  afford  relief  and  protection.  Sprains  and 
bruises  of  a  serious  nature  are  more  liable  to  occur 
during  the  first  few  weeks  of  practice  than  at  any  other 
time  in  the  season.  This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  many 
of  the  men  have  just  returned  from  long  vacations  of 
ease  and  idleness,  and  their  muscles  are  not  ready  to 
endure  the  sudden  strains  and  wrenches  to  which  they 
immediately  find  themselves  subjected.  The  careful 
captain  will  see  to  it  that  the  promising  new  candidates 
for  his  team  and  the  old  men  are  all  gathered  together 
from  one  to  two  weeks  before  the  season  of  actual  play- 
ing is  to  begin,  and  put  through  a  series  of  light  exer- 
cises, given  short  runs,  made  to  pass,  kick,  and  fall  on 
the  ball,  and  are  given  such  general  light  work  for  wind 
and  muscle  as  shall  enable  them  to  engage  in  the  regular 
practice  without  danger.  Thick  sweaters  and  overcoats 
should  always  be  in  readiness  to  put  on  after  playing, 
and  proper  care  taken  to  guard  against  catching  cold. 

Cleanliness  is  a  hygienic  necessity  during  the  football 
season,  and  every  team  should,  if  possible,  have  hot  and 
cold  water  shower  baths  connected  with  their  dressing 
rooms. 

Long  hot  baths  are  weakening,  and  should  be  avoided; 
though  upon  special  occasions,  when  a  cold  has  settled 
in  the  muscles,  a  Turkish  bath  may  prove  of  great 
value. 

The  captain's  word  upon  the  field  is  absolute  law,  and 
should  be  followed  with  unquestioning  obedience. 


THE  CENTER-RUSHER. 

The  prevailing  idea  in  time  past  has  been  that  the 
largest  and  heaviest  man  who  could  be  procured  should 
be  used  for  the  center-rusher,  or  snapback  of  the  eleven. 
So  universal  has  this  idea  become  that  it  has  long  been  a 
common  joke  to  say  of  an  especially  large  and  stout  per- 
son: "  He  would  make  a  good  center- rusher."  Every 
new  team  formed,  as  a  rule,  selects  the  center  according 
to  this  axiomatic  fallacy.  It  is  easy  to  see  how  this  prin- 
ciple of  selection  became  established  under  the  old  push- 
ing style  of  game,  and  it  still  should  hold  sway,  provided 
it  brings  with  the  selection  certain  qualities  of  mind,  and 
certain  physical  capacities,  which  will  enable  the  center 
to  be  one  of  the  most  active  and  effective  agents  on  the 
field. 

The  center  occupies  a  unique  position  on  the  eleven  in 
that  he  starts  the  play  after  each  down,  and  is  the  only 
member  of  the  team  who  cannot  run  with  the  ball  from  a 
scrimmage,  because  it  is  impossible  to  make  him  a  third 
man  advantageously.  His  work,  therefore,  is  limited  in 
that  particular.  By  reason,  also,  of  his  having  to  pro- 
tect the  quarter-back  after  he  snaps  the  ball,  and  because 
he  is  invariably  entangled  with  the  opponents,  it  is  im- 
possible for  him  to  become  a  valuable  running  interferer. 
What  work  in  interference  he  is  able  to  do  is  limited  to 
blocking  the  opponents  from  breaking  through  the  line, 
or  running  behind  their  own  line  to  head  off  the  runner 
with  the  ball  at  one  side.  Possibly,  when  very  clever  and 
swift,  he  may  be  able  to  cut  across  the  field  to  interfere 
with  a  half-back  or  the  full-back.  The  center  should 

(18) 


make  a  practice  of  doing  this  latter  work  on  every  play 
around  the  end,  and  on  every  play  between  the  tackle 
and  end.  Perhaps  he  may  not  be  able  to  get  ahead  of 
the  runner,  but  he  will  be  of  valuable  assistance  by  check- 
ing some  of  the  opponents  from  running  behind  their  line 
and  tackling  him.  Now  and  then,  also,  he  will  be  able  to 
get  ahead  of  the  runner  and  go  down  the  field  with  him. 

From  these  statements  it  might  appear  that  it  did  not 
matter  especially  whether  the  center  rusher  was  a  slow 
runner  or  not,  and  that  emphasis  should  be  laid  on  his 
possessing  size  and  weight,  which  are  understood  as 
necessary  to  the  proper  filling  of  that  position.  The  truth 
is,  that  while  a  slow  runner,  if  he  has  cleverness  for  that 
position  and  is  strong  and  weighty,  will  be  able  to  do 
fairly  well  as  a  center,  he  cannot  begin  to  be  as  service- 
able to  his  team  as  if  he  were  also  a  fast  runner.  Grant- 
ing that  a  fast  runner  will  not  be  able  to  do  much  inter- 
fering, or  running  with  the  ball,  he  will  still  be  able  to 
use  his  speed  most  helpfully  in  breaking  through  the  line 
to  tackle ;  in  crossing  over  to  one  side  to  head  off  a  run- 
ner ;  or  in  going  down  the  field  on  a  kick.  Furthermore, 
his  speed  will  be  most  helpful  in  playing  a  quick  game, 
because  he  is  thus  able  to  follow  the  ball  so  closely  that 
there  will  be  no  delay  in  putting  it  in  play.  This  is  a 
most  important  point  in  the  center's  play.  He  must  be 
on  hand  to  receive  the  ball  the  instant  it  is  down. 

It  is  impossible  to  play  a  quick  game  where  the  center 
lags,  or  to  prevent  one  on  the  part  of  the  opponents. 
"When  there  are  not  many  large  men  who  are  fast  run- 
ners it  is  better,  perhaps,  to  place  the  speedy  man  in  the 
position  of  guard  and  take  a  slower  man  for  center. 

The  ideal  center  will  be  one  who  is  swift  of  foot  in  ad- 
dition to  his  other  powers.  He  should  be  a  large  man, 
not  a  ponderous  man,  unless  he  is  quick  and  strong.  He 


20 

should  be  especially  strong  in  his  legs  and  back,  for  he 
must  stand  steadily  on  his  feet  against  the  continuous 
pushing  and  wrestling  which  he  receives,  directly  from 
the  opponents,  and  incidentally  from  the  guards  on  either 
side  of  him.  If  he  is  easily  moved,  or  toppled  over,  he 
will  be  likely  now  and  then  to  snap  the  ball  poorly,  thus 
making  the  quarter-back  uneasy  and  flurried  in  handling 
it.  Steadiness  is  a  most  necessary  part  of  the  center's 
work  and  it  cannot  well  be  overlooked  in  the  selection  of 
a  man  to  fill  that  position.  Further,  as  in  every  position 
on  the  eleven  endurance  is  a  prime  requisite,  so  is  it  in 
this.  More  of  it  is  needed,  however,  than  in  most 
others,  because  the  work  is  much  harder.  No  short- 
winded,  fat  man  can  long  stand  the  hard  work  of  that 
position,  if  he  does  his  duty.  Not  only  is  great  physical 
labor  required  of  the  center,  but  he  must  also  be  con- 
stantly subjected  to  knocks  and  bruises  from  the  plung- 
ing and  tearing  of  the  rushers  and  half-backs  as  they  try 
to  break  through  the  line. 

No  man,  therefore,  can  play  in  this  position  who  is  not 
physically  courageous,  and  who  is  not  able  to  rise  to  his 
work  after  each  assault  with  new  grit  and  determination. 
He  should  be  a  man  who  is  cool  and  collected  at  all  times; 
combative,  but  never  losing  control  of  his  temper;  one 
who  endures  worrying  without  being  rattled  by  it;  one 
who  never  gives  up  and  is  bound  to  conquer.  Nowhere 
in  the  line  is  there  need  for  such  steadiness  as  in  the  cen- 
ter. From  him  every  play  starts,  in  a  scrimmage,  and  a 
little  unsteadiness  on  his  part  will  be  likely  to  make  havoc 
with  the  quarter-back's  work,  and  hence  with  the  offensive 
play  of  the  whole  team.  Nothing  can  be  more  fatal  to 
quick  and  steady  play,  for  it  is  sure  to  produce  hesitancy 
in  action  in  some  of  the  players,  with  hurried  action  in 
others. 


In  assuming  his  position  for  a  scrimmage,  the  center 
may  follow  either  of  two  methods  of  standing,  when  snap- 
ping the  ball :  one,  where  one  foot  is  placed  back  for  a 
brace,  the  ball  being  snapped  between  the  legs  and  a  little 
to  one  side  ;  the  other,  where  both  feet  are  widely  spread 
to  interfere  with  opponents,  as  they  attempt  to  break 
through,  and  to  avoid  getting  into  the  way  of  the  ball 
which  can  be  snapped  straight  back.  Where  the  first 
position  is  followed,  the  center  should  be  able  to  work 
equally  well  with  either  foot  forward,  in  order  to  secure 
certain  advantages  in  handling  his  opponent.  The  center- 
rusher  should  make  a  study  of  the  best  way  of  snapping 
the  ball  back,  and  then  hold  it  the  same  way  every  time. 
He  should  confer  with  the  quarter-back  on  this  point,  as 
the  latter  is  to  handle  the  ball,  and  it  may  be  easier  to 
take  it  when  snapped  in  a  particular  way. 

There  are  two  methods  followed  in  snapping  the  ball : 
one,  in  which  the  ball  is  held  on  the  small  end  and  sent 
back  swiftly/with  little  effort,  in  such  a  way  that  the 
quarter-back  catches  it  in  the  air  all  ready  to  pass ;  the 
other,  where  the  ball  is  laid  on  its  side  and  rolled  along 
the  ground  to  the  point  where  it  is  stopped  by  the  quarter- 
back and  then  picked  up  in  very  good  position  for  pass- 
ing. This  latter  method  is  more  generally  used  because  it 
does  not  require  as  delicate  work  on  the  part  of  the  center 
in  giving  the  snap  ;  but  speed  is  sacrificed  by  it  and  there 
is  greater  liability  that  the  ball  shall  be  deflected  from  its 
course  by  touching  the  legs.  It  would  be  well  for  the 
center  to  learn  to  use  either  hand  in  snapping,  for  it  will 
often  prove  an  advantage.  The  center-rusher  will  do  well 
to  make  a  study  of  snapping  the  ball  by  both  methods  of 
standing,  and  by  both  ways  of  holding  it  until  he  settles 
on  the  one  best  suited  to  him.  He  should  then  practice 
this  against  an  opponent  until  he  is  able  to  stand  firmly 


22 

on  his  feet  and  send  the  ball  back  accurately,  at  a  uniform 
rate  of  speed  each  time.  In  case  the  ball  is  placed  on 
end,  it  is  better  to  have  it  lean  toward  the  opposing  center 
at  an  angle  of  about  sixty  degrees.  It  can  be  held  more 
firmly  in  this  position  and  can  also  be  sent  back  more 
swiftly,  with  a  bound  into  the  air.  Care  must  be  taken 
not  to  send  the  ball  too  swiftly.  While  the  center  is 
practising  to  secure  steadiness,  accuracy,  and  uniformity 
in  snapping  the  ball,  he  should  likewise  practise  getting 
his  opponent  out  of  the  way. 

In  putting  the  ball  in  play,  the  center  has  the  advan- 
tage of  being  able  to  select  the  time  to  snap  and  he  can 
choose  it  to  meet  his  own  purpose.  Besides,  he  knows 
the  exact  instant  when  he  intends  to  send  the  ball  back 
and  can  get  the  start  of  his  opponent.  The  center,  there- 
fore, is  master  of  the  situation  when  he  has  the  ball.  It 
is  for  these  reasons  that  he  can  frequently  be  down  the 
field  on  a  kick  as  soon  as  the  ends,  and  yet  not  expose  the 
full-back  to  great  danger  in  having  the  ball  stopped. 

There  are  various  ways  for  the  center  to  handle  his 
man  and  get  him  out  of  his  way.  He  may  plunge  forward 
at  the  instant  he  snaps  the  ball,  carrying  his  opponent 
before  him  ;  he  may  lift  him  to  one  side  or  the  other,  ac- 
cording to  the  play  called  for  and  the  position  of  the  op- 
ponent ;  he  may  fall  on  him  if  he  is  down  too  low  ;  or  he 
may  get  under  him  and  lift  him  in  the  air,  if  his  opponent 
reaches  over  him. 

In  any  one  of  these  methods,  the  opportune  moment 
must  be  seized  like  a  flash  and  the  action  be  quick  and 
powerful.  A  slow,  strong  movement  will  never  succeed. 
Long  and  faithful  practice  is  necessary  before  the  center 
can  acquire  this  quickness  and  power.  In  his  eagerness 
to  take  advantage  of  his  opponent,  he  must  never  fail  to 
wait  for  the  quarter-back's  signal  before  snapping  the 


23 

ball.  A  little  forgetfulness  on  this  point  might  prove 
disastrous. 

The  center  can  be  a  most  valuable  man  in  defensive 
play  if  he  understands  his  position.  By  giving  his  op- 
ponents a  quick  pull  forward  or  to  one  side  at  the  instant 
the  latter  snaps  the  ball ;  by  lifting  him  suddenly  back- 
ward ;  or  by  grasping  his  arm,  the  center  can  frequently 
break  through  more  quickly  than  either  guard  or  tackle. 
Whenever  he  succeeds  in  getting  through,  he  will  be  a 
strong  obstacle  to  all  dashes  between  himself  and  the 
guards,  and  he  will  sometimes  be  able  to  interfere  with 
the  quarter-back's  pass.  Another  way  in  which  the  cen- 
ter may  play  on  the  defense  is  to  spend  all  his  energy  for 
a  moment  in  getting  his  opponent  out  of  his  way  and  then 
spring  at  the  runner.  In  this  case  the  center  must  throw 
off  his  opponent  quickly,  and  not  allow  himself  to  be 
carried  backward.  At  the  same  time  he  must  not  attempt 
to  break  through  the  line. 

When  the  play  is  around  the  end,  or  even  at  the  tackle, 
the  center  should  move  quickly  from  his  position  and 
pass  around  behind  his  own  line  to  meet  and  tackle  the 
runner.  When  the  opposite  side  is  about  to  kick,  the 
center  should  do  his  utmost  to  break  through  the  line  and 
stop  it ;  but  sometimes  it  may  be  better  instead  to  make 
an  opening  for  the  quarter-back.  He  is  helped  in  doing 
this,  by  the  opposite  center  himself,  as  he  plunges  for- 
ward to  block  him.  In  such  a  case  a  good  opening  can 
be  made  for  the  quarter-back,  if  the  center  will  place  him- 
self in  front  of  his  opponent  a  little  to  one  side,  and  then 
pull  the  latter  forward  to  the  right  or  left.  The  guard  at 
the  side  on  which  the  opening  is  made  should  know  of 
this  plan  so  that  he  may  not  spoil  it,  either  by  pushing 
his  opponent  in  the  path  or  by  getting  in  the  way  himself. 
If  there  is  danger  of  his  doing  this,  it  will  be  better  for 
him  to  help  enlarge  the  opening  for  the  quarter-back. 


24 

On  the  defensive  the  center  may  play  a  little  to  one  side 
or  the  other  of  his  opponent,  or  directly  in  front,  to  suit 
the  situation.  It  is  most  unwise  for  the  center  to  assume 
the  same  position  every  time,  for  by  so  doing  he  gives  the 
opposite  center  only  one  problem  to  work  out  and  that 
one  probably  the  same  each  time.  Where  the  center  takes 
an  extreme  side  position,  unless  he  does  it  just  before  the 
ball  is  snapped,  he  gives  the  captain  of  the  other  eleven 
a  fine  chance  to  call  for  a  play  which  will  take  advantage 
of  the  situation. 

There  is  abundant  opportunity  for  the  display  of  head- 
work  in  outwitting  the  opposing  center  in  breaking 
through  the  line.  The  line  is  so  compact  at  this  point 
that  it  is  not  an  easy  task  to  slip  by,  especially  as  the 
opposing  center  is  watching  to  take  his  man  at  a  disad- 
vantage Various  methods  are  resorted  to  in  breaking 
through  the  line.  Sometimes  the  center,  acting  on  the 
defense,  is  thrown  head  foremost  to  the  ground  by  a 
quick,  hard  pull,  the  attacking  center  stepping  aside  or 
over  him  as  he  falls.  He  may  also  be  turned  sidewise 
just  enough  to  slip  past  him,  or  he  may  be  lifted  back 
perhaps  into  the  face  of  the  runner.  The  most  common 
method  employed  by  the  center  in  getting  through  is  to 
catch  the  arm  of  the  opponent  on  the  side  on  which  it  is 
desired  to  go  through,  give  it  a  jerk,  and  dash  into  the 
opening. 

The  center  in  defense  must  insist  on  the  ball  being 
down  where  it  belongs.  Some  center-rushers  have  a  way 
of  moving  the  ball  forward  several  inches  further  than 
it  should  be.  There  is  no  occasion  for  generosity  under 
such  circumstances,  and  the  center  must  feel  that  it  is  his 
duty  to  stand  up  for  the  rights  of  his  team  by  constantly 
guarding  against  any  infringement  of  this  kind.  On  the 
other  hand,  a  constant  bickering  over  an  inch  or  two  of 


25 

ground  may  be  made  of  such  importance  that  the  game 
is  interfered  with  and  delayed  to  such  an  extent  that  a 
much  greater  gain  would  have  resulted  were  the  ball 
put  in  play  the  instant  the  signal  called  for  it. 

A  good  referee  will  see  to  it  that  the  ball  is  snapped 
each  time  from  the  proper  spot. 

It  is  always  the  duty  of  the  center-rusher  to  keep  close 
to  the  opponent  who  brings  the  ball  in  from  the  side  line, 
in  order  to  protect  the  rights  of  his  team.  Likewise,  it  is 
well  to  "  pace  in  "  the  opponent  who  brings  the  ball  to  the 
twenty-five  yard  line,  in  order  to  prevent  a  quick  play 
being  made  when  his  own  side  are  not  in  position.  The 
guards  assist  him  in  this. 


THE  GUARD. 

The  main  work  of  the  guards  may  be  summed  up  as 
blocking,  that  is,  guarding;  making  openings  for  the  pas- 
sage of  the  runner  whenever  certain  signals  are  given; 
running  behind  the  line  to  interfere  for  the  man  with  the 
ball;  running  with  the  ball  occasionally;  breaking  through 
the  opposing  line  to  interfere  with  the  quarter-back  in 
passing  the  ball;  and  tackling  the  runner  or  stopping  a 
kick.  The  guards  and  the  center  have  the  most  labo- 
rious work  on  the  eleven,  if  they  do  their  duty,  for  they 
practically  have  no  respite  from  hard  work.  They  must 
bear  the  brunt  of  the  heavy  plunging  of  their  opponents 
through  the  center,  and  at  the  same  time  struggle  to 
break  through  the  opposing  line,  which  is  doing  its  ut- 
most to  prevent  them.  They  must  do  this  without  a  let- 
up just  as  long  as  the  other  side  has  the  ball,  and,  more- 
over, in  that  part  of  the  line  which  is  most  compact. 
Then,  when  their  own  side  has  the  ball,  they  are  expected 
to  use  their  strength  and  wits  from  the  moment  the  ball 
is  put  in  play  until  it  is  again  down,  in  blocking,  making 
openings,  and  in  interfering  for  the  player  who  is  at- 
tempting to  run.  Further,  they  have  little  time  to  catch 
their  wind,  for  almost  the  first  point  which  should  be 
drummed  into  them  by  the  captain  or  coach  is  to  be  al- 
ways on  hand  the  moment  the  ball  is  down,  to  make 
or  prevent  a  quick  play.  It  can  be  truly  said  that  no 
team  is  well  trained  until  the  center  part  of  the  eleven,  as 
indeed  the  whole  team,  is  prompt  on  this  point.  While 
the  guards  have  all  this  hard  work,  they  seldom  have  a 

(26) 


27 

chance  to  distinguish  themselves,  either  by  a  run,  a  clean 
tackle,  or  a  fine  interference  which  is  apparent  to  the  un- 
trained eye  of  the  spectator.  On  the  other  hand,  it  does 
not  take  much  yielding  at  the  center  to  bring  forth  the 
criticism  that  that  part  of  the  line  is  weak. 

On  account  of  the  nature  of  their  work,  the  guards 
should  be  large  and  powerful,  like  the  center.  It  is  even 
more  necessary  that  they  should  be  quick,  agile,  and 
swift,  than  the  center,  because  the  guards  should  always 
go  through  the  line  when  the  opponents  have  the  ball. 
On  their  success  in  doing  this  largely  depends  the  strength 
or  weakness  of  the  team's  defense. 

The  chief  point  in  defensive  play  is  to  tackle  the  runner 
before  he  reaches  the  line,  and  the  guards  are  large  fac- 
tors in  doing  this.  Unless  this  is  done,  the  ball  can  be 
steadily  carried  down  the  field  when  not  lost  by  a  fumble, 
for  any  team  is  able  to  gain  five  yards  in  three  consecu- 
tive trials  when  the  runner  is  allowed  to  re'ach  the  line 
each  time  before  being  tackled.  Any  means,  therefore, 
which  the  guards  can  employ  to  interfere  with  the 
quarter-back  before  he  has  passed  the  ball,  or  the  runner 
before  he  has  reached  the  line,  should  certainly  be  used. 
All  the  strategy  and  tricks  known  in  wrestling  which  can 
be  applied  to  the  situation  should  be  eagerly  sought  and 
practiced.  The  great  point  to  remember  is  to  apply  the 
power  quickly  and  hard,  to  summon  all  the  strength  for 
the  initial  effort,  and  to  work  desperately  until  free  from 
interference.  Only  by  doing  this  can  the  guards  hope  to 
break  through  and  secure  the  quarter-back  or  runner  be- 
hind the  line.  Slow  pushing,  however  powerful,  will  ac- 
complish little.  If  held  in  check  until  the  runner  and  the 
pushers  strike  the  line  it  is  only  a  question  of  how  many 
yards  the  runner  will  gain  before  the  mass  breaks  and 
falls  forward. 


28 

In  applying  his  power  the  guard,  as  well  as  his  com- 
panion rushers,  has  an  immense  advantage  in  being  per- 
mitted to  use  his  hands  and  arms  freely  in  getting  his  op- 
ponent out  of  the  way.  This  enables  him  to  put  into  practice 
all  the  skill  he  possesses  in  handling  an  opponent  who  is 
allowed  to  block  only  with  the  body.  The  guard  also 
has  another  advantage  in  being  free  to  move  whenever  he 
pleases,  but  he  must  remember  that  the  opening  for  the 
runner  may  be  made  on  either  side  of  him  and  be  careful 
not  to  give  his  opponent  help  in  making  it.  It  assists  the 
guard  greatly  in  breaking  through  if  the  tackle  draws 
out  the  opposing  line  as  much  as  is  wise  in  a  good  de- 
fense. This  separation  should  be  wide  enough  to  allow 
the  players  in  defense  to  break  through  easily  without  in- 
terfering with  each  other.  It  is  also  usually  helpful  in 
breaking  through  to  be  restless,  but  cautious  at  the  same 
time,  in  order  not  to  give  the  opponent  an  advantage. 

The  guards  and  the  tackles  especially  should  watch  for 
signs  which  shall  indicate  what  the  play  will  be,  and  then 
go  through  the  line  as  low  as  possible  for  a  tackle.  They 
should  break  through  to  the  right  or  left  of  their  op- 
ponents as  seems  best  at  the  moment.  In  order  to 
break  through  quickly  they  must  have  their  eyes  on  the 
ball  when  it  is  snapped  and  spring  forward  the  instant  it 
is  put  in  play.  Quick  glances  may  be  cast  at  the  oppo- 
nents while  still  constantly  watching  the  ball. 

The  guards,  with  the  center,  are  usually  called  upon  to 
meet  the  heavy  charges  in  the  opening  plays  from  the 
center  of  the  field.  These,  as  a  rule,  come  in  the  form  of 
wedges.  Two  points  should  be  carefully  regarded  by 
these  center  men  in  attacking  a  wedge:  first,  to  approach 
the  wedge  with  the  body  bent  in  a  position  for  greatest 
power  and  for  meeting  the  wedge  low  down;  second,  to 


29 

focus  on  the  mass  in  such  a  way  that  it  cannot  break 
through  between  them  without  being  separated,  and  so 
giving  the  guards  a  chance  to  tackle  the  runner.  In  do- 
ing this  it  should  be  the  aim  to  focus  as  nearly  as  possible 
upon  the  point  of  the  wedge,  in  order  to  check  its  ad- 
vance and  throw  the  forwards  back  on  the  runner.  The 
runner  will  then  be  forced  to  come  out,  if  he  has  not  al- 
ready become  entangled  in  the  mass.  In  making  the 
attack  the  guards  and  center  should  run  with  dash  and  de- 
termination, at  the  same  time  watching  close!)'  for  the 
runner  and  trying  hard  to  tackle  him. 

Two  successful  ways  of  attacking  a  wedge  have  been 
originated.  One  member  of  the  center  trio  will  some- 
times jump  over  the  heads  of  the  forwards  and  try  to 
fall  on  the  runner  and  thus  secure  him,  or  he  will  hurl 
himself  headlong  at  the  feet  of  the  oncoming  wedge  and 
cause  it  to  trip  over  him.  To  make  either  one  of  these 
attacks  well  the  player  must  be  perfectly  fearless,  and 
should  also  use  good  judgment.  In  the  former  case  the 
player  must  time  his  jump  and  not  land  short  of  the  run- 
ner, or  he  will  be  pushed  quickly  to  the  ground  or  carried 
along  on  the  heads  of  the  forwards;  neither  must  he 
jump  so  far  over  that  he  will  miss  his  man.  If  he  throws 
himself  in  front  of  the  wedge  he  should  not  do  it  too 
soon,  lest  the  wedge  will  be  able  to  avoid  or  step  over 
him. 

When  a  wedge  is  formed  in  the  line  on  a  scrimmage  the 
guards  and  center  must  be  sure  to  get  low,  or  they  will 
be  carried  along  before  it.  The  point  of  the  wedge  must 
be  held  in  check.  In  resisting  the  attack  of  a  revolving 
wedge  the  guards  should  separate  slightly  from  the 
center  and  join  with  the  tackle  in  trying  to  penetrate  the 
mass  to  secure  the  runner.  This  should  be  done  in  stich 


30 

a  way  that  the  defense  shall  not  be  weakened.  Care 
should  also  be  taken  by  the  side  of  the  line  away  from 
which  the  wedge  revolves  not  to  add  impetus  to  it  by  push- 
ing too  far. 

The  position  of  the  guard  varies  slightly  in  defense  and 
offense.  In  offense  the  first  thought  must  be  to  protect 
the  quarter-back  until  he  has  passed  the  ball;  his  next 
to  block  his  man  long  enough  to  prevent  him  from  reach- 
ing the  runner.  His  third  thought,  which  may  also  influ- 
ence the  way  he  stands  while  he  attends  to  the  former 
work,  is  to  make  the  opening  if  the  play  is  in  his  quarter. 
His  fourth  thought,  which  will  be  influenced  by  his  first 
and  second,  is  to  get  in  his  interference  ahead  of  the 
runner  when  practicable,  or  follow  him  as  closely  as  pos- 
sible and  do  what  he  can  to  assist.  In  fulfilling  all  these 
duties  he  will  be  limited  in  his  freedom  of  movement. 
He  cannot  stand  too  far  from  the  center  rusher,  and  he 
may  be  compelled  to  stand  shoulder  to  shoulder  with  him. 

Further,  he  will  have  to  assume  a  position  which  best 
enables  him  to  carry  out  his  duties.'  It  may  be  well  for 
him  to  stand  with  both  feet  on  a  line,  or  it  may  be  better 
to  have  one  or  the  other  foot  behind,  according  to  his  pur- 
pose. It  is  nearly  always  better  for  him  to  bend  forward, 
or  even  to  get  down  very  low  if  his  opponent  tries  to  get 
under  him.  The  bent-over  position  is  better  for  meeting 
attacks,  because  the  weight  is  well  forward  and  low 
down  and  the  body  is  better  braced  and  not  'so  much  ex- 
posed to  effective  handling.  In  this  position,  also,  one 
can  move  forward  better  for  making  an  opening. 

In  blocking  the  legs  should  usually  be  spread  widely 
apart.  They  should  not  be  spread  so  much,  however, 
that  the  guard  will  not  be  able  to  move  quickly  whenever 
his  opponent  shifts  his  position.  In  blocking,  as  in  break- 


3i 

ing  through  the  line,  the  guard  should  try  hard  to  get  his 
power  into  action  before  his  opponent.  This  can  be  best 
done  by  a  shoulder  check. 

The  general  position  of  the  guard  must  be  determined 
by  the  play  in  hand  and  the  way  the  opponent  stands. 
He  may  be  forced  to  move  out  a  little  because  his  oppo- 
nent does  so,  but  he  must  be  careful  that  the  opening  be- 
tween him  and  the  center  is  not  occupied  by  the  quarter- 
back or  some  other  free  player,  in  which  case  the  tackle 
will  sometimes  be  obliged  to  step  in  and  take  the  oppos- 
ing guard.  Neither  the  guard  nor  any  other  rusher 
except  the  center  should  ever  take  a  fixed  position  in 
standing. 

On  the  defensive  much  depends  on  strong  blocking  by 
the  guards,  for  weak  blocking  is  fatal  at  the  center  of  the 
line.  The  quarter-back,  being  so  near  to  the  guards,  is 
in  imminent  danger  in  case  of  weak  blocking,  and  he  can 
little  afford  the  loss  of  a  fraction  of  a  second  in  handling 
the  ball,  much  less  a  fumble.  Under  these  circumstances, 
if  a  fumble  occurs,  the  quarter-back  must  always  fall  on 
the  ball  and  not  run  any  risks  of  losing  it.  Furthermore, 
in  weak  blocking  the  runner  has  little  chance  on  a  dash 
into  the  line,  for  in  place  of  an  opening  he  finds  an  oppo- 
nent. "  Block  hard  "  has  come  to  be  one  of  the  axioms 
of  the  game.  Blocking  for  a  kick  is  treated  fully  in  the 
chapter  on  team  play. 

The  guard  has  an  advantage  over  the  center  in  making 
an  opening  for  the  runner  in  only  one  particular,  and  that 
is  that  he  is  freer  to  move  in  his  position.  The  center 
rusher  is  largely  dependent  on  the  position  which  his  op- 
ponent takes  in  standing  to  help  him  out  in  this  matter, 
since  he  cannot  move  his  relative  position  from  the  oppos- 
ing center  more  than  the  latter  allows;  but  he  can  often 
3 


32 

influence  that  position  to  suit  his  own  purpose.  By  clever 
generalship  and  strategy  he  may  be  able  to  induce  his  op- 
ponent to  do  the  very  thing  he  needs  to  help  him  out  in 
his  play.  Some  of  the  ways  of  handling  an  opponent  are 
given  in  the  description  of  the  duties  of  the  center 
rusher. 

When  the  guard  is  going  to  run  with  the  ball  he  should 
take  a  position  which  will  enable  him  to  get  away  from 
his  opponent  quickly,  but  he  should  not  make  his  inten- 
tions evident.  For  this  reason  it  is  better  for  the  guard, 
as  well  as  for  the  tackle,  not  to  take  a  set  position  until 
the  signal  is  given;  but  if  one  is  taken,  let  it  be  such  that 
it  would  not  make  it  necessary  to  change  in  order  to  run 
with  the  ball.  The  one  who  is  to  run  with  the  ball  should 
seek  in  every  way  to  conceal  the  purpose  of  the  play. 

The  guard  is  in  the  most  difficult  position  from  which 
to  get  under  headway  in  order  to  run  with  the  ball.  As 
commonly  played,  the  guard  swings  round  the  quarter- 
back and  dives  into  an  opening  between  the  tackle  and 
guard  on  the  other  side  of  the  center.  The  very  begin- 
ning of  his  run  is  the  most  difficult  part.  He  cannot  run 
fast  from  his  position,  for  he  has  only  a  step  or  two  to 
make  before  he  must  turn  sharply  around  the  quarter- 
back and  run  in  almost  an  opposite  direction.  If  he  runs 
back  too  far  he  will  be  tackled  before  he  reaches  the  line, 
and  if  he  turns  in  closely,  he  is  likely  to  run  against  his 
own  men  as  they  are  struggling  with  their  opponents. 
It  needs,  therefore,  careful  judgment  and  a  great  deal  of 
practice  to  be  able  to  run  well  from  this  position. 

Long-legged  guards,  as  a  rule,  find  it  easier  to  take  a 
long  step  backward  with  the  foot  next  the  center,  and  use 
that  as  a  purchase  from  which  to  circle  around  the  quarter- 
back. Some  guards  prefer  to  take  three  or  four  short, 


33 

quick  steps  in  making  the  turn  around  the  quarter-back. 
Any  way  which  will  enable  the  guard  to  get  under  head- 
way most  quickly  is  the  method  which  should  be  used. 
It  will  be  easy  for  the  quarter-back  to  place  the  ball  in 
the  guard's  hands,  and  it  will  probably  be  better  for  him 
to  carry  it  under  the  arm  away  from  the  center. 

When  the  guard  runs  around  to  interfere,  he  should 
place  himself  so  that  he  can  get  away  quickly  and  not 
"  give  the  play  away."  If  the  guard  is  to  run  around  in 
order  to  interfere  by  getting  ahead  of  the  runners,  the 
quickest  possible  start  is  necessary.  There  must  be  no 
delay  whatever,  even  when  the  guard  is  a  fast  runner,  or 
else  the  runner  with  the  ball  will  have  to  slow  up  so  much 
that  he  cannot  make  the  play.  Whenever  the  guard  runs 
around  to  interfere  or  to  run  with  the  ball,  the  tackle 
should  keep  the  opposing  guard  from  following  him. 
The  guard  can  sometimes  do  this  himself  by  pushing  his 
opponent  back  just  as  he  starts,  but  it  must  be  done  in 
such  a  way  that  it  will  not  delay  him. 


THE  TACKLE. 

The  tackle  occupies  the  most  important  position  on  the 
rush  line.  It  is  possible  to  get  along  with  a  lumbering 
center  and  slow  guards  if  they  are  able  to  block  well  and 
make  good  openings,  but  it  is  not  possible  to  have  slow 
tackles  and  play  good  football  at  the  same  time.  The  po- 
sition which  the  tackle  occupies  in  the  line  explains  this, 
and  it  is  best  appreciated  when  it  is  understood  that  the 
tackles  should  take  part  in  more  than  half  the  defensive 
work  of  the  team. 

The  tackle  occupies  the  most  responsible  position  be- 
cause he  assists  in  checking  two  distinctly  different  styles 
of  play.  On  the  side  toward  the  center  he  is  to  help  the 
guard  in  blocking  the  heavy  plunges  which  are  frequently 
aimed  at  that  point  of  the  line,  while  on  the  other  side  he 
has  to  work  with  the  end-rusher  against  all  plays  between 
them  and  on  all  plays  around  the  end.  To  play  this  po- 
sition properly  on  the  defensive,  therefore,  requires  a 
master  mind  and  an  equipment  of  physical  capacity  and 
skill  unequaled  by  any  position  on  the  eleven. 

Next  to  the  half-back  the  tackle,  from  his  position  in 
the  line,  has  the  best  opportunity  for  running  with  the 
ball.  In  fact,  he  can  be  used  with  telling  effect,  if  a  good 
runner,  in  supplementing  and  resting  the  half-backs. 
Again,  he  is  the  end-rusher's  chief  assistant  in  going 
down  the  field  on  all  kicks,  and  he  must  be  under  the 
ball  almost  as  soon  as  the  end  himself,  in  order  to  prevent 
the  catcher  from  dodging  inside  the  end  men. 

(34 


35 

The  points  mentioned  are  sufficient  to  show  that  the 
tackle  should  be  a  man  of  considerable  weight,  because 
he  has  to  bear  a  great  deal  of  the  heavy  plunging  into  the 
line.  The  greater  the  weight  the  better,  provided,  of 
course,  that  the  other  requirements  are  met.  As  a  rule, 
it  is  rare  that  a  man  weighing  over  one  hundred  and 
eighty  pounds  can  meet  these  requirements,  and  it  is 
more  often  that  men  weighing  one  hundred  and  sixty-five 
or  seventy  pounds  are  selected  for  this  position  on  the 
best  teams.  The  general  build  of  the  man  also  qualifies 
his  usefulness.  The  one  hundred  and  sixty-five  pounds 
will  be  much  more  effective  in  a  man  from  five  feet  six  to 
five  feet  ten  inches  in  height  than  in  one  above  that 
height.  In  truth,  the  man  of  stocky  build  can  usually 
fill  this  position  much  better,  because  his  weight  is  nearer 
the  ground  and  he  is  always  in  a  position  to  make  a  low 
tackle.  As  a  great  deal  of  his  tackling  should  be  dashing 
and  brilliant,  right  in  the  midst  of  interference  where  he 
must  throw  himself  instantly,  a  tall  man  would  be  at  a 
disadvantage.  A  thick-set,  round-bodied  man  with  large 
arms  and  legs  would  also  be  a  much  harder  man  to  stop 
when  running  with  the  ball. 

Of  equal  importance  with  weight,  the  points  which 
should  determine  the  selection  of  the  tackle  are  agility, 
speed,  and  the  ability  to  tackle  in  the  face  of  interference. 
The  name  of  the  position  indicates  the  work  of  the 
player.  He  is  to  tackle.  Even  speed  can  to  a  small  de- 
gree be  dispensed  with  if  the  man  is  quick  and  agile  and 
is  a  sure  tackier.  Quickness  in  getting  through  the  line, 
agility  in  avoiding  interference,  sure  tackling,  getting 
down  the  field  on  a  kick,  and  running  with  the  ball  are 
essential  qualifications  to  look  for  in  selecting  a  man  to 
fill  the  position  of  tackle. 


36 

The  tackle  must  be  endowed  with  more  than  the  ordi- 
nary amount  of  shrewdness  and  judgment.  To  a  certain 
extent  this  can  be  acquired  by  long  practice,  but  the 
tackle  must  be  of  quick  perception  and  good  judgment 
naturally  in  order  to  play  the  position  in  the  best  manner. 

When  acting  on  the  defensive  the  distance  which  he 
should  stand  from  the  guard  and  the  manner  of  going 
through  the  line,  either  to  the  inside  or  outside  of  his  op- 
ponent, should  be  determined  by  previous  judgment  as 
to  where  the  play  is  to  be  made  and  influenced  by  an  in- 
stantaneous perception  as  the  play  starts.  The  position, 
too,  must  be  taken  with  the  utmost  caution  and  selected 
at  just  the  right  distance  from  the  guard  to  best  meet  the 
play  and  still  be  able  to  defend  his  position  on  either 
side.  There  is  need  of  the  closest  and  quickest  observa- 
tion and  cleverest  judgment. 

Moreover,  as  many  of  the  plays  cannot  be  determined 
beforehand,  such  a  position  must  be  taken  as  will  best 
enable  the  tackle  to  check  any  play  which  can  be  made. 
He  must  then  be  on  the  alert  for  the  very  first  indications 
of  the  play  and  act  on  them,  and  at  the  same  time  he 
must  still  keep  the  closest  watch  for  later  developments 
which  change  the  direction  in  which  the  ball  will  finally 
be  carried. 

Playing  up  close  to  the  guard  is  always  dangerous  un- 
less it  is  necessary  to  do  so  in  order  to  stop  a  wedge  play, 
for  the  tackle  could  then  be  blocked  in  very  easily  from 
helping,  if  an  attack  were  made  on  the  space  between  him- 
self and  the  end  man,  or  in  a  play  around  the  end.  He 
therefore  would  cut  himself  off  from  defending  two-thirds 
of  his  territory  and  the  most  defenseless  part  of  the  line. 
Playing  far  away  from  the  guard  is  also  dangerous,  for 
he  then  leaves  the  part  of  his  territory  which  is  nearest 


37 

the  opposing  half-backs  too  much  exposed  and  gives  his 
opponent  a  chance  to  block  him  off  from  defending  it.  Of 
course,  if  the  tackle  were  free  from  the  checking  of  an 
opponent,  he  could  play  some  distance  away  from  the 
guard  and  still  defend  the  space  between  them  ;  but  the 
fact  that  there  is  a  player  opposite  who  is  giving  all  his 
attention,  wit,  and  energy  to  securing  an  advantage  over 
him,  gives  a  turn  to  the  problem  which  he  cannot  ignore 
in  making  his  calculations.  The  tackle  takes  a  certain 
position  ;  the  opponent  takes  one  also.  It  may  be  a  little 
to  the  right  or  a  little  to  the  left  of  him,  or  it  may  be 
directly  in  front  of  him.  The  tackle  may  change  his 
position  a  little  and  then  the  opponent  perhaps  change 
his,  but  their  relative  positions  may,  or  may  not,  be 
changed  ;  or  possibly  his  opponent  may  remain  in  the 
same  place.  Just  this  action  or  inaction  on  the  part  of 
the  opposing  tackle  is  sufficient  to  help  him  determine 
how  he  should  play  in  his  defense,  and  is  one  of  the  signs 
to  be  considered  in  deciding  upon  his  own  position  and 
action. 

The  tackle  should  usually  play  right  up  to  the  line,  on 
the  defense.  Sometimes  with  a  very  quick  opponent,  it 
may  be  better  to  play  a  little  back  from  the  line.  He 
should  be  restless,  and  on  the  alert  for  an  opportunity  to 
go  through  on  the  side  of  his  opponent  offering  the 
best  advantage.  He  should  watch  the  ball  closely  and 
spring  the  instant  it  is  snapped.  His  course  of  action  in 
reference  to  his  opponent  must  be  to  get  him  out  of  the 
way  as  quickly  as  possible.  It  may  often  be  best  for  the 
tackle  simply  to  drive  his  opponent  back  with  hard,  quick 
pushes.  This  might  frequently  be  best  when  the  play  is 
between  him  and  the  guard,  because  the  time  for  prepara- 
tion to  tackle  is  exceedingly  short  before  the  runner  will 


38 

be  going  past,  and  the  whole  attention  must  be  given  to 
securing  a  momentary  freedom  from  interference,  for  a 
quick.spring.  The  tackle  has  a  great  deal  of  this  quick 
tackling  to  do  because  the  runs  are  so  frequently  made  in 
his  region.  Much  of  this  also  must  be  done  right  in  the 
midst  of  interference,  when  the  only  chance  to  get  the 
runner  is  by  hurling  himself  headlong  at  him  as  he 
passes. 

On  end  plays  the  tackle  must  break  away  from  his  op- 
ponent as  quickly  as  possible.  He  will  have  no  time  then 
to  carry  his  man  before  him  except,  perhaps  for  an 
instant,  as  he  pushes  him  back  to  get  by  him.  Yet  he 
must  make  sure  to  knock  his  opponent  sufficiently  off  his 
balance  to  prevent  his  following  him  and  giving  him  a 
shove  at  a  critical  moment.  In  defense  on  an  end  play, 
everything  depends  on  the  tackle  reaching  the  runner 
before  he  begins  to  turn  in  order  to  circle  the  end,  and 
before  he  has  swung  in  closely  behind  his  interference. 
The  runner  then  has  not  yet  gotten  under  full  speed 
and  the  interferers  are  somewhat  scattered  and  looking 
toward  the  end.  The  tackle  has  the  best  chance  for  de- 
feating end  runs  ;  in  this  he  is  ably  seconded  by  the  end 
man,  the  two  working  together,  in  fine  team  play. 

The  tackle  must  go  through  the  line  on  the  defense. 
The  plan  of  waiting  until  it  is  seen  where  the  run  will  be 
made  and  then  running  behind  his  line  to  help,  if  the  play 
appears  to  be  on  the  other  side,  is  disastrous  to  a  good  de- 
fensive game.  It  not  only  is  dangerous,  because  it  leaves 
the  way  clear  for  a  splendid  run  on  a  double  pass,  but  it 
is  also  especially  harmful  because  it  gets  the  tackle  into 
the  habit  of  waiting  for  every  play  to  become  well  start- 
ed, and  this  is  fatal  to  a  strong  defense.  If  the  play  is 
around  the  other  end,  the  tackle  should  follow  the  run- 


39 

ner  around  and  try  to  overtake  him.  It  is  sometimes 
possible  for  a  fast  runner  to  do  this  when  he  breaks 
through  quickly.  In  following  the  man  with  the  ball,  the 
tackle  must  be  on  the  watch  constantly  for  a  double  pass. 
If  he  suspects  one  is  to  be  made,  he  must  be  sure  not  to 
be  drawn  in  or  blocked  as  he  runs  behind  the  line.  It 
would  be  better,  in  that  case,  to  go  straight  through. 
The  tackle  can  do  more  to  defeat  a  double  pass  than  any 
other  player,  for,  if  he  plays  his  position  well,  he  will 
meet  the  runner  when  there  is  not  more  than  one  inter- 
ferer  to  combat.  If  he  then  does  not  tackle  the  runner, 
he  can  force  him  to  run  so  far  back  of  the  line  that  the 
rest  of  the  team  will  be  able  to  come  to  his  assistance  be- 
fore he  circles  the  end. 

When  the  opponents  are  going  to  kick,  the  tackle  has 
an  especial  burden  resting  on  him  because  he  is  in  a  very 
advantageous  position  for  breaking  through  quickly  and 
stopping  the  ball.  No  other  rusher  should  reach  the  full- 
back so  quickly,  unless,  perhaps,  the  guard,  because  none 
other  is  so  well  placed  and  at  the  same  time  interfered 
with  so  little. 

He  should,  therefore,  go  through  with  all  his  strength 
and  speed,  and  jump  high  in  the  air  to  stop  the  ball. 
His  hands  should  be  raised  at  the  same  time  in  order  to 
place  as  high  an  obstacle  in  the  way  of  the  ball  as  is 
possible.  The  tackle  on  the  same  side  as  the  kicking 
foot  has  a  better  chance  to  stop  the  ball  than  his  com- 
panion on  the  other  side,  and  he  must,  therefore,  put 
forth  his  utmost  efforts.  Frequently,  the  tackle,  like  the 
guards  and  center,  can  work  some  clever  team  play  in 
conjunction  with  an  extra  man,  whereby  one  or  the  other 
can  go  through  the  line  with  little  opposition. 

There  are  a  variety  of  tactics  which  can  be  employed 


40 

in  getting  through  the  line,  and  every  tackle  should  be 
able  to  use  them  at  will.  Those  are  best  which  enable 
the  tackle  to  get  through  quickly  and  at  the  same  time 
permit  him  to  watch  the  runner  closely.  This  is  a  point 
which  ought  to  be  deeply  impressed  on  the  minds  of  all 
the  rushers.  The  situation  changes  so  quickly  when  a 
run  is  being  made  that  it  is  not  safe  to  have  the  eyes  off 
the  runner  for  a  second.  The  methods  usually  employed 
in  breaking  through  the  line  are  :  striking  the  opponent 
in  the  chest  quickly  and  hard,  and  following  it  up  with 
a  shove  to  one  side  when  he  is  off  his  balance ;  whirl- 
ing suddenly  around  him,  using  either  foot  as  a  pivot; 
ducking  quickly  to  one  side  ;  making  a  feint  to  go  one 
side  and  going  the  other  ;  striking  the  opponent  with 
the  head  or  shoulder  and  lifting  him  aside  ;  stepping  a 
little  to  one  side  as  the  opponent  comes  forward  and 
swinging  him  through  behind  him.  The  tackle  can 
sometimes  secure  an  advantage  for  breaking  through  by 
pushing  his  opponent  back  from  the  line  just  before  the 
ball  is  snapped.  He  must  be  very  free  to  move,  and  go 
through  with  a  jump.  It  is  better  to  keep  as  low  down 
as  possible  in  doing  this. 

The  position  which  the  tackle  should  take  on  the 
defense  against  mass  plays  from  the  center  of  the  field  is 
shown  in  the  diagrams  further  on.  He  should  move  off 
from  the  guard  sufficiently  to  protect  the  side  of  the  field 
and  at  the  same  time  be  able  to  spring  back  close  to  him  on 
any  play  directly  forward.  It  is  his  special  duty  to  tackle 
the  runner  if  he  comes  out  at  the  side  of  the  formation. 
In  case  the  runner  does  not  come  out  before  the  oppos- 
ing rushers  meet,  the  tackle  should  dive  in  and  secure 
him,  if  possible,  but  in  doing  this  he  must  be  careful  not 
to  leave  too  great  a  space  between  himself  and  the  guard, 


as  an  opening  through  which  to  send  the  runner  may  be 
intended  at  that  very  point. 

It  is  impossible  to  lay  down  rules  of  action  for  the 
tackle  on  wedge  plays  in  the  line.  He  must  work  accord- 
ing to  his  best  judgment  based  on  the  situation  ;  but  an 
important  factor  in  successful  play  will  be  to  put  in  the 
work  low  down.  If  he  is  caught  by  the  wedge  in  an  up- 
right, or  nearly  upright  position,  he  will  be  rendered 
absolutely  useless.  For  this  reason,  it  is  often  best  to 
dive  in  at  the  side  of  the  wedge  about  knee  high  and 
try  to  tackle  the  runner,  or  cause  him  to  fall  over  him. 
If  the  wedge  is  revolving,  it  is  often  best  for  the  tackle 
to  fall  down  in  front  of  it.  The  tackle  must  consider  it 
his  first  duty  to  assist  the  center  and  guards  in  checking 
the  wedge,  and  leave  the  other  players  to  attend  to  the 
runner  if  he  comes  out  from  behind  or  at  the  side. 

On  the  offense,  the  tackle  cannot  leave  any  unpro- 
tected space  between  himself  and  the  guard,  if  it  be  occu- 
pied by  an  opponent.  He  must  therefore  always  take 
the  inside  man.  This  may  require  him  to  play  close  to 
the  guard.  From  this  position  he  must  do  all  his  run- 
ning with  the  ball,  all  his  blocking,  all  his  interference 
for  the  runners,  and  make  all  his  openings  ;  varying  his 
attitude  toward  his  opponent  to  meet  the  special  need  of 
the  moment.  In  making  his  opening  the  tackle  has  to 
outwit  and  combat  a  very  free  opponent,  one  who,  as  a 
rule,  is  constantly  changing  his  position.  This  renders  it 
difficult,  sometimes,  to  make  an  opening  because  fre- 
quently it  has  to  be  done  while  the  opponent  is  changing 
his  position,  and  when,  perhaps,  the  tackle  himself  is  not 
in  a  favorable  position  for  making  that  particular  open- 
ing. Likewise,  when  trying  to  block  his  opponent,  the 
tackle  must  follow  him  closely  and  keep  in  front  of  him,. 


42 

and  must  be  all  on  tiptoe  to  dart  forward  to  get  in  a  body 
check  before  the  opponent  acts. 

When  the  tackle  runs  with  the  ball  or  moves  away 
from  his  position  to  accompany  the  runner,  he  is  much 
more  at  liberty  in  choosing  his  place  in  the  line.  His 
great  aim  should  be  to  take  a  position  which  should  not 
be  noticeable  by  its  strong  contrast  to  previous  ones,  and 
yet,  at  the  same  time,  be  one  which  he  can  use  to  the 
greatest  advantage  in  the  play  in  hand.  Usually  that 
position  should  be  up  in  the  line  not  more  than  two  or 
three  feet  from  the  guard,  but  sometimes  it  is  better  to 
stand  a  little  behind  the  line. 

It  is  most  important  to  the  tackle  when  he  runs  with 
the  ball  that  he  get  away  from  his  opponent  with  the  ut- 
most quickness,  and  then,  that  he  run  with  tremendous 
speed  and  power.  The  secret  of  successful  running 
from  any  position  lies  in  this.  The  practice  given  to  im- 
proving in  this  particular  should  be  faithful  and  constant. 
The  run  of  the  tackle  cannot  be  successful  until  there  is 
added  to  the  quick  start  and  strong  headway,  such  train- 
ing in  taking  his  course  that  he  will  neither  run  too  near 
the  line,  nor  too  far  back  from  it ;  and  the  ability  to  circle 
around  the  quarter-back  and  take  the  ball  from  him 
without  a  diminution  in  speed,  and  then  plunge  into  his 
opening  with  a  force  which  cannot  be  stopped  short  of 
several  yards.  Much  depends  on  the  course  taken.  The 
tackle's  failure  in  running  often  results  from  slowing 
up  to  turn  into  the  right  opening  and  thus  losing  his 
power.  Instructions  in  running  and  holding  the  ball  are 
given  in  the  chapter  on  the  half-back  and  full-back. 


THE  END-RUSHER. 

The  end-rushers  fill  two  of  the  most  important  positions 
on  the  eleven.  In  defense,  their  especial  duty  is  to  pre- 
vent the  long  runs  of  the  game.  It  is  an  unusual  thing 
for  a  long  run  to  be  made  through  the  center  part  of  the 
line  on  account  of  the  support  given  the  rushers  by  the 
quarter-back  and  half-backs.  Let  a  runner  once  get 
around  the  end  with  one  or  two  interferers  ahead  of  him, 
as  is  usually  the  case  when  such  runs  are  made,  and  he  is 
likely  to  go  a  long  distance  down  the  field  and  not  infre- 
quently make  a  touchdown.  In  defending  his  territory 
against  these  runs  the  end  stands  at  the  most  remote  part 
of  the  field  for  assistance  to  be  rendered  him.  He  is  at 
the  extreme  part  of  the  rush  line  and  has  no  one  close  to 
him  to  help  him.  His  nearest  neighbor,  the  tackle,  must 
be  depended  on  for  most  of  the  assistance,  and  when  he 
cannot  render  it,  the  end  is  put  to  the  test  of  tackling  a 
runner  preceded  by  a  group  of  interferers.  In  such  an 
emergency  a  deep  responsibility  rests  upon  the  end- 
rusher,  because  he  is  probably  the  last  man  left  to  pre- 
vent a  long  run  and  perhaps  a  touchdown,  producing  a 
sensation  akin  to  that  of  the  full-back  when  he  alone 
stands  between  the  runner  and  the  goal. 

Moreover,  the  end-rusher  has  to  meet  the  runner  under 
most  trying  circumstances^  The  runner  and  the  inter- 
ferers have  gotten  well  under  way  ;  they  have  passed  the 
most  dangerous  spot  in  the  line  and  are  coming  on  at 
great  speed.  The  interference  is  now  more  focused  and 

(43) 


44 


effective  in  arrangement  than  it  has  yet  been.  There  are 
more  interferers  and  they  are  more  closely  bunched.  At 
the  same  time,  the  end  well  knows  that  he  is  an  especial 
mark  on  all  sides.  He  realizes  that  a  particular  man  is 
appointed  to  do  his  utmost  to  check  his  play  and  that  if 
this  man  fails  to  do  it,  the  work  is  to  be  attended  to  by 
the  other  interferers  who  come  immediately  after.  Under 
these  difficulties  in  tackling  and  maneuvering,  it  is  not 
strange  that  every  captain  is  most  careful  in  the  selection 
and  training  of  his  end  men. 

The  kind  of  man  who  could  play  a  brilliant  game  at 
end,  might  not,  perhaps,  be  able  to  fill  any  other  position 
in  the  rush  line,  yet  this  is  not  necessarily  true.  His 
qualification  would  be  questionable  only  as  regards  build 
and  weight.  There  are  most  brilliant  end  players  who 
only  weigh  about  one  hundred  and  fifty  pounds,  and 
sometimes  a  little  less,  but  the  tendency  now  is  toward 
selecting  slightly  heavier  players  for  that  position  in  order 
to  gain  more  weight  with  which  to  meet  the  tremendous 
on-rush  of  the  interferers.  -  But  it  is  not  infrequent  that 
the  light,  agile,  cat-like  men  are  much  more  likely  to 
tackle  the  runner,  and  so  are  selected  in  preference  to 
those  possessing  plenty  of  weight  but  less  skill.  The 
tackling  of  these  light,  quick  men  is  necessarily  most 
brilliant,  because  they  do  not  bore  their  way  through  to 
the  runner  but  seize  a  momentary  opening  to  put  in  their 
telling  work.  Such  a  man,  as  has  been  said,  could  not 
play  in  any  other  position  in  the  rush  line,  for  he  would 
not  be  heavy  enough  to  stand  the  hard  pushing  and 
plunging  to  which,  for  example,  the  tackle  is  subjected. 
With  the  exception  of  meeting  .the  end  plays  and  plays 
between  the  end  and  tackle,  the  end-rusher  does  not  have 
the  hard,  wearing  work  of  the  other  rushers.  Not  that 


45 

he  does  not  have  plenty  of  work  to  do,  but  he  is  not  con- 
stantly combating  an  opponent  and  struggling  with 
might  and  main  to  get  through  the  line,  thus  being  sub- 
jected to  the  little  knocks  and  bruises  which  the  other 
rushers  have  to  endure. 

The  end-rusher  is  at  liberty  to  take  any  position  he 
chooses  on  the  offense.  His  one  thought,  however,  should 
be  to  take  that  position  from  which  he  can  best  operate 
in  helping  out  the  play.  Many  end-rushers  fail  to  do 
this.  Some  ends  play  up  in  the  line  and  follow  their  op- 
ponents wherever  they  move,  no  matter  how  far  out  they 
go.  Others  take  a  stand  a  little  back  of  the  line,  about  a 
yard  or  two  from  the  tackle,  shifting  this  now  and  then 
as  the  play  suggests  and  admits.  This  latter  is  generally 
the  best  position  which  can  be  taken  for  helping  in  the 
interference,  and  it  is  also  a  better  position  from  which  to 
start  if  the  end-rusher  is  to  run  with  the  ball  himself. 
Whenever  the  end-rusher  is  going  to  take  the  ball  he 
should  carelessly  assume  a  position  a  little  nearer  the 
quarter-back  —  perhaps  almost  behind  the  tackle.  Other- 
wise, the  distance  which  he  would  be  obliged  to  run  be- 
fore he  reached  his  opening  would  be  so  great  that  the 
opponents  would  have  enough  time  in  which  to  intercept 
the  play.  On  this  play  the  quarter-back  should  give  the 
ball  to  him  by  a  short  pass  and  then  run  ahead  to  inter- 
fere. 

If  the  end-rusher  plays  up  in  the  line  he  should  always 
take  the  inside  man  when  acting  on  the  offensive.  This 
is  a  point  frequently  forgotten,  and  oftentimes  is  the  rea- 
son why  end  runs  are  stopped  before  the  runner  reaches 
the  end.  The  end-rusher  should  also  remember  to  help  / 
the  tackle  whenever  the  latter  takes  the  ball.  In  this  case 
it  may  be  necessary  for  the  end-rusher  to  step  in  and 


46 

block  the  opposing  tackle,  but  if  the  tackle  can  break 
away  from  his  opponent  without  assistance  it  is  better 
that  the  end  should  follow  the  tackle  right  around.  When 
the  tackle  is  to  go  into  the  line  the  end  can  do  no  better 
than  place  his  hands  on  his  hips  and  steer  him  into  the 
opening.  If  the  end-rusher  does  this  well  he  can  be  of 
great  assistance  to  the  tackle  in  running,  and  at  the  same 
time  prevent  him  from  being  caught  from  the  rear.  The 
best  way  to  play  the  end  position  in  making  the  different 
evolutions,  is  shown  in  the  chapter  containing  diagrams. 

On  kjcks  into  touch  the  end-rusher  must  cover  the  ball 
well  and  secure  it  the  instant  the  full-back  puts  him  on 
side.  Whenever  an  opponent  secures  it  the  end-rusher 
on  that  side  must  be  on  the  watch  to  prevent  his  quickly 
putting  it  in  play  at  the  point  it  crossed  the  line.  He 
should  also  be  on  the  watch  for  all  side-line  tricks.  The 
other  end  man  should  return  quickly  to  his  position 
to  guard  his  field  against  a  throw  in  from  the  side  or  any 
quick  play.  The  end-rushers  must  be  sure  to  keep  their 
eyes  on  any  outlying  men  who  might  receive  the  ball  on 
a.pass. 

V/  "  Be  the  first  man  down  the  field  on  a  kick "  is  the 
motto  early  instilled  in  the  would-be  end-rusher,  and  to 
do  that  and  be  there  in  time  to  tackle  the  catcher  before 
he  starts  is  no  small  accomplishment.  It  means  that 
with  a  good  punter,  who  has  perhaps  the  wind  behind 
him  to  propel  the  ball,  the  end  must  be  exceedingly 
quick  in  starting  and  very  swift  of  foot.  If  the  end  fails 
to  get  down  the  field  in  time,  the  ball  will  be  carried  or 
kicked  back,  whereas  a  swift  runner  might  be  able  to  pre- 
vent this.  Moreover,  the  full-back  ought  not  to  be  com- 
pelled to  limit  his  kick  because  of  the  slowness  of  the 
end-rusher. 


47 

It  requires  long  practice  and  much  careful  study  to  de- 
termine just  the  direction  the  ball  has  taken  almost  at  the 
moment  it  is  kicked  without  wasting  time  in  turning 
around  or  in  looking  over  the  head  into  the  air.  Likewise 
it  requires  practice  to  decide  upon  the  best  way  of  ap- 
proaching the  man  to  whom  the  ball  is  kicked.  It  is  a 
common  fault  for  end-rushers  to  run  blindly  down  the 
field  without  knowing  the  exact  direction  which  the  ball 
has  taken,  when  a  little  study  of  the  faces  and  actions  of 
the  half-backs  will  indicate  in  a  second  whither  the  ball  is 
going. 

Another  common  fault  with  the  end-rusher  is  the  failure 
to  tackle  the  man  who  gets  the  ball.  This  results  largely 
from  over  running  him.  The  player  with  the  ball  simply 
jumps  to  one  side  at  the  proper  moment  and  lets  the  end 
go  by  in  his  headlong  run,  and  then  goes  down  the  field. 
The  one  remedy  is  that  he  should  slacken  speed  a  little 
as  he  approaches  and  watch  for  a  chance  to  tackle. 

Care  should  be  taken  by  the  end-rusher  as  he  runs 
down  the  field  to  approach  the  player  who  has  received 
the  ball  so  that  he  will  be_Jorced  to  run  on  the  inside  of 
him.  Then,  in  case  the  end  misses  his  tackle, "Tie  will  fall 
into  the  hands  of  the  other  rushers,  now  near  at  hand. 
The  position  of  the  end-rusher  when  a  kick  is  about  to 
be  made,  should  be  such  that  he  can  protect  the  field. 
Usually  he  draws  off  well  from  the  tackle.  This  must  be 
done  without  fail  when  he  has  a  large  field  to  guard,  that 
is,  when  the  other  end  of  the  line  is  near  the  side  of  the 
field.  The  general  form  of  the  rush  line  as  it  advances 
when  a  kick  is  to  be  made,  is  described  in  the  chapter  on 
team  play. 

It  may  be  said  further,  that  usually  the  end-rusher 
should  start  his  line  of  direction  slightly  towards  the  side 
4 


lines  until  he  gets  the  first  inkling  of  the  direction  the 
ball  has  taken.  He  should  then  bear  in  or  out  still  far- 
ther, according  as  seems  best.  This  would  not  be  good 
advice  to  the  end-rusher  who  stands  close  to  the  side  line. 
The  reason  for  the  end  taking  such  a  start  is  that  he 
should  protect  the  whole  field  against  a  run,  and  the  least 
protected  part  should  be  attended  to  first.  This  sugges- 
tion has  especial  weight  when  there  is  a  great  deal  of 
space  between  the  end-rusher  and  the  side  line. 

The  end-rusher  must  be  especially  watchful  at  the  start 
for  signs  of  a  short  kick,  or  for  one  which  goes  to  the 
side.  Sometimes  these  are  caused  by  inaccurate  kicking,  or 
by  the  partial  stopping  of  the  ball  by  an  opposing  rusher. 
In  any  event,  he  must  be  careful  not  to  over-run  the  ball, 
and  must  secure  it  whenever  an  opponent  puts  him  on 
side  by  touching  the  ball.  If  the  end  is  in  doubt  where 
the  ball  is,  he  should  glance  around  quickly  and  find  out. 
The  end-rushers  must  be  especially  careful  when  the  ball 
is  kicked  from  near  the  side  of  the  field,  for  it  often  hap- 
pens that  only  one  end  can  be  near  the  opponent  when 
he  catches. 

The  end-rusher  should  be  under  the  ball  when  it  falls, 
and  if  the  opponent  is  a  good  catcher  he  should  usually 
force  him  to  make  a  fair  catch.  If,  however,  the  end- 
rusher  is  where  he  is  absolutely  sure  of  securing  the 
catcher  if  he  should  run,  it  may  sometimes  be  better  for 
him  to  give  the  opponent  a  slight  chance  to  run  for  the 
sake  of  increasing  his  liability  to  drop  the  ball.  This  lia- 
bility is  further  increased  by  a  hard  tackle  just  at  the 
moment  the  catcher  starts.  The  end  should  be  on  the 
watch  to  secure  the  ball  at  such  times.  He  should  also 
make  sure  that  the  catcher  does  not  pass  the  ball  to  a 
companion  near  at  hand. 


49 

There  are  many  conditions  to  be  met  by  the  end  as  he 
goes  down  the  field  on  a  kick  which  cannot  be  described. 
He  must  note  them  as  they  come  and  act  accordingly. 
One  of  the  hardest  of  these  is  to  know  how  to  handle 
bounding  and  rolling  balls.  Observing  the  angle  at 
which  the  ball  descends,  also  the  way  it  acts  for  two  or 
three  bounds  after  it  strikes,  will  give  some  information 
on  which  to  base  action,  but  there  is  a  constant  uncer- 
tainty ;  and  in  those  cases  where  the  ball  is  revolving  on 
an  axis  constantly  shifting  as  it  goes  through  the  air, 
there  is  no  certainty  of  its  action  after  it  strikes  the 
ground.  It  therefore  takes  the  most  careful  playing  at 
such  times  on  the  part  of  the  end-rusher,  for  one  of  the  oppo- 
nents may  dart  in  opportunely  and  seize  the  ball  and  go 
sprinting  up  the  field.  If  there  is  any  chance  for  this, 
and  he  is  not  well  supported  with  helpers,  the  end-rusher 
should  immediately  touch  the  ball  and  force  a  down  for 
the  other  side.  Furthermore,  when  a  kicked  ball  is  likely 
to  go  over  the  line  in  goal,  the  end-rusher  should  do  his 
utmost  to  touch  it  just  before  it  reaches  the  five-yard  line 
so  that  it  shall  be  down  at  that  spot  and  shall  not  be 
brought  out  to  the  twenty-five  yard  line. 


THE  QUARTER-BACK. 

As  popular  opinion  has  always  assigned  the  snap-back's 
position  to  the  largest  man  on  the  eleven,  so  likewise  has 
it  given  the  quarter-back's  position  to  the  smallest  man. 
There  is  less  reason  in  having  the  smallest  man  quarter- 
back than  the  largest  player  at  center.  Indeed,  there  is 
no  question  that  a  swift,  agile  man  of  one  hundred  and 
sixty  or  one  hundred  and  seventy  pounds  would  be  the 
most  useful  quarter-back,  if  his  other  qualifications  are 
equal.  The  trouble  is  that  the  man  of  such  a  weight,  who 
was  qualified  to  fill  the  quarter-back's  position,  would  be 
the  man  who  would  be  most  needed  at  tackle  or  end,  or 
as  a  running-back.  There  is  rarely  more  than  one  man 
with  these  qualifications  on  the  best  teams,  while  there 
are  usually  several  men  of  sufficient  speed  and  agility 
among  the  candidates,  who  perhaps  could  not  be  useful 
in  any  other  position,  and  yet  are  too  skillful  players  to 
loose.  The  result  is  that  on  university  elevens  the 
quarter-back  is  usually  a  man  who  weighs  from  one  hun- 
dred and  forty  to  one  hundred  and  fifty-five  pounds,  is 
agile  and  swift,  is  a  hard  worker,  with  great  endurance 
and  unlimited  pluck.  Well  does  he  need  all  of  these 
qualities,  for  he  must  always  be  in  the  thick  of  the  fight. 
No  play  can  take  place  from  a  scrimmage  without  his 
being  a  medium  in  its  execution,  not  only  in  the  passing 
of  the  ball,  but  also,  if  he  does  his  duty,  in  assisting  the 
runner  on  his  way  up  the  field.  Not  that  he  runs  ahead 
of  the  runner  every  time,  for  he  is  unable  to  go  in  front 
on  some  plays,  but  he  can  always  get  behind  to  push  if 

(50) 


5' 

the  runner  is  stopped,  or  to  block  off  those  who  try  to 
tackle  him  from  the  rear. 

The  quarter-back's  position  demands  a  peculiarly  heady 
player  at  the  same  time  that  it  calls  for  agility  and  quick- 
ness. No  other  player  on  the  eleven  is  forced  to  do  as  much 
thinking  and  planning  while  in  the  midst  of  most  skillful 
and  invaluable  work.  He  has  no  chance  to  "soldier," 
either  mentally  or  physically,  as  the  rest  of  the  eleven 
may  do,  to  a  limited  extent,  occasionally  during  the  pro- 
gress of  the  game  if  so  disposed.  His  brain  must  be  as 
clear  as  his  muscles  are  quick  and  steady.  He  has  to 
translate  with  absolute  exactness  every  signal  which  is 
given,  and  as  accurately  carry  it  out  by  forwarding  the 
ball  in  the  most  advantageous  manner  possible  to  the 
player  who  is  to  receive  it.  On  no  account,  then,  must  a 
man  be  selected  for  this  position  who  is  inclined  to  be- 
come "  rattled,"  for  the  position  itself  is  enough  to  render 
unsteady  the  coolest  man. 

When  the  quarter-back  is  appointed  to  give  the  signals 
for  the  play  a  new  duty  emphasizes  the  importance  of  his 
being  a  heady  player,  for  he  then  is  made  the  general  of 
the  game.  By  having  this  duty  to  perform  the  chances 
for  his  making  a  mistake  in  giving  the  ball  to  the  wrong 
player  are  perhaps  slightly  decreased,  but  the  demand 
for  clever  judgment  and  shrewdness  in  field  tactics  more 
than  offsets  this. 

The  quarter-back  must  know  no  physical  fear.  He 
must  be  fearlessly  unconscious  that  there  are  several  op- 
ponents almost  within  reach  of  him  who  are  doing  their 
utmost  to  fall  upon  him.  No  nervousness  must  enter  in- 
to his  work  ;  else  he  is  not  the  man  for  the  position. 

In  assuming  his  position  on  a  down,  the  quarter-back  is 
allowed  considerable  freedom.  Some  players  prefer  to 


52 

receive  the  ball  close  up  to  the  center-rusher  and  then 
move  away  as  they  pass  it  on  to  the  runner  ;  others  take 
a  position  between  the  two,  just  as  far  away  as  is  possi- 
ble while  still  being  able  to  reach  the  center  conveniently 
for  giving  the  signal. 

The  quarter-back  who  plays  close  up  to  the  center  ren- 
ders himself  liable  to  be  interfered  with  in  his  pass  by  the 
opposite  center  and  guards,  who  may  reach  over  to  check 
his  play  ;  at  the  same  time  he  cannot  so  well  take  part  in 
the  interference  on  end  plays.  On  the  other  hand,  the 
quarter-back  who  takes  his  position  far  behind  the  center 
is  limited  in  some  of  his  plays.  He  can  be  of  more  assist- 
ance, perhaps,  in  helping  on  the  end  plays,  but  it  will  be 
impossible  for  any  of  the  guards  and  tackles  to  run  with 
the  ball  with  any  chance  of  gaining  ground,  because  they 
will  have  to  run  so  far  behind  the  line  to  receive  the  ball 
that  they  will  easily  be  tackled.  When  the  quarter-back 
takes  this  position  he  will  have  to  give  the  signal  in  some 
other  way  than  that  usually  followed.  It  has  been  cus- 
tomary for  the  quarter-back  to  press  the  calf  of  the  center 
rusher's  leg,  or  some  other  part  of  his  body,  with  his  thumb 
when  he  is  ready  for  the  ball ;  but  there  are  reasons  why 
some  other  signal  would  be  better  at  times,  and  the  giving 
of  the  signal  would  be  of  little  moment  if  there  is  to  be 
a  decided  advantage  gained  by  playing  so  far  behind  the 
center.  It  is  accepted  as  the  best  way  for  the  quarter- 
back, in  playing  his  position,  to  stand  bent  over,  at  arms 
length  from  the  center,  with  his  eyes  fixed  on  the  ball. 

He  has  already  learned  the  position  of  the  player  who 
is  about  to  receive  the  ball  as  he  glanced  around  at  his 
team  when  the  signal  for  the  play  was  given.  The  in- 
stant that  he  gives  the  signal  for  the  ball  to  come  back 
he  turns  quarter  round,  throwing  his  right  or  left  foot 


53 

well  behind  for  a  brace,  according  as  he  wishes  to  pass 
the  ball  to  the  right  or  left.  The  quarter-back  must 
not  take  his  final  position  for  receiving  the  ball  before 
the  signal  for  the  ball  to  come  back  is  given ;  otherwise 
the  opponents  will  have  time  to  study  out  his  method  of 
passing  for  the  different  plays  and  can  guess  in  what 
direction  the  run  will  be  made.  It  is  all  done  so  quickly 
in  the  other  case  that  there  will  be  no  time  to  anticipate 
the  play. 

The  quarter-back  should  never  give  his  private  signal 
for  the  ball  until  the  captain  has  given  the  signal  for  the 
play,  and  then  only  after  he  comprehends  it  himself.  In 
a  well  drilled  eleven  the  quarter-back  understands  the 
signal  for  a  play  the  instant  it  is  given,  and  yet  it  is  not 
a  rare  occurrence  in  important  games  for  signals  to  be 
mixed  or  the  key  numbers  to  be  left  out.  In  that  case  the 
quarter-back  should  not  signal  for  the  ball  until  the  signal 
for  the  play  is  made  plain  or  a  new  one  given.  It  is  now 
a  common  practice  for  the  quarter-back  to  give  the  signals 
for  the  play  himself,  whether  he  is  captain  or  not.  This 
has  grown  out  of  the  fact  that  he  is  in  one  of  the  best 
positions  for  observing  the  whole  field,  and  also  because 
he  will  no  longer  need  to  interpret  the  signal  after  it  is 
given,  but  can  call  for  the  ball  as  soon  as  he  thinks  best. 
This  facilitates  the  play  somewhat  and  lessens  the  liabil- 
ity of  making  mistakes  in  translating  the  captain's  signal. 

There  are  three  styles  of  passing  a  ball  used  by  quarter- 
backs. Two  of  these  make  use  of  only  one  arm  in  for- 
warding the  ball — one  by  an  overhand  and  straight-arm 
movement  especially  valuable  for  passing  long  distances, 
but  too  slow  for  ordinary  use;  the  other  by  an  underhand 
pitch  with  an  easy,  natural  swing  of  the  arm.  This  lat- 
ter style  is  the  quickest  of  the  three,  for  no  time  is  lost  in 


54 

raising  the  arm  into  a  position  for  delivering  the  ball. 
This  pass  supplements  the  movement  of  the  ball  along  the 
ground  most  quickly  and  naturally.  In  the  third  style  of 
passing  both  hands  and  arms  are  used  and  it  is  closely 
allied  to  the  one-arm  underhand  pass.  This  insures  ac- 
curacy, but  places  limitations  on  the  distance  the  ball  can 
be  thrown.  It  is  commonly  used  in  all  short  passing.  It 
would  be  of  great  advantage  if  a  quarter-back  could  pass 
accurately  with  either  hand. 

In  receiving  the  ball  from  the  center  the  quarter-back 
should  stop  it  with  the  hand  which  corresponds  to  the  leg 
already  placed  behind  for  a  brace  and  immediately  adjust 
the  other  hand  to  it  for  a  pass.  This  is  done  by  placing 
one  end  squarely  in  the  hand  from  which  the  pass  is  to  be 
made  and  spreading  out  the  fingers.  The  hand  should 
then  be  bent  at  the  wrist  until  the  ball  rests  against  the 
forearm.  The  ball  is  now  in  a  position  for  a  pass.  Care 
should  be  taken  to  have  the  hand  squarely  behind  the 
ball,  also  to  have  the  long  axis  of  the  ball  parallel  with 
the  forearm.  The  easiest  way  to  make  a  long  pass  is  to 
swing  the  arm  at  full  length  just  below  the  level  of  the 
shoulder. 

The  quarter-back  must  need  give  considerable  time  to 
practicing  all  parts  of  his  work  in  receiving,  handling,  and 
passing  the  ball.  It  is  no  easy  matter  to  receive  the  ball 
as  it  comes  bounding  back  from  the  center-rusher  and 
adapt  it  to  the  hands  for  accurate  passing  while  quickly 
turning  into  position  to  deliver  it  to  the  runner;  but  it  is 
necessary  for  the  quarter-back  to  do  this  in  order  not  to 
be  interfered  with  by  the  rushers  who  break  through  the 
line,  and  also  not  to  delay  the  runner.  It  requires  long 
practice,  also,  to  be  able  to  handle  the  ball  and  be  off  the 
instant  the  ball  is  in  the  hands,  but  it  is  an  achievement 


55 

which  enables  the  quarter-back  to  be  of  great  service  in 
end  interference.  Unless,  however,  there  is  the  most 
skillful  handling  of  the  ball  it  is  impossible  for  the  quarter- 
back to  get  ahead  of  the  runner  without  delaying  him.  It 
requires  much  practice  to  be  able  to  do  quick  and  accurate 
passing —  to  be  able  to  place  the  ball  at  just  the  right  dis- 
tance ahead  of  the  runner  and  at  just  the  right  height  and 
at  just  the  right  speed,  so  that  he  shall  not  be  delayed  an 
instant,  and  can  give  his  whole  thought  to  running  and 
dodging. 

Too  great  stress  cannot  be  laid  upon  quick  work  by  the 
quarter-back.  It  means  success  or  defeat  to  some  of  the 
plays.  At  the  same  time  the  quarter-back  must  be  ex- 
ceedingly careful  in  handling  and  passing  the  ball.  It 
is  better  to  be  a  little  slow  than  to  be  quick  and  unsteady. 
He  must  never  become  excited  and  lose  his  self-control, 
for  that  would  be  disastrous  to  all  careful  work  and  also 
would  be  likely  to  cause  him  to  make  mistakes  in  signals. 

On  all  dashes  through  the  center  it  is  better  for  the 
quarter-back  to  make  short  passes  of  the  ball  at  the  run- 
ner's waist.  The  ball  must  not  be  passed  fast  and  it 
must  be  most  accurately  placed,  for  the  runner  is  bent 
over  for  a  plunge  and  is  not  in  a  position  to  handle  it, 
unless  on  a  slow  and  accurate  pass.  These  points  are 
worthy  of  the  most  careful  consideration,  for  much  of  the 
fumbling  by  the  half-backs  is  due  to  poor  passing.  What 
would  ordinarily  be  an  excellent  pass  if  the  half-back 
were  at  some  distance,  would  be  a  poor  one  when  he  is 
coming  forward  at  full  speed,  with  his  body  somewhat 
bent  at  the  waist,  and  his  attention  partly  on  the  ball  and 
partly  on  the  opening  he  is  to  take.  In  this  case,  also, 
a  high  pass  is  harder  to  catch  than  a  low  one,  because 
the  hands  will  have  to  be  raised  quickly  from  their  posi- 
tion at  the  waist. 


56 

The  quarter-back  should  also  use  the  greatest  care  in 
his  pass  to  the  full-back  for  a  kick,  for  a  poor  pass  will 
most  likely  result  in  the  opponents  stopping  the  kick  and 
securing  the  ball  on  four  downs,  if  not  on  a  fumble.  The 
full-back  can  kick  most  quickly  when  the  ball  is  passed 
at  his  waist. 

Some  quarter-backs  prefer  to  hand  the  ball  to  the  run- 
ner as  he  dashes  by,  whenever  that  is  possible.  This 
method,  without  doubt,  is  best  when  the  guard  or  tackle 
runs  around  for  a  plunge  through  the  line  between  center 
and  guard,  or  guard  and  tackle,  on  the  other  side  of  the 
center.  In  this  case  the  quarter-back  will  turn  half 
around,  with  his  back  to  the  center-rusher,  the  ball  being 
held  by  the  ends  between  the  extended  hands.  In  most 
other  cases  an  advantage  is  gained  \>y  passing  the  ball, 
because  the  quarter-back  will  not  be  in  danger  of  being 
tackled  by  the  opposing  rushers  or  quarter-back,  as  they 
break  through  the  line,  and  also  because  he  will  be  free 
after  his  pass  to  give  his  whole  attention  to  helping  the  run- 
ner. He  may  do  this  either  by  going  through  the  opening 
and  pulling  the  runner  after  him  ;  by  grasping  him  and 
going  through  with  him ;  by  shoving  him  hard  when  he 
strikes  the  line;  or  by  jumping  into  an  opponent  who  has 
broken  through  in  the  path  of  the  runner.  Occasionally 
it  may  be  better  to  hand  the  ball  to  the  runner  when  the 
quarter-back  runs  out  to  the  side  to  interfere  for  him;  but 
even  in  that  case,  a  short  pass  usually  facilitates  the  play 
because  the  quarter-back  can  run  faster  and  do  better  in- 
terference when  free  from  the  ball.  It  is  of  great  assist- 
ance in  getting  into  the  interference  on  end  plays  for  the 
quarter-back  to  be  able  to  pass  the  ball  accurately  on  the 
run,  for  every  fraction  of  a  second  counts  in  making  a 
helpful  connection. 


57 

On  the  defense  the  quarter-back  usually  hovers  in  the 
rear  of  the  center  and  guards,  watching  his  opportunity 
to  go  through  and  tackle  the  opposing  quarter  or  half- 
backs. 

A  powerful  style  of  defensive  play  has  now,  however, 
been  largely  adopted,  in  which  the  quarter-back  takes  a 
position  behind  one  of  the  tackles,  while  a  half-back  is 
brought  up  to  a  corresponding  position  behind  the  other 
tackle.  They  there  await  the  play  without  attempting  to 
go  through  on  the  instant  the  ball  is  snapped,  and  as  the 
line  of  their  opponents  separates  for  the  play,  the  one  on 
whose  side  of  the  center  the  opening  is  made  dives  into 
it  to  meet  the  runner  before  he  can  strike  the  line. 

He  must  know  just  when  to  go  through  the  line  and 
when  to  wait  in  order  to  see  where  to  meet  the  play;  also 
through  which  opening  in  the  line  to  go  in  order  to  best 
check  the  play.  Some  shrewd  guessing  can  be  done ,  which 
will  help  determine  this  by  noting  all  the  signs  of  the  di- 
rection of  the  play  spoken  of  in  the  chapter  on  team  play. 
The  center  and  guards,  and  sometimes  the  tackles,  should 
help  the  quarter-back  find  his  opening  and  assist  him  in 
getting  through.  The  quarter-back  should  always  be 
helped  through  when  the  opposing  team  is  going  to  kick, 
since  it  will  be  much  easier  for  htm  to  go  through  quickly 
on  account  of  his  size  and  quickness  in  starting.  If  the 
rushers  and  the  quarter-back  work  together  on  the  de- 
fense the  latter  can  be  a  most  valuable  adjunct  to  their 
play,  because  he  is  free  to  move  anywhere.  When  a  run- 
ner is  checked  or  tackled,  the  quarter-back,  as  indeed  all 
the  eleven,  should  endeavor  to  pull  the  ball  out  of  his 
hands  before  he  calls  "  down."  The  quarter-back  often 
has  a  good  chance  to  do  this  when  the  runner  is  entan- 
gled in  a  mass. 


THE  HALF-BACKS  AND  FULL-BACK. 

The  half-backs  and  the  full-back,  who  is  practically  a 
third  half-back,  stand  usually  from  two  to  four  yards 
behind  the  center  of  the  line.  They  group  themselves  at 
short  distances  from  one  another  and  in  a  way  to  best 
assist  in  carrying  out  the  play  which  is  about  to  be  made. 
There  is  a  difference  in  the  latitude  given  the  half-backs 
and  full-back  on  different  teams  in  arranging  themselves 
for  each  play.  Some  captains  require  these  men  to 
occupy  the  same  position  on  every  play,  claiming  that  it 
is  of  great  advantage  in  obscuring  the  play  to  have  a 
fixed  arrangement.  On  other  teams  the  half-backs  and 
full-back  are  allowed  to  move  about,  and  shift  their 
places  to  the  position  in  which  they  think  they  can  best 
help  out  the  play. 

There  is  also  a  great  difference  among  teams  in  the 
placing  of  the  half-backs  and  full-back  in  reference  to 
each  other  and  also  in  reference  to  the  rush  line.  In 
general,  the  full-back  is  stationed  behind  the  center  and 
usually  about  a  yard  or  a  yard  and  a  half  further  from 
the  line  than  the  half-backs.  On  some  teams,  these  three 
play  close  together,  separated  by  not  more  than  a  yard 
or  a  yard  and  a  half  ;  on  others,  they  are  separated  from 
two  yards  to  three  yards  and  a  half.  There  is  also  a 
decided  difference  in  the  distance  behind  the  line  which 
the  backs  play.  This  varies  from  two  to  five  yards. 

The  arrangement  of  the  backs  should,  in  a  measure, 
depend  on  the  style  of  game  to  be  played  ;  and  the  style 

(58) 


59 

of  game  should  be  determined  by  the  composition  of  the 
team.  That  is  to  say,  that  if  it  is  deemed  wise  to  play  a 
center  game,  it  can  best  be  done  by  bunching  the  backs  ; 
while,  on  the  other  hand,  the  combinations  can  be  best 
made  for  an  end  game  when  the  backs  are  more  spread 
apart. 

Captains  who  are  limited  in  the  selection  of  their  play- 
ers will  find  it  well  worth  their  while  to  consider  the 
arrangement  of  the  backs,  both  in  regard  to  their  relative 
distance  from  each  other,  and  also  in  regard  to  the 
distance  which  they  stand  behind  the  line.  Indeed,  there 
is  an  opportunity  for  fine  generalship  in  deciding  upon 
the  place  for  these  ground  gainers. 

When  the  three  men  who  are  to  occupy  positions 
behind  the  line  have  been  decided  upon,  there  is  also 
need  of  careful  consideration  in  determining  which  posi- 
tion each  one  of  the  three  shall  fill.  The  full-back  is 
usually  selected  for  his  ability  to  kick,  and  yet,  it  is  some- 
times better  that  the  man  occupying  that  position  should 
act  as  a  half-back  until  the  signal  for  a  kick  is  given,  and 
then  drop  back  ;  while  a  half-back  sometimes  could  do 
more  effective  work  in  the  middle  position  during  the 
general  play.  If  one  of  the  backs  is  slow,  his  best  posi- 
tion is  usually  at  full-back,  for  there  he  receives  the 
greatest  protection  and  help.  The  light,  quick  men  can 
succeed  better  at  half-back  than  the  slow,  heavy  men. 

It  frequently  happens  that  one  of  the  backs  invariably 
carries  the  ball  under  the  right  arm  and  is  able  to  use 
only  the  left  effectively  in  blocking  off,  or  vice  versa. 
This  fact  should  be  considered  in  determining  which 
position  the  men  shall  occupy. 

It  is  unfortunate  for  a  half-back  to  be  so  limited,  but 
many  of  them  arer  and  they  do  not  practice  with  the 


6o 

other  arm  enough  to  train  it.  Some  naturally  run  in  one 
direction  better  than  in  another  ;  or  some  are  surer  and 
stronger  of  foot,  perhaps,  when  running  around  on  a 
particular  side.  A  player  is  sometimes  put  in  the  right  or 
left  position  because  the  interference  is  stronger  on  that 
side  ;  or  possibly  the  arrangement  is  made  to  take  ad- 
vantage of  a  certain  known  strength  or  weakness  in  the 
team  which  they  are  to  meet. 

The  half-backs  and  full-backs  are  largely  the  ground 
gainers  for  the  team  and  most  of  the  advances  into  the 
enemy's  territory  are  made  by  them.  For  this  reason, 
only  men  who  possess  special  qualifications  are  selected 
to  fill  these  positions.  In  quickness  and  agility  they 
should  equal  the  quarter-back  ;  in  point  of  speed,  ability 
to  dodge,  courage,  and  dash,  they  should  be  unequaled 
by  any  man  on  the  team.  Again  and  again  they  must 
rush  headlong  into  the  line,  oftentimes  only  to  be  hurled 
back  by  the  opposing  rushers  who  plunge  through  upon 
them.  Yet,  never  losing  courage,  again  and  again  they 
must  come  to  the  rally,  now  attacking  the  opponent's 
center  by  heavy  plunging  now  trying  to  make  a  detour 
around  the  wings. 

Too  great  emphasis  can  not  be  placed  on  quick  starting. 
The  inability  to  get  under  headway  quickly  is  very  often 
the  difference  between  a  first-rate  half-back  and  a  second- 
rate  one.  The  second-rate  half-back  may  be  just  as  fast 
a  runner,  and  may  be  just  as  hard  to  stop  when  once 
under  way,  but  he  does  not  get  under  headway  nearly  so 
often,  because  he  loses  so  much  time  on  his  start  that  he 
is  tackled  before  he  passes  the  critical  point  in  the  run. 
On  all  plunges  into  the  line  the  utmost  speed  must  be 
used  in  conjunction  with  the  quick  start.  The  distance 
is  very  short  in  which  to  get  under  headway,  and  there  is 


6i 

need  of  the  greatest  force  to  project  the  runner  through 
the  resistance,  as  well  as  need  to  reach  that  point  of  re- 
sistance in  the  shortest  time.  It  is  common  with  many 
elevens  to  have  one  heavy  back  to  do  the  plunging  into 
the  line,  but  frequently  this  man  is  so  slow  in  his  start 
that  he  is  not  so  effective  for  line-breaking,  against  a 
strong  defense,  as  the  lighter  man  would  be.  It  very 
frequently  happens  that  in  choosing  the  half-backs,  men 
have  to  be  selected  who  have  only  part  of  the  qualifica- 
tions for  the  position  ;  who  perhaps  can  run  fast,  or,  again, 
are  what  are  termed  ' '  fighters,"  but  lack  some  of  the  other 
requisites  When  such  is  the  case,  the  captain  should 
immediately  take  means  to  train  these  men  in  the  other 
necessary  qualifications  for  good  half-back  play.  It  is 
indispensable  that  a  half-back  should  be  able  to  run  into 
a  line  hard  time  and  again,  and  with  no  fear  or  hesita- 
tion. It  is  likewise  most  necessary  that  a  half-back 
should  be  a  powerful  runner  and  not  easily  stopped  ;  one 
who  does  not  fall  easily  but  keeps  his  feet  well  when 
tackled,  and  struggles  on  for  the  gain  of  a  few  feet.  But 
he  would  be  a  much  more  useful  man  if,  at  the  same  time 
with  this  pluck,  determination,  and  ability  to  stand  on  his 
feet  under  difficulties,  and  keep  struggling  forward,  he 
also  had  the  ability  to  dodge  an  opponent  or  ward  him 
off  with  the  extended  arm,  instead  of  running  straight 
into  him. 

Dodging  in  running  can  be  cultivated  through  the 
study  and  practice  of  its  points  of  deception.  The  un- 
derlying principle  is  the  quick  movement  of  the  body, 
or  portion  of  the  body,  from  a  point  where  it  would 
have  been  if  it  had  continued  in  the  same  direction. 
In  the  most  simple  form  of  dodging  the  runner  sud- 
denly changes  his  direction.  As  usually  practiced,  the 


62 

runner  is  obliged  to  slow  up  a  great  deal,  in  order  to 
change  his  course.  In  all  dodging,  the  runner,  if  at 
topmost  speed,  must  slacken  speed  a  little,  just  before  he 
reaches  the  tackier,  in  order  to  reduce  the  size  of  his 
stride  so  that  he  may  have  a  proper  balance  for  project- 
ing the  body  in  another  direction,  or  so  that  he  may  make 
certain  preliminary  body  motions  which  cannot  be  made 
when  at  full  speed. 

There  are  several  ways  of  dodging,  but  one  man  sel- 
dom possesses  more  than  one  or  two.  The  zigzag  dodge, 
which  used  to  be  so  common  when  individual  running 
and  poor  tackling  were  in  vogue,  is  performed  by  a  com- 
bination of  leg  and  body  feints.  Its  weakness  is  that  it 
retards  tbe  runner  too  much.  In  another  dodge  the  run- 
ner strides  suddenly  one  side  with  a  long  step.  This 
is  a  very  effective  method  for  long-legged  runners.  In 
another,  the  runner  sways  his  body  from  one  side  to 
the  other,  the  legs  being  planted  wide  apart  as  each 
step  is  taken  in  a  zigzag  course.  The  runner  moves  in 
the  same  general  direction  until  the  opponent  is  reached 
and  then  darts  to  one  side.  Still  another  dodge  is  made 
by  drawing  the  hips  away,  and  in  this  dodge  a  clever  vise 
of  the  arm  is  valuable.  It  is  one  of  the  most  effective, 
since  the  hips  are  usually  the  part  aimed  at  in  tackling. 
Another  way  is  to  duck  under  a  tackier:  by  bending  the 
body  low  at  the  waist.  This  is  practiced  most  effectively 
by  small  men  and  is  most  valuable  against  high  tackling. 
Another  method  is  to  turn  the  body  completely  around 
when  about  to  be  tackled,  upon  one  foot  as  a  pivot. 
This  comes  into  splendid  use  when  the  tackier  has  been 
unable  to  grasp  the  runner  with  both  hands.  In  another 
form  of  avoiding  a  tackier,  the  runner,  on  being  ap- 
proached from  the  side,  slows  up  a  little  ;  whereupon 


63 

the  opponent  delays  just  long  enough  to  allow  him  to 
go  around  by  putting  on  a  burst  of  speed. 

Good  dodging  is  not  complete  unless  there  is  added  to 
it  the  power  to  use  the  arms  well  in  warding  off.  The 
latter  supplements  the  former  most  effectively  when  well 
done.  When  the  tackling  is  high,  or  when  the  runner  is 
well  bent  over,  the  arm  should  be  extended  against  the 
face  or  chest  of  the  opponent.  Often,  on  a  long  dive  or 
reach  for  the  hips  by  the  tackier,  the  runner  can  break 
the  hold  by  striking  down  with  his  arm.  All  the  above 
styles  of  dodging  can  be  acquired  by  practice.  It  is  bet- 
ter to  practice  them  with  only  one-or  two  men  to  act  as 
opponents,  after  the  movement  has  been  learned. 

There  is  another  requisite  needed  by  the  half-back  in 
addition  to  dodging,  and  that  is  the  ability  to  follow  an 
interferer  or  interferers  well.  Half-backs  differ  greatly 
in  skill  on  this  point.  The  work  of  escaping  a  tackier 
should  not  rest  wholly  in  the  interferers'  hands,  as  it  so 
often  does.  The  half-back  should  supplement  the  latter's 
work  by  taking  advantage  of  the  protection  given  him  to 
work  every  ruse  and  feint  he  knows.  Where  there  are 
several  interferers,  there  is  a  chance  for  the  runner  to 
move  from  one  to  the  other  as  occasion  suggests.  It 
needs  quick  wit  and  agility  to  follow  interferers  well,  but 
much  can  be  learned  by  practice  with  or  without  oppo- 
nents, and  every  half-back  should  devote  himself  to  per- 
fecting his  play  in  this  particular. 

The  half-backs  must  be  good  catchers,  not  only  of 
kicked  balls,  but  also,  and  especially,  of  balls  passed 
from  the  quarter-back.  Oftentimes,  the  fault  of  a  muff 
or  a  fumble  can  be  laid  to  a  poor  pass,  but  if  the  quarter- 
back is  unsteady  on  his  part,  there  is  all  the  more  reason 
that  the  half-backs  and  full-back  be  skillful  catchers.  If 
5 


t 

64 

weak  in  catching,  much  practice  should  be  given  by  the 
half-backs  to  perfecting  themselves.  They  should  work 
at  this  in  conjunction  with  the  quarter-back  in  order  that 
they  may  get  used  to  each  other.  In  catching  short 
passes,  it  is  usually  better  to  catch  the  ball  with  the 
hands.  This  is  surer  because  the  hands  can  adapt  them- 
selves much  better  than  the  arms  to  the  position  and 
shape  of  the  ball  when  a  man  is  running.  In  running 
sidewise  to  the  pass,  as  it  is  necessary  to  do  in  so  many 
plays,  the  arms  could  not  be  used  without  checking  the 
speed  ;  while  there  need  be  no  diminution  in  speed  when 
the  ball  is  caught  in  the  hands,  provided  the  quarter-back 
does  his  work  well. 

There  are  three  ways  of  carrying  the  ball,  and  each 
has  its  proper  occasions  for  use.  When  the  play  is 
straight  through  the  center  the  general  order  to  the  half- 
back is  to  put  the  head  down  on  a  level  with  the  waist, 
gathering  the  ball  up  under  the  body  with  both  arms,  be- 
cause there  could  be  no  use  for  an  arm  to  ward  off  an 
opponent  until  the  line  has  been  penetrated,  and  there  is 
great  danger  of  losing  the  ball  by  the  pulling  and  haul- 
ing to  which  the  runner  is  subjected.  After  the  runner 
is  well  through  the  line  and  has  a  chance  to  run  freely,  he 
should  transfer  the  ball  to  the  side  of  the  body  opposite 
the  arm  with  which  it  is  necessary  to  ward  off.  The 
runner  should  look  for  opponents  as  he  emerges  from  the 
opening,  and  likewise  for  interferers.  Where  the  play  is 
through  the  more  open  part  of  the  line  the  runner  should 
usually  carry  the  ball  under  the  arm  which  is  away  from 
the  opponents  who  are  likely  to  meet  him  first,  shifting  it 
to  the  other  arm  when  necessary.  -  In  this  case,  likewise, 
it  is  occasionally  better  to  carry  the  ball  in  both  hands 
until  there  is  need  for  warding  off  an  opponent,  at  which 


65 

moment  the  bail  can  be  easily  shifted  to  whichever  arm 
it  is  desired.  This  provides  for  any  emergency.  This 
way  of  carrying  the  ball  is  especially  valuable  in  dodg- 
ing, since  the  ball  can  be  placed  quickly  under  either  arm 
and  a  better  defense  made  ;  for  if  forced  to  dodge,  the 
runner  may  transfer  the  ball  to  the  arm  away  from  his 
opponent  and  have  the  other  free  to  ward  off.  By  moving 
the  ball  from  one  side  to  the  other  in  front  of  the  body 
while  running,  the  dodge  will  be  made  more  effective. 

In  carrying  the  ball  under  the  arm  it  should  be  held 
well  forward,  because  it  can  be  held  more  tightly  in  this 
position.  The  reason  why  the  ball  is  often  pulled  out  from 
under  the  arm  is  that  it  is  held  so  far  back  that  the  strong 
muscles  of  the  chest  are  of  little  assistance.  When  held 
in  this  position  the  ball  is  often  forced  out  from  under  the 
arm  when  the  runner  is  thrown  to  the  ground.  By  test- 
ing these  two  positions  it  will  be  easily  seen  which  is  the 
safer  way.  If  a  runner  is  inclined  to  lose  the  ball  he 
should  practice  squeezing  it  in  the  most  approved  man- 
ner until  he  has  trained  himself  to  hold  it  fast  under  all 
circumstances. 

We  have  already  spoken  of  the  runner  getting  under 
headway  quickly.  It  is  also  necessary  that  he  should  run 
with  all  his  speed  ;  whether  he  plunges  into  the  center 
part  of  the  line  or  follows  the  interference  out  to  the 
wings  (unless  he  is  obliged  to  slow  down  in  order  to 
receive  the  ball,  to  let  a  runner  in  ahead  of  him,  or  to  get 
by  an  opponent).  No  runner  is  so  invincible  in  all  his 
play  as  he  who  rushes  with  all  his  strength  ;  who  shows 
by  his  every  movement  the  determination  and  power 
with  which  he  is  charged  ;  who  inspires  in  his  opponents 
a  hesitancy  and  dread  of  tackling  him  ;  who  never  gives 
up  when  tackled  but  keeps  struggling  on,  twisting, 


66 

squirming,  and  wriggling  himself  out  of  the  grasp  of  one 
after  another  until  he  can  no  longer  advance.  Such  a 
man  is  worth  a  dozen  who  hesitate. 

The  dashing  runner  is  the  one  who  usually  makes  the 
advances.  If  he  goes  through  an  opening  he  goes 
through  on  a  jump.  Such  a  man,  when  checked,  will 
keep  his  feet  and  legs  going  like  a  treadmill  and  will  bore 
his  way  through  in  spite  of  resistance.  This  sort  of 
pushing  accomplishes  wonders.  For  effective  applica- 
tion of  power  it  is  worth  vastly  more  than  the  same 
amount  of  force  applied  slowly,  for  the  attack  is  sudden 
and  continuous.  Its  effectiveness,  however,  is  altogether 
dependent  on  the  head  being  well  bent  over,  so  that  the 
whole  weight  and  impetus  of  the  body  is  forward,  for  the 
legs  are  then  in  a  position  tc  exert  the  greatest  power. 

Another  reason  for  running  into  the  line  well  bent 
over,  is  that  it  is  much  more  difficult  to  tackle  a  runner 
when  in  that  attitude.  It  is  impossible  to  get  under  a 
short  man  in  order  to  make  a  low  tackle  when  he  is  com- 
ing straight  toward  one,  and  the  result  is  that  the  tackier 
receives  the  runner's  head  in  his  stomach,  or  if  he  be  good 
in  the  use  of  his  arm,  he  will  very  likely  have  a  hand 
thrust  into  his  face  or  against  his  chest.  At  such  times, 
the  runner  is  very  often  able  to  slip  past. 

Again,  running  with  the  head  down  enables  the  runner 
always  to  fall  forward  when  tackled.  This  usually  means 
a  further  gain  of  two  or  three  yards. 

In  running  low  care  should  always  be  taken  not  to  lose 
the  balance.  After  considerable  practice  the  balance  can 
be  very  well  kept  when  running  much  bent  over  and  still 
great  speed  be  maintained.  As  soon  as  the  line  is  cleared 
and  there  are  no  opponents  very  near,  the  runner  should 
assume  a  more  upright  position  so  that  he  can  run  at  his 
utmost  speed,  lowering  his  head  whenever  he  thinks  best. 


67 

In  making  the  end  plays,  the  runner  need  not  put  his 
head  down  except,  perhaps,  when  it  is  necessary  to  duck 
under  a  tackier.  He  must  now  put  on  speed  up  to  the 
full  limit  of  the  interferers,  following  them  very  closely, 
now  using  this  one  and  now  that,  according  as  the  danger 
shifts.  He  must  constantly  be  on  the  alert  for  changing 
his  position  to  take  advantage  of  every  little  help,  or  to 
prevent  being  pocketed,  at  the  same  time  being  ready  to 
break  away  from  his  interferers  if  he  sees  he  can  gain 
more  by  so  doing.  In  general,  the  runner  should  keep 
behind  his  helpers  until  the  last,  but  now  and  then  an 
opportunity  comes  which  he  ought  to  accept. 

The  light-footed,  agile  man  who  can  keep  his  balance 
well  is  physically  best  capacitated  for  running  behind  in- 
terferers. To  do  it  well  the  runner  should  be  able  to 
change  his  stride  to  meet  the  emergencies  which  arise  in 
passing  from  one  iaterferer  to  another,  or  in  following 
very  close  when  a  long  stride  would  cause  him  to  stumble 
over  his  interferers. 

Another  requirement  which  the  backs,  or  at  least  one  of 
them,  presumably  the  full-back,  should  have,  is  the  ability 
to  kick.  It  would  be  well  if  all  three  possessed  this 
ability,  for  there  are  times,  now  and  then,  when  conster- 
nation could  be  brought  to  the  opponents  by  the  half-back 
returning  a  kick.  But  this  could  happen  only  occasionally, 
and  it  is  much  more  important  that  the  half-backs  be 
especially  strong  in  running  with  the  ball,  for  that  will  be 
their  main  work.  The  full-back  however,  should  be  a 
skillful  kicker  both  in  punting  and  drop-kicking. 

It  requires  long  practice  to  punt  well.  The  oval  shape 
of  the  ball  precludes  simply  tossing  or  dropping  it  from 
the  hands  and  then  kicking  it,  to  get  the  best  results. 

The  mechanical  construction  and  adjustment  of  the 


68 

muscles  of  the  leg  and  body  in  their  relation  to  kicking 
require  careful  study.  Long  practice  is  necessary  to  be 
able  to  regulate  the  power,  and  at  the  same  time  deter- 
mine the  angle  and  direction  which  the  ball  shall  take. 
All  the  practice  which  the  full-back  can  get  to  acquire 
skill  in  punting  will  be  well  repaid,  for  it  will  make  him 
of  inestimable  value  to  his  eleven. 

Where  the  full-back  does  not  know  how  to  punt,  the 
following  directions  will  be  found  helpful :  Hold  the  bal' 
between  the  hands,  the  ends  pointing  to  and  from  the 
body,  lacings  up.  Extend  the  arms  horizontally  in  front 
and  bend  forward  with  the  body  until  the  ball  is  held  just 
below  the  level  of  the  waist.  Take  a  short  step  forward 
with  the  foot  not  used  in  kicking,  and  at  the  same  time 
drop  the  ball  from  the  hands,  and  bring  the  kicking  leg 
quickly  forward  to  meet  the  falling  ball  about  knee  high. 
Do  not  try  to  kick  hard  at  first.  Attend  simply  to  drop- 
ping (not  tossing)  the  ball  without  changing  the  relative 
position  of  the>  axis.  This  must  be  closely  regarded  or 
there  will  never  be  any  certainty  as  to  where  the  ball  will 
go.  The  first  point  noticed  by  a  novice  will  be  that  the 
ball  reaches  the  ground  before  his  foot  meets  it.  This 
shows  that  the  foot  was  not  started  forward  soon  enough. 
One  way  to  obviate  that  difficulty  is  to  drop  the  ball  from 
a  higher  point ;  but  the  best  point  has  already  been 
selected  and  the  tardy  member  must  be  trained  to  be  on 
time.  It  will  also  be  noticed  that  sometimes  the  ball  will 
meet  the  leg  above  the  ankle.  The  aim  should  be  to  have 
the  ball  fit  into  the  concave  of  the  extended  foot,  and  it 
will  probably  be  necessary  to  give  the  ball  a  slight  toss 
forward  in  order  to  make  the  kick  powerfully.  Care 
should  be  taken  when  doing  this  that  the  ball  is  not 
turned,  or  tossed  so  far  that  power  is  lost.  In  practicing 


69 

in  this  way  it  will  at  first  be  noticed  that  the  whole  force 
of  the  blow  will  be  given  by  using  the  leg  from  the  knee 
down.  This,  one  can  readily  see,  would  weaken  the 
blow  because  the  leverage  is  short  and  the  muscles  which 
extend  the  lower  leg  not  especially  powerful,  and  at  the 
same  time  it  is  very  trying  to  the  knee  joint.  The  most 
powerfn  kick  would  be  one  which  had  the  leverage  of 
the  full  length  of  the  leg,  thus  bringing  into  play  the 
strong  abdominal  muscles  to  add  speed  and  power.  In 
making  .this  kick,  the  leg  should  be  extended  at  full 
length  (with  toes  pointed)  and  should  swing  on  the  hips 
as  an  axis.  After  the  forward  kick  has  been  learned  so 
that  it  can  be  well  executed,  the  side  kick  may  be  at- 
tempted. In  this  case  the  ball  is  dropped  a  little  to  the 
outside.  The  great  advantage  in  the  side  kick  is,  that  if 
not  too  much  on  one  side,  a  very  considerable  increase  in 
power  can  be  gained,  because  a  longer  swing  can  be 
given  to  tbe  leg,  and  because  the  swing  is  further  as: 
sisted  by  some  additional  muscles  which  give  increased 
power.  Another  advantage  is  that  the  full-back  can  take 
a  step  to  the  side  and  kick  around  an  opponent. 

In  practicing,  do  not  keep  the  leg  rigid  through  all  the 
swing.  The  muscles  must  be  sufficiently  lax  to  make 
the  swing  easy,  the  rigid  contraction  coming  just  before 
the  foot  reaches  the  ball. 

The  angle  at  which  the  ball  is  kicked  can  be  regulated 
by  elevating  or  lowering  the  point  of  the  ball  farthest 
away  from  the  body,  or  by  dropping  the  ball  in  such  a 
way  that  the  position  of  the  foot  in  the  arc  described  by 
it  shall  regulate  the  direction  which  the  ball  shall  take. 
If  the  kicker  wishes  to  make  a  high  kick,  he  drops  the 
ball  so  that  the  foot  reaches  it  when  knee  high  or  above, 
and  when  he  wishes  to  make  a  low  kick  he  allows  the  ball 


7o 

to  get  closer  to  the  ground  before  his  foot  meets  it.  By 
trial,  it  will  be  found  that  a  point  varying  from  about  six 
inches  above  to  six  inches  below  the  height  of  the  knee 
is  the  place  of  greatest  convenience  and  power. 

After  punting  and  drop  kicking  has  once  been  learned, 
the  whole  practice  should  be  centered  on  kicking  quickly. 
The  ball  should  be  caught,  adjusted,  dropped,  and  kicked 
just  as  quickly  as  possible.  In  practicing  this,  it  will  be 
found  expedient  to  have  several  balls  for  the  quarter- 
back to  pass.  After  practicing  for  a  few  weeks  in  this 
way  the  full-back  will  find  that  he  can  stand  considerably 
nearer  the  rush  line  and  still  avoid  having  the  ball  blocked. 

The  drop  kick  is  made  by  dropping  the  ball  on  one  of 
the  small  ends  and  kicking  it  with  the  toe  at  the  instant  it 
rises  from  the  ground.  Some  kickers  prefer  to  have  the 
ball  lean  toward  them  at  a  slight  angle  as  it  strikes,  others 
to  have  the  ball  lean  slightly  toward  the  goal,  and  still 
others  drop  it  with  the  long  axis  vertical.  The  latter  style 
is  most  commonly  used.  Practice  in  all  these  will  deter- 
mine in  which  position  the  foot  meets  the  ball  most  nat- 
urally. The  ball  should  be  kicked  with  a  free  and  easy, 
though  quick,  swing  of  the  leg.  If  close  under  the  goal 
the  kick  may  be  made  more  quickly  with  a  short  half  swing, 
whereas  in  punting  the  leg  is  swung  from  the  hip  and  the 
large  abdominal  muscles  of  the  body  brought  strongly  into 
play.  In  drop  kicking  very  accurate,  rapid,  and  effective 
work  can  be  accomplished  when  the  swing  is  made  almost 
altogether  from  the  knee  joint  with  only  a  slight  swing 
from  the  hip.  Beginners  frequently  make  a  great  mis- 
take in  drawing  the  foot  far  back  in  preparation  for  a 
long  drop  kick.  By  extending  the  leg  below  the  knee 
quickly  and  suddenly,  so  that  the  point  of  the  toe  will 
meet  the  ball  at  the  instant  it  rises  from  the  ground,  great 


distance  can  be  attained  with  little  apparent  outlay  of 
force. 

It  requires  a  great  deal  of  practice  to  be  quick  and  ac- 
curate at  the  same  time.  The  full  back  should  place 
himself  a  little  farther  from  his  rush  line  in  attempting 
the  drop  kick  than  in  punting,  because  the  ball  starts 
lower  and  it  is  not  so  easy  to  control  the  angle  it  takes. 

In  trying  for  a  goal  from  a  place  kick  the  ball  should 
be  brought  out  to  a  spot  from  which  the  angle  to  the  goal 
and  the  distance  from  it  are  most  favorable  for  the  trial. 
If  the  touchdown  is  made  directly  behind  the  goal,  or  near 
it,  the  ball  should  not  be  carried  far  out  into  the  field.  A 
point  should  be  selected  where  there  will  be  no  danger  of 
the  opposing  rushers  stopping  the  ball  and  from  which  it 
will  be  easy  to  kick  the  goal.  Some  men  prefer  to  make 
the  trial  from  a  point  not  more  than  ten  yards  away, 
while  others  carry  the  ball  out  fifteen  or  twenty  yards. 
The  former,  always  make  a  quick  half  swing  of  the  leg  in 
kicking,  lifting  upward  with  the  foot  as  they  kick;  the  lat- 
ter usually  kick  with  the  leg  swinging  full  and  free  from 
the  hip. 

The  ball  should  be  held  between  the  outstretched  hands 
of  the  quarter-back  or  some  other  player  as  he  lies  ex- 
tended flat  upon  his  stomach.  The  best  way  of  holding 
the  ball  is  to  place  the  fingers  of  one  hand  behind  it  about 
three  inches  from  the  lower  end,  the  fingers  of  the  other 
hand  being  placed  at  a  corresponding  point  at  the  top  and 
slightly  in  front  of  the  ball.  The  ball  should  be  held  in 
firm  but  easy  balance,  and  the  fingers  should  be  so  placed 
that  it  will  be  easy  to  turn  it  and  least  interfere  with  it 
when  placing  it  down  for  a  kick.  Great  care  must  be 
given  to  holding  the  ball  steady. 

When  the  spot  has  been  selected  from  which  the  trial 


72 

is  to  oe  made,  and  the  player  who  is  to  noli  the  ball  has 
prostrated  himself  in  firm  balance  on  the  ground,  at  right 
angles  to  the  line  of  direction,  and  on  the  right  or  left  side 
of  the  kicker,  according  to  the  foot  which  he  is  to  use,  the 
ball  being  properly  held  between  the  fingers  with  the 
elbows  resting  on  the  ground,  the  kicker  must  proceed  to 
sight  the  ball.  He  first  asks  the  holder  to  turn  the  lacing 
of  the  ball  toward  him;  next  he  tells  him  how  he  wishes 
the  ball  to  point  and  at  what  angle,  if  any,  using  such  ex- 
pressions as  "head  forward"  and  "head  up,"  meaning 
that  the  ball  is  to  be  tipped  away  from  the  kicker  in  the 
first  instance  and  held  vertically  in  the  second.  Other  ex- 
pressions like  "head  out"  and  "  head  in  "  indicate  that 
the  point  of  the  ball  is  to  be  moved  in  or  out  in  reference 
to  the  player  holding  it. 

The  sighting  of  the  ball  toward  the  goal  can  be  done 
best  by  using  the  lacings  as  a  guide,  the  holder  being  di- 
rected to  twist  the  ball  out  or  in ,  in  reference  to  himself, 
by  the  expressions  "lacings  out,"  "lacings  in."  When 
the  ball  has  been  well  aimed  and  everything  is  ready  the 
kicker  should  tell  the  holder  to  "  touch  it  down,"  at  the 
same  time  moving  forward  to  kick.  In  touching  the  ball 
down  the  holder  must  be  very  careful  not  to  change  the 
position.  As  the  ball  touches  the  ground  the  lower  hand 
is  removed  in  order  not  to  interfere  with  its  course.  It  is 
well  to  remove  beforehand  all  pebbles  or  tufts  of  grass  at 
the  spot  selected  for  placing  the  ball  down,  for  a  slight 
unevenness  is  often  sufficient  to  prevent  a  goal. 

The  kicker  should  keep  his  eye  on  some  point  on  the 
ball  as  he  steps  forward  and  aim  to  kick  it  in  that 
spot.  Practice  beforehand  will  determine  the  best  place 
to  give  the  impetus.  When  the  ball  is  vertical  this  spot 
will  be  found  by  trial  to  be  very  near  the  ground  ;  when 


73 

the  ball  leans  toward  the  kicker  the  best  point  for  the 
kick  is  just  below  the  lacing.  The  height  of  the  point 
above  the  ground  is  nearly  the  same  in  both  cases,  but  the 
point  on  the  ball  changes  as  the  ball  leans.  If  there  is  a 
wind  blowing  the  kicker  must  take  into  consideration  its 
force  and  direction  in  pointing  the  ball. 

In  catching  kicked  balls  and  long  passes,  it  is  usually 
better  to  catch  them  with  the  arms.  Every  effort  should 
be  made  to  take  the  ball  when  about  waist  high,  for  at 
that  point  the  arms  can  be  better  adjusted  to  it.  The 
body  also,  here  much  softer,  can  at  this  part  be  drawn  in 
to  form  a  sort  of  pocket,  as  it  were,  for  the  ball.  Care 
must  be  taken  not  to  have  the  ball  strike  high  up  on  the 
chest,  for  it  is  then  difficult  to  shape  the  arms  well  to  re- 
ceive it  and  the  ball  rebounds  much  quicker  from  its  firm 
walls. 

There  are  two  ways  of  catching  with  the  arms.  In 
one,  the  arms  work  in  conjunction  with  the  body,  the 
latter  being  used  to  stop  the  ball  while  the  arms  close 
around  it.  In  this  style,  one  hand  and  forearm  should  be 
held  lower  than  the  point  of  contact  with  the  body,  while 
the  other  hand  and  forearm  should  be  held  above  that 
point.  The  arms  should  be  bent  and  should  not  usually 
be  extended  far  from  the  body.  In  the  other  case,  the 
ball  is  caught  entirely  with  the  arms  and  hands.  This 
can  be  done  only  when  it  is  kicked  well  into  the  air.  The 
arms  are  held  parallel  in  front  of  the  body  about  six  inches 
apart,  being  half  bent  at  the  elbows  and  wrists.  The  in- 
stant the  ball  strikes,  the  hands  are  curled  forward  over  it. 
The  fault  of  catching  in  this  way  usually  lies  in  the  catcher 
failing  to  bring  his  elbows  near  enough  together  and  so 
leaving  a  space  for  the  ball  to  go  through. 


74 

In  nearly  all  plays  the  backs,  from  the  nature  of  their 
duties,  are  among  the  first  men  to  start.  Their  position 
behind  the  line  renders  their  every  motion  conspicuous, 
and  the  watchful  rushers  upon  the  opposing  team  will  be 
upon  the  constant  lookout  for  some  movement,  glance,  or 
position  of  the  body  that  betrays  the  direction  of  the 
play  which  is  about  to  be  executed.  On  this  account  the 
backs  should  take  the  greatest  precaution  to  conceal  their 
intentions.  It  is  of  assistance  sometimes  in  deceiving 
the  opponents  to  assume  a  position  as  if  being  about  to  go 
in  one  direction  when  an  entirely  different  move  is  in- 
tended, but  if  this  is  practiced  too  frequently  it  will  de- 
feat its  own  end. 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  DIAGRAMS. 

Before  passing  on  to  consider  the  following  plays,  a 
few  words  of  explanation  will  be  necessary. 

The  side  of  attack  in  every  instance,  when  in  their 
regular  positions,  will  be  represented  by  the  solid  dots 
(•  •  •),  and  the  side  acting  on  the  defensive  by  rings 
(O  O  O).  When  it  is  desired  to  represent  a  player  in  a 
position  other  than  that  which  he  originally  occupies 
the  figures  O  O  O  will  be  used.  The  broken  line 

( )  will  represent  the  course  of  the  ball  in 

the  pass  and  the  direction  taken  by  the  runner  who 
receives  it. 

A  simple  dotted  line  ( )  will  be  used  to  in- 
dicate that  a  player  is  to  follow  the  runner  with  the  ball, 
while  the  solid  line  ( —  — )  indicates  that  the  man 
shall  pass  in  front  to  act  as  a  line-breaker  or  interferer. 
The  arrows  indicate  the  direction  which  the  players  shall 
take. 

The  men  represented  by  the  letters  given  in  the 
diagrams  are  as  follows  :  c,  indicates  the  center  ;  Q  B,  the 
quarter-back;  R  H,  LH,  RE,  and  L  E,  the  right  and  left 
half-backs  and  right  and  left  ends  respectively  ;  the  right 
and  left  tackles  are  indicated  by  R  T  and  L  T  ;  while  F-B 
represents  the  full-back. 

It  must  be  distinctly  understood  that  the  drawings 
are  in  a  measure  diagramatical  and  do  not  in  all  in- 
stances represent  accurately  the  relative  distance  be- 
tween the  players. 

For  example :  in  the  diagramatical  representation, 
wide  spaces  are  left  between  the  individual  men  in  the 
rush  line,  while  as  a  matter  of  fact,  when  the  game  is  in 
progress,  the  rushers  stand  so  closely  together  that  they 
can  easily  touch  one  another  and  are  frequently  placed 
shoulder  to  shoulder.  This  manner  of  representation  has 

(75) 


76 

been  decided  upon  as  conducive  to  greater  clearness  in 
showing  the  relative  positions  and  directions  where  a 
number  of  men  are  obliged  to  pass  through  one  opening, 
and  in  case  the  beginner  is  misled  by  this  in  any  way, 
his  error  will  be  readily  corrected  by  careful  study  in 
other  parts  of  the  book. 

In  arranging  the  positions  of  the  side  acting  upon  the 
defensive,  the  quarter-back  has  been  placed  immediately 
behind  one  of  the  tackles  while  a  half-back  has  been 
brought  forward  and  stationed  behind  the  other  tackle. 
The  abilities  of  the  two  half-backs  should  determine 
which  position  they  shall  occupy  ;  the  points  to  be  con- 
sidered being  the  ability  to  catch  the  ball  when  it  is 
kicked,  and  the  qualification  for  meeting  the  heavy  tack- 
ling in  the  line. 

Sometimes  it  is  preferable  upon  the  third  down,  or 
when  the  ball  is  to  be  kicked,  that  the  half-back  stationed 
behind  the  tackle  should  immediately  return  to  his 
proper  position.  At  all  other  times  the  quarter-back  and 
half-back  usually  remain  directly  behind  their  respective 
tackles  as  indicated,  after  the  ball  is  snapped,  until  it  be- 
comes clearly  apparent  through  which  one  of  the  openings 
the  opposing  side  is  to  make  their  attack,  and  then  to 
spring  forward  directly  into  this  breach  and  meet  the  on- 
coming runner  in  the  line. 

This  is  considered  a  safer  and  more  powerful  defense 
than  to  have  either  one  of  these  men  attempt  to  break 
through,  in  the  hope  of  meeting  the  runner  behind  his 
own  line  before  he  reaches  the  opening,  and  is  the 
method  adopted  by  the  leading  college  football  teams  in 
the  country.  When  opposed  to  a  team  using  the  running 
game  almost  altogether,  both  half-backs  may  be  sent  for- 
ward to  support  the  line,  the  full-back  alone  remaining 
well  behind  the  line  for  safety. 


77 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  ends  upon  the  side  acting  on 
the  offense  are  placed  near  the  tackles  and  are  drawn 
slightly  back  from  the  line.  We  believe  that  the  ends 
are  in  the  strongest  possible  position  for  an  attack  in  any 
direction  when  they  stand  about  a  yard  and  a  half  from 
the  tackles,  and  about  a  yard  back  from  the  line.  From 
this  position  they  are  of  equal  value  in  blocking,  should 
the  play  be  made  around  their  end,  while  in  plays 
through  the  center  and  around  the  opposite  end,  their 
position  back  from  the  line  enables  them  to  get  into  the 
play  with  far  greater  rapidity,  and  wellnigh  doubles 
their  efficiency.  From  a  position  in  the  line  the  running 
of  the  end,  with  the  ball,  which  may  be  made  a  power- 
ful play,  would  be  extremely  difficult. 

Nearly  every  diagram  represents  two  plays  or  more, 
and  it  should  be  borne  in  mind  that,  whereas  in  the 
diagram  a  play  may  be  represented  as  made  to  the  left, 
the  same  play  may  also  be  made  to  the  right,  and  vice 
versa. 

In  representing  the  arrangement  of  the  men  in  the 
wedges  and  in  the  opening  plays  from  the  center  of  the 
field,  the  formation  is  given  which  in  the  majority  of 
cases  would  seem  to  be  most  advantageous.  But  this 
arrangement  need  not  be  considered  fixed  and  may  be 
changed  at  the  discretion  of  the  captain. 

For  special  reason,  too,  it  may  in  some  instances  seem 
best  to  alter  the  arrangement  of  the  interference  so  that 
the  positions  of  the  preceding  and  following  runners  shall 
be  interchanged.  When  there  is  sufficient  reason  for 
doing  so,  there  should  be  no  hesitation  in  making  the 
alteration.  When  nothing  is  said  as  to  duties  of  a  player 
in  the  description  of  the  diagrams,  it  will  be  understood 
that  the  player  blocks  his  man. 


o 


£0    •« 


o\o  •: 


\ 


79 


JS 


A    C 
fll    3 


.£  -c    c 


<u 

3 
*55 

c 

£ 

o 

0) 

2 

c 
o 

u 
c 


T3  X.    *• 

fc  8  >• 

£3  « 


<^-« 

^    rt    0' 

S55 

S  «  "g 

XI     D     C 
Co    <U    c3 


s-  s^ 

2  'H  2  ^a 
t*  5  «  S 

=  "1^ 


sis 

O   A    V 


X  £  £? 

•a  -2  o 


X!    J5 

EH 


OH 


•a  5  «u  ?  ^ 

C    <a    c    o         ^ 

ttf   ^3    ^5    -G     ^     oj 


r  "^  a  i3 

*  «  « 

Vi  K^-i  fll 

u   S  S 


t«     03 


C 
T3  ^5 

^1 


o  .a 


•S 


"1  "3 

.S  w  3 

«  M 

T)     ^  >;i; 

O    >.  . 

8-d  d 

C  fe 

«  O 

TJ 


6I 


o 


o 


81 


same 

—         T  j 

2    05 

1| 

U 

O 

ID    en 

en    SH 

C    <U 

3 

^c 

•S 
o 

a; 

,               ^H 

*J      ^ 

"£    o 

oi    bo 

r^ 

j3 

;a 
'in 

0) 

" 

|     * 

1—     * 
O      %i 

•d 

.5  «-< 

en    <U 

U    G 

t-c       O 

o 

3 

£ 
3 

s" 

c 

^^ 

"*^          ^ 

0    "^ 

,G    0 

0)        bO 

— 

^ 

d 

C 

j5* 

^  S 

^     "*"* 

"x* 

rt     0 

,G     ^ 

|ki 

a 

0 

£ 

"H  S 

1=5 

1 

tu      • 

rO          t-H 

"^    0) 
?  5 

•d 

^ 

c 
o 

^j 

CQ     ^* 

'*"•/ 

r-  i 

~  ,n 

o3    in 

£ 

rt 

(/) 

^    %i 

r-"     "^v 

C* 

•"-•    rt 

•— 

"-T* 

.S     >* 

IH 

fl 

a 

O 

fj       S 

S 

^t  ^ 

^    £ 

Sn 

*" 

c 

0 

OCCU 

c§     ^ 

O^ 

o  ^ 

en 

^  .§ 

*    »-i 
—    *-" 

G     O 

_G 

9, 

."5 

1 

_a> 

_^ 

-d  -g 

O     ^3 

£i   o 

U-|     X 

•S  S 

J->    rt 

.   ^ 

ex 

ex 

0 
^2 

So 

X 

E     aj 

r— 

~     D 

o 

2 

j!^ 

0) 

^ 

5  S 

**5      ^ 

pt    CD 

D 

G 

" 

u 

a3 

-d 

*d   o1 

C    ctf 

^     O 

jd 

^     fl) 

5 

U 

H 

|^ 

d 

*-H 

Vi 

0)     ° 

.»-! 

rG        G 

^— 

3 

aj    g 

$!« 

~   o 

^   "tf 

£     '" 

O 

2 

D 

-a 

G 
03 

09 

~r   o 

IT.    ^ 

^  -M 

>    t-, 

-    rS 

1  o 

•"        ^H 

ij 

<U     tfl 

0    C 

.S  rt 

JD 

?< 

Q 

0 

•a 

Ui 

J: 
O 

~    1 

*«f^ 

""*    C 

^  s 

7  ^ 
•S  'd 

t 

1 

43 

bo 
C 

nj 

3 

^    "tJ 

rd     "J 

<D    '" 

c  .3 

rt    oj 

S  « 

ri 

^ 

B 

S) 

h 

"ft^ 

J   ^ 

•S  'd* 

1  2 

r^S    c3 

"c 

•_ 

o 

g 

c 

<U 

<u 

1 

.S    cj 

II 

O     &" 

"H  c 

G    x 

"   6" 

^  ^ 

u 

M 

-4J 

a 

0 

0) 

S  as 
S.  ° 

3    M 

£ 

q 

«5      X 

•S  -2 

05  .2 

ti  .c 

0)     * 

fe   o 

° 

s 

<u  .S 

be  -a 

-i-> 

o3  '35 

o  -*-• 

ci    u 

2.  Half-back  be 

a 

u 

,8 

i-i 

c 
% 
o 

EH 

d 

-' 
ft 

C 

et 
O 

The  instant  the  ball 
receives  the  ball  at  abou 

i  §  s 

O    -T  ^ 

4)     ^  *J 
5     S     ^ 

0,    ^     U 

S    -^ 
4  o  M 

O     -J      03 

LT  lifts  his  man  bac 
right  the  moment  the  bal 

LE,  RT,  and  RE  also  st 
first  man  behind  the  oppo 

LH  from  outside  of  LT  bef 
indicated  in  the  diagram, 

S 

•d 

2  S 
"3 

tC 

«u    w 

G  55 

o 
•a 

_G 

"j 
~ 

his  particular  man. 

*  It  will  be  a  great  advant 
to  have  the  other  to  use  in  wa 

O! 


o: 


;0 


83 


<u 

a 

G 
03 

IM 

O 

| 
o 

0 
•v: 
rt 
0 

.S 

•y. 
W 

^  8 
t-,  "^ 

>. 

runner's 
ver  used. 

*o 

Q 

o7 

H 

** 

,_r 

;j 

a;     .. 

d 

m   a> 

c 

0) 

o 
o 

O 

£ 
1 

"ii 
fl 

£ 

f 

eve 

•A 
O 

S 

y 

•*•"  ^ 
a  g 

D    O 
^3    T;) 

[^ 

OS 

C/3 

^>* 

A 

"vT 

aT   rt 

tf. 

-e   o 

•r 

o 

W 

!S 

G 

0) 

ex, 

o 

o 

0) 

1 

opening  j 

.G' 

3 
u 
g 

S 
IE 

"7. 

s 

G 

o 
3 

r  opponer 
liagram,  t 

*>  the  line  ; 

f  the  game, 
but  is  now  i 

o 

o 

a; 

0) 

S, 

r^ 

•d 

j 

'S  *" 

i 

0  __.. 
+•*     3 

TJ 

C 

D 

G 
01 

id 

"3 

i 

fl 

rt 

J 

G 
rt 

I 

l.s 

1 

0) 

C   <£ 

a  & 

G    -> 
f  § 

•o 

G 

G 
oS 

0) 

1 

g 

« 

<i 

Q 

C 

c 

2  'S 

4) 

u   S 

D     >> 

rt 

as 

"*"* 

aj 

. 

^ 

rt 

-S   "oS 

rt 

*c  ^ 

<u 

o 

03 

•^ 

5S 

OS 

£ 

0 

£ 

O 

•U 

-M  .y 

.8 

a;   O< 

J3     V 

3 

0 

rt 

•4-> 

OJ 

.c 

»« 
^ 

•S 
<u 

o 

fQ 

•y; 

ea 

IE 
>. 

^ 

deavors 

11 

aj 

11 

a 

3 
S 

tage  of  t 
make  th 

C 

i-! 

73 

4s 

"5 

S 

d 

0) 

01     O 

OJ 

TJ 

•d 

cj 

-5 

f 

Q 

•d 

C     Trt 

•5 

V    0) 
a  "^ 

rt 

rt 

S   ^ 

!> 

P* 

> 

•=. 

- 

oj 

g<    4) 

0 

w  o 

"flj 

H 

g 

rt 

c 

I-I 

£ 

T; 

o  :S 

G 

4)    fi 

(J 

rt 

S 

ffi 

*^ 

To  send  ui  between  i 

g 

>>  ai 

p  t  ^ 

.S  G 

4)     U< 
IH 
ft    - 

I5 

eiving  the  ball  at  x  on 
with  his  head  down. 

1 
rt 
rt 

a 
'3 

1 

is  blocked. 

LT  makes  a  supreme  e 

ectly  for  the  opposing  er 

-*-* 
a2    0 
^ 

O   "^ 
_  <u 

T3     D 
G   J3 
03   *-• 

0 

LHf  at  the  left  end  and  i 

*  This  play  was  made  in  t 
lity  to  dodge  was  trusted  to 
t  See  NOTE,  diagram  2. 

.S 

S  S 

.G 

S 

b 

^ 

6 

"S 

rt 

o! 

-a 

c 
<u 

_=' 
E 

0) 

^ 

Oi 

3 

a 
_o 

'7. 

o 

(A 

•d 

5 
S 

a 
ft 

0) 

on 

0) 

4-1 

1 

.a 

0) 

V. 

1 

Bj 

1= 

C 
ft 
•/. 

£ 
£ 
•/. 

le  outside  of  the  opposing 

0) 

i 

o 

I 

IS 

| 
1 

Q 

si  I 

!|| 

0)  O  -M 

^1  ft 

§  *  2 

w  aj  ^ 

&H  f^  <-5 

d'-3^ 

0) 

a 

1 

o 

o 
cu 

c 

O 

ft 

IS 

i 

ft 

~ 

°  cf 

D 

0 

w 

'(-" 

:  same 

•/. 

"7. 
O 

(fl 

c 

—  J 

a 

j: 
oJ 

V. 

•/. 

leavers 

VM  s_i  0) 

•°  w>« 

en  O  ^ 

^  'C  -0 

'O  ^  '?- 

.C 
0) 

•d 

a 

V 

^ 

If-back  around  1 

§-' 

0 
a 

e 

^: 
> 

,-) 

<4-l 
O 

.1 

H, 

M 
O 
X 
0) 

tention. 

u  start  forward  at  u 

d 
o 

I/I 

E 
"3 

,0 

s 

-d 

pa 

0 
:_ 
oJ 

1J 
i- 

°3 

o 

is  opponent,  and  eni 

8  fe  o 

a-2  ft 

"x  .a  tr. 

1^  I 

e  C  ^ 
S  «  g 

3  E  ^ 

«l  y 

£,=,  3 
^  f  « 

M-l  .s-  O 

0) 

_c 
<u 

•s 

J3 

M 

s 

0 

(4 

•S 

bfl 

^5 

C 

"3 

rj 

to 

•d 
« 
35 
y 

3 

S 

CO 

0) 

rt 

"J; 

— 

It 

- 

** 

_o 

« 

ss  ^  ^ 

>% 

,c 

E 

K 

-r 
c 

,n 

'-!, 

C 
y 

1 

'IT. 

IH 

•—j  *^  O 
w  '^  t*-1 
TJ 

S|a 

o 

•  —  , 

cl 

& 
C8      . 

•5  " 

^ 

— 

9 

f 

(5 

•  |H 

^j 

.  *^  0> 

l-l    r^ 

£., 

, 

§ 

*_ 
tn" 
O 

•r- 

u 
cd 

K 

•-- 

^ 

1 

=  2  3 
„-  bo  ? 

Cj      rr 
O      10 

0)     ft 

O 

f  2 
1  Sf 

0 

31 

-^ 

to 

0) 
<M 

without 

£ 
i 

§ 

•~ 

makes 

—  o 

•"s  §  «c 
>  w  <u 

i-"  -  J3 

a   « 

*"* 

O     C 

s 

«  '-3 

P 

£z 

Q 

?*• 

to 

d5 

~~Z 

H 

-      m       -4-» 

-t->    H 

I>J 

j^    4) 

^H 

JO 

"^ 

ft 

'    — 

<D  fl 

•^  C^ 

-t— 

en  73 

^^ 

^ 

JS  o)  E 

bt 

-T 

*   -i- 

-^  ' 

d) 

_  —  J 

'O 

c  ^  S 

^ 

M 

"ft 

,c 

gj 

,3 

a 
u 

S  cS  ° 
O  -*-*  r^ 

d 
w 

.1 

QQD 


o, 


0^0 


0^0 


87 


2 
'53 

'5> 

0 

a 

0 

<u 
J3 

C 
O 

'(Si          *"2 

*Xi      Cg 
5     § 

<! 

<e  t) 

-d  c 

t-<       C3 

5»  * 

<u  <*> 

CN       ^* 

rt 

0) 

C 
•>-> 

j>, 

IL- 

-55  B 
bog 

.a  3 

0     g 

^,    en 
3    ^ 
-d    o 
5S  ^ 

1  ° 
*-i   <u 

O    [-5 

1* 

rQ     -s. 

s| 

through  the  line,  breaking  an 
d  the  opposing  line. 
L  the  run  or  by  a  short  pass,  and 

_bp 

13 

0) 

.g 
-d 

S 

1 

p 

k 

•^ 

u 

s 
,g 

* 

0 

1-a 

s  ~ 

S  -3 

a  « 

g  rt 

V. 

o 
o 

-M 

H) 

(H 
O 

M-l       0) 

1 
S 

>d 

o 

b 

V-, 

<u 

J_l 

^^ 

.a  w 
&  o 

c  " 

V    *M      M 

3 

k 

°  1 

1  2 

^ 

a 
u 

c3  .ti 
T3     O 

2£ 

T3  T5 

w^  o 

—      *~* 

(D     X     0) 

tn    •"      11 
<S    J2      "^ 

ia 

1 

•^  ^ 

a)   o 

o 

a 

H   ^j 

6    G 

-  >d 

tn   "rt    ^ 

•5 

"5  » 

rt  .| 

£ 

_j 

-*-*       »• 

'S  id 

5  & 

(li     p>  t   o 

"S 

^_, 

c*\ 

O 

"W 

V? 

£>    (U 

X    rt 

t/1             r! 

pC 

d) 

'C 

K    »*^ 

b/) 

Half-back  between  guard  an 

o  send  LH  between  RG  and  c,  the  ends 
yard  and  a  half  outside  of  the  tackl( 

yards  directly  behind  the  guards,  RH 
itands  between  three  and  four  yards  b 

he  instant  the  ball  is  snapped  FB,  LH, 
en  RG  and  c  ;  RG  lifts  his  man  back 

M 

G 

'S 

1 

o> 

4 

0) 

6 

_0 

B  dashes  straight  into  this  space,  pas 
ig,  and  jumps  into  the  first  man  in  his 
H  receives  the  ball  from  QB'S  hands  as  ] 

es  into  the  opening  directly  behind  FB 
:d  at  his  stomach  with  £0A#  hands.* 

tj 

D 

6 
gl 
U 

Is 

rt  ft 

=   In 

T,  simply  forcing  his  opponent  to  pass 
d  the  instant  the  ball  is  in  play,  to  ar 

xeeds  in  getting  through  the  line.  It 
and  make  it  his  especial  duty  to  take 

jD 

M 

"8 
<u 

o 
G 
rf 

1 

1 

rt 

S 

|H 

O 

ee  NOTE,  diagram  2. 
ee  NOTE,  diagram  i. 

»n 

£H    rt 

-     u^ 

II 

£-!      V 
1 

1 

0) 

ft 

o 

IPS, 

1  a 

ft  "3 

CH    G 
'rt 

rt° 

J  s 

-3 

s-s 

4)    rt 

&  & 

WC/J 

*  +- 

0-0 


89 


<u 

'<n 

<u 

'55 
o 

0. 

a 
o 

a; 
43 

4J 

C 

o 

JJ 

3 

o 

rt 

| 
O* 

0) 

5 

1 
o 
£ 
3 

id  I.K  start  forward  at  utmost  speed 

ED 

C| 

4« 
I 

§ 

•< 

a> 

z 

a 

<< 

-~ 

9) 

i3 
C 

43 

5 

a! 
f-, 

OJ 

CU 

•O 

T3 
O 

cT 

o 
t« 

c 

"ci 
p 

U3 

S 

rt 
^ 

A 

^ 

^ 
^ 

% 
ii 

'S 

'3: 

(D 

•g 

cS 

I 

•*• 

S 

with  RH  ahead  oi  LH,  to  break  the 
g  from  behind. 

(4 
*O 

1  . 

o 

8 
a 

£ 

3 

a 

5 

be 
n 

a> 

d 

•d 

2 

^^ 

"cS 

42 

0) 
43 
53 

§ 

'o 

D 
O 
•     i-. 

IT)     o 

i  o 

C8    -M 
vV    t/1 

opening 
id  pushin 

:k  between  the  guai 

4> 
(K 

S 
3 

O 

m 
u 

4) 

,5 

rt 

"3 

& 

a 

_2 

0) 

o 

* 

<   M 
"?    ° 

"5  "So 

O  'J5 

c  w 

LH  follows  immediately 
i,  the  ball  held  as  before.J 

his  position  the  moment 

1 

2 
jd 

eS 

•C 

J 

i' 
o 

1 

o 

-4J 

f  LT  is  the  same  as  in  diag 
is  own  man  and  endeavor 

may  be  sent  through  the 
re,  instead  of  following  ai 

ion  of  positions  of  diagram  5. 
ion  in  diagram  5. 

W 

rt 
J3 

H) 

Tl 
tt) 

2  S 

S,a 

«w 
O 

0 

?  i 

'xi  't/: 

s!     03 
•^   'O 

•~   o 

tn 
0) 

rt    „; 

a 

H 

aT 

0  43 
fr$ 

•a  3 

«      <u 

£  "tt 

0) 

w-2 

.&.&1 
'C  'C 

£  g 

OJ     0 

•o  -a 

ffi 

01 

O 

H 

^3     0) 
|H 

1 

">3 

l« 

•5   % 

•13 

3| 

C8 

n 

| 

0)    ** 

43     W 

H  rt 

11 

4) 

m  j) 

K     i) 

cfi  cn 
*  -t- 

O 

1 

a 

VI 

11 

!i 

09 

.2 

91 


IS 
"53 

1 

72 

0)   'C 
T£     C 

•^  a 

•5* 

IBS 

a 

0 

£ 
1 

o  interfere 

4-< 
t/> 
O 

-l-> 

3 
4-1 

c3 

he  outside 

14      .S 

8      a 
<S       i> 

head  of  LH 

4) 

a 
o 

5 

v 

4-> 
*W 

O 

-/. 
fl 

is. 

<-) 

<a 

s 

•v* 

•^ 

v, 

« 

z 

-l-> 

(D    TJ 

c  13 
15  <c 

60 
.S 

<D 

z 
_y 

*-l            •      rfl 

l|.a 

a 
g 

«*H 

Q 

£ 

a 
a 
o 

^0 

*S 

c 

4> 

a 

4J 

Oj 

t3 
0) 

ti 

0 

d  forces  hi 

•f. 
K 

9 

<D 
C 

P, 
0 

0) 

S-, 

_*j 
d 

4) 

^n 

ot 

Pi 

«J  8'S 

.    >»  O    -u 

Hs§ 

«       5     rC       (H 

S 

G 
3 
t-, 

"o 

G 

r^ 

4) 

O 

^- 

jd 

c 

a 

^ 

£ 

5 

$ 

•d 

M 

cfl 

0 

§-^    M  0 

V     «    3   ^3 

O 

| 

o 

•a 

4) 

.c 

| 

2 

3 

1 

Cj 

S 

^ 

_2 

2 

IH          a!   -i-> 
«    bO  0 

G  .S    bC  0 

"-1    G    C  •« 

>-. 
0) 

^ 
5 

c 

4> 

I 

o 

2 

| 

'S 

.S 

« 

"o 
« 

bO  «  'S    -x 

•S   o1-0  _S 

3 

E; 

*0 

^ 

^ 

°x 
o 

s 
« 

o 

ts 

0 

^j     w           4*3 
o    (D    c    rf 

** 

c 

rt 

^ 

o 

D 

l-i 

1 

P3 

O1 

TJ 

d 

^j   *5     O     S 

•S 

8 

d 

4J 

3 

u 
ctf 

4-» 

4> 

M 
M 

_C 
C 

5 

in 

tn 

Id 

>i 

_2 

H 

04 

<M 

1 

.53 

<u 

S 

2 

i 

0 

•d 

CO 

a 
5 

P*  ^    S    a>" 

•sill 

^sg-2 

"o  o   >  § 

§ 

interfere 

•d 

^ 

•T-* 

PH 

"^ 

•*-*    u> 

O    rn 

•^ 

C 

-- 

H 

T3 

H 

5 

d 
pj 

05 

o 

*   -^     PH   S 
4>     $           .S 

rt    fli 

rQ     ^ 

'S 

<u 

^ 

4-> 

(U 
J3 

J«! 

u 

rt 

between  RT 

05 
5 

09 

M 

opening  to  th 

1 
aT 

D 

g 

"3 
a> 

tn 

CO 

3 

•d 

et 
j 

iHl 

flit 

l«3| 

the  opposing 
re  must  be  ta 

*S 

o 

X 

To  send  I.H 

*•    § 

oS    D 

bo  2 

tant  the  ball 

0) 

*J 

•- 
•2 

•a 
i 

•a 

•S 

bo 

G 

1 
cS 

P.  . 

%    '' 

LH. 

LH  receive 

^J 

RH  and  FB  to 
QB  should, 
LE  follows 
LT,  going  1 

jj      CJ 

1U 

^    H 

3g 

1"* 

to  diminish  ' 

-p 
2 

1 

o 

•/. 

_s 

n 

S 

*    1 
e8  «. 

14 
-* 

I 

'*S 

rt 
O 

3 

-5 

o 


o 


riB.ill|3i^iI 
ffilPl^ilifil; 

o<^''^ic-SP(Df-fe<D*Jir:cic' 


—  jn-^.^rtO^O^OHS^Cctflo 
«§t,Wl|.S^o«£o,.S^o 

a^-wg  J.9fl^SaI^^^ 

'g^^    "  »  a-g'o    ^  S^5  "^"H 


-4      >">    IS      V.    r»  ^      tO 

•SIJ.SPS  g« . 

a^TSfi-SSa 


o 


s.s-21a^ 


&S  5 

°^-S 

O    <S    a) 

J3   J?^ 


0^0 


95 


.s 

IT. 

0)     0) 

-4-1     -M 
(H      O 

X 

0 

^ 

O 

JZ 

I 

1 

IS 

*)    1) 
ll 

| 

"2 

cd 

<2  ^ 

? 

^ 

•" 

r< 

to  •*- 

S    ™ 

CO 

3 

3 
bO 

•o 

C 

1 

"E 

l-i     05 

5s  <« 

i  ^ 

a 

j 

1 

learest  bac 

tt) 

D 

iv: 
5 
ft 

'1 

U 

CS 

S 
o 

ight  again 
resistance, 

*j    „ 

oj     O 
|| 

1 

s 

cS 

OJ 

cS 

.G  s 

g 

~ 

2 

CD 

S  £ 

!-« 

0) 

5 

• 

C 

OS       G 

i— 

•~; 

.2 

.,     cS 

O       -rH 

n 

CJ 
-l-l 

i 

.2 

o 

A 

h 

o> 

~ 

S 

0)     w 

*^    .<~! 

-B  g 

bo 

G 

e 

S     ^~* 

•*^ 

J: 

Is 

c  '5 

-3  s 

rj 

'55 

0) 

u 

0) 

6 

*§! 

a 
t> 

_-r 

"^ 

c 
c 

•d 

a, 

o    ? 
.fa   * 

be  dj 

.s  -s 

bO 
C 

a 

c 

o 

cS  ~ 

> 

'J2 

09 

o 

^     0) 

in 

O      «+•! 

'S5 

o 

cu 

0 

•d 

c 

cS 

S  ~" 

-  "G 

H* 

^ 

1 

"o 
Is 

-^  £ 
*  2 

0   J3 

ex,  ^ 

c§ 

G 

.g 
s 

J-l 

O 

CO    *3 

«S 

u 

c 

^  S 

.-•C 

"3 

0 

•G     TJ 

U} 

!>> 

.0 

"" 

-  o 

k 

<a 

^ 

o 

r—      U 

M     ^g 

T) 

(U 

73 

C 

tween 

SH       S 

K    g 

"*      03 

o 

£ 
O 

0) 

5 

c 

"£ 

2: 

o 

05 

S     G 

o5  — 

»   "§) 

^1 

succe 

o 

-3 

1 

co 

.0 

oJ 

|| 

•0 

c 
3 

> 

c 

•d 

1 

M 

1 

»d   ° 

S     f> 

•5     <l) 

0 

0) 

i 

i 

2 

r_ 

.£2 

cS    -u 

'— 

X 

*>M 

-    c 

•^       r 

o 

H 

bO 

•  ' 

^ 

c8 

^" 

1 

"G  ^ 

O     J^ 

•S     G 

M 
|H 

| 

.c 

be 

•—     J 

5 
£ 

{A 

_=' 

S 
o> 
& 

bC 

IS 

•^    2 

!^       3 

2  ? 

o    rt 

.S     -M 

^     G 
O     CS 

-    0) 

£  a 

li     _Jj 

•2-S 

CO 

r3  ^ 

CO     O 

£  .2 

g 

5 
c 

^ 

•••    cS 

o 

^—1 

—      -M 

•*"*    J-2 

rG 

(11  2 

be  - 

rt 

S 
-*. 

0)     ,« 

"ij  c 

^ 

1 

1 

'G  .,2 

be  c 

^      O 

o>  -2 

ty 
^2     >, 

xlS 

cS    bfl 

S  P 

•2  g 
^2 
§IP 

*, 

^  'C 

«    J* 

rj 

if 

J 

u  .a 

•£  •? 

.S   o 

5  £ 

'I* 

3 

•g  s 

«  "S 

u 

O 

u 

fa 

•c 

.  "i 

^r  4) 

tn 

'c  -d 

HH      0 

5 

'C  w 

o  H 

(LI 

S  'd 

•^  XI 

_o 

-5 

IS 

§1 

cS    c 

.  •*-• 

u:  o 
D  >5 

*   5j 

n 

'^; 

'C 

'—     cS 

t-(    "^ 

T3  « 

<> 

O      0 

^  'S 

^— 

1 

(B 

i 

o 

t^* 

w"  to 

i-J     0> 

p^   o 

1^ 

li 

^  ^ 

0)  4) 

0)  1) 

co  co 

r-j 

0) 

cu 

>L 

2 

d. 
ex 

t3  S 

OJ      ^ 

«; 

bO 

0> 

a 

c 

si 

to 

o 

S:  •« 

cS 

.5 

cS 

-<-) 

O'-O 


97 


JU 

(J 

H 
I 

H 

*. 

1 

"E, 

-u 

a 
cu 

- 

*J 

•d 

G 

3 

t 

"c 

8 

:tra  man  behind  th« 

ishes  into  the  open- 

_c 

bt> 
'S 

1 

•  a 

d)     O 

prevents  the  oppos 

the  preceding  dia- 

03 

M 
«S 

4) 

*^j 

O 

^ 

4) 

•d 

x>  jjj 

•d 

_G 

•o 

G 

•d 

Q 

-M 

1 

S 
O 

1 

•d 

rt 

S  ^ 

2  S 

2 
3 

'S 

a 
o 

OJ 

*0 

X 
0 

Efl 
4) 

•y. 

15 

V. 

1 

to 

a 

p 

^1 

2 
3 

^3 
H 

a 

cj 

£ 

"w 

•~ 

T3 

o 

•°    c« 

a 

a 

4> 

a 

5 

c 

OS 

1 

Is 

1 

V 

*d 

•d 

c 
3 
o 

£ 

| 

g 

0" 
O1 

£ 

1« 

23 

c    a) 

1 

+j 

c 

S 

2 
8 

0 

^ 

bo 

a 

| 

£   .0 
T3     >> 

1 

.9 

1 

g 

y 
| 

4> 

i 

1 

"2  ^ 
S  .2 

.£ 

3 

lu 

BJ 

1 
o 

| 

0 
0) 

" 

d 
d 
o 

,a  -d 

•|1 

AH       ,-i 

ii 
s 

4) 

a 

d 

S 

•M 

"~ 

.r 

J.§ 

4) 

.S 

01 

rt 

jn 

JM 

•T 

Z~ 
^ 

5 

"2 

<< 

•^ 

f 

1 

I 

'It 

32 

rikes  th 

d 
3 

£ 

Efl 

n 
tc 

2 

bo 

a 
g 

iagram  5 
m  9. 

d 

M 

S 
4) 

•d 

c 
p 

•  — 
jd 

i 

•3 

M 

M 

•d 

n 

I 

-f. 

^ 

OJ 

H 

X 

receives  the 

ectly  behind 
,  QB,  and  RE 

M 

i) 

£ 
IS 

h 
4> 

5 

ai 

£ 
p 
o 

£ 

c 

i 

,  without  ho 

description,  d 
NOTE,  diagra 

O 

3 

;y. 

JS 

<  ^J 

a 

*d  ^ 

"o 

K 

•d 

c 

4) 

5  "S" 

v    o 
02  Cfl 

*^*  S 

*    •»- 

2 

t4 

.^•C  ^J 

bo 

r-~1 

CVj 

rt 

•  J 

hJ 

v!  3 

5 

.£ 

So 

0-2 


99 


-o 

c 

OJ 

•o 

C 
rt 

3 

0 

rt 

-*j 

there  is  no  change  in  the  position  taken 
rd  in  the  lines  indicated  the  instant  the 

4)  T3 

41 

5  1 
C  ^ 
"•  a; 

i  1 

c  3 

B  '  <J 

«C  4) 

•£  <s 

4>"  S 

3  » 
3  « 

4J  J 

-^  o 

-M 

S 

B 

3 

"S 

W 

_c 

4> 

.a 
•f. 

3 

6 

IS 

0) 

o 

4> 

•E 

o 

Q 

"S 

bo 

peed,  seek  to  protect  and  assist  him. 

g  tackle  0«f  £  and  in  toward  the  center, 
d  in  the  arm  away  from  approaching 

0) 

o 

s 

£ 

5 

£ 

S 

o 

-»j 

diagram  8  and  NOTE. 

jack  between 

s    I 

1      -2 

2      1 

•J      -c 

s   % 

fe          G 
^             4) 
<U             0) 

e  extra  man  behinc 
he  opposing  RE  wl 

*c  on  a  pass  from  OK 

i;r  and  endeavors  1 

(n 

-!-> 

S 

I 

2 

13 

to  force  the  opposm 
.d  always  be  carrie 

1 

'rt 

*j 

« 

9 
09 

•i- 

| 

5 

js 

•»^ 

•^ 

D 

,  .   3 

•  ^ 

*- 

5 

U, 

M 
M 

I           1 

JH                 X 

•g      ^< 
•S       a 

«      ^ 

2*   81 

i  & 

o  ^ 

5  ? 

J  -S 

5  e-° 

w  •»  v> 

>  force  him  c^// 
ves  the  ball  al 

head  well  up. 
in  close  behin 

RE,  running  b 
s  as  before.f 

ts  every  powei 
The  ball  sho- 

"d 

"c 

3 

•S 

3 

X 

tfl 

B 

0 

iption  of  diagra 

"^  ^  ^  &1 

a  c  ^5   a, 

<U     4>    *J     rt 
'•"     B     4)     ^ 

^  J3 

u  4>  a 
J'S  »-J 

W3 

«   I 

s  s 

>    a 

2^ 

f  M 

r^-t       4-> 

*j    ;- 

•g  S 
-co* 

4) 

rference 

rrj       >1 

os  "Ei 
a  H 

C^  P^ 

i-, 

X       M 
4*       H 

p-     O 

J  5? 

5 

j 

cr 

2 

§ 

X 

See  descr 

^""1 

T3 

fl_) 

_o 

1-^ 

E 

CD 

* 

?T^        rt 

3 

& 

a 

lJ 

^J 

^        ^ 

O 

4) 

WJ 

.S 

ci 

fl 

o 

101 


G 

D 

4-> 

•o 

G 

3 
O 

:re  is  no  change  in  the  position  of  the  men. 
the  same  way  as  shown  in  the  preceding 
H  endeavors  to  force  the  opposing  end 
peed  and  rounds  the  end  outside  of  him. 
es  may  arise  which  offer  an  advantage  in 
than  that  called  for  by  the  signal.  While 
nal,  for  the  interferers  are  working  with 
ure  long  gains  for  his  side  by  judiciously 

outside  of  tackle  as  before.  (See  diagram 
und  the  end  is  shown  in  diagram  63. 

u, 

rt 

V 

a 

£ 

0) 

4-» 

a: 

o 
§ 

o 

U 

1 

g 

I 

•3 

rt 

^ 

0) 

dentica 

x 

;J 

"P 
o 

C 

e 

"2 
d 

ircumst 

c 

1 
| 

er  may 

o 
c 

i-B  runs 

1^ 

. 

•«»4 

x 

o 

o 

b£ 

^  —  \ 

g 

•** 

O 

- 

3 

5 

a 

0 

•^ 

1, 

•d 
S 

1 

45 

c 

1 

0>, 

1 

1 

3 

^ 

^ 

pq 

4) 

p  , 

4J 

^3 

c 

d 

1^1 

fa 

.^ 

C 

'f. 

^~| 

o 

r~ 

2 

N 

1 

.2 

.3 

_0 

^ 

o 

0 

.2 

3 

cT 

X 
4) 

n 

di 

!S 

d 

^l 

"7. 

^ 

rt' 

5 

^ 

"S 

p 

c 

o 

4-> 

oS 

^0 

to 

i-H 

U 

<«-4 

4) 

6 

S 

X 

-M 
CJ 

•J 
^ 
^ 
<* 
.^ 

a 

to 

>, 

o] 

4) 

nd 
'to 

O 

1 

-x 

1 

X 

c 

1 

$H 

O 

"o 

•d 

c 

0 

"p. 

X 
0) 

1 

r-l        1U 
£* 

^ 

1-1 

o 

^£ 

3 

d 

^ 

< 

to 

4) 

fl 

IS 

tf! 

,  g 

c 

rt 

** 

^v 

O 

e 

s 

i 
i 

1 

5 

O 

_y 

0 

M 
08 

.2 

4-> 

b/ 

.2 

'3 

i 

'-5 

1 

X 

03 

rt 

6 

1. 

-o 

0^0     • 


0^0     • 


103 


•d 

Ut 

he  preceding 

0) 

1 

-d 

LH  follows 
H  is  followed 

LH 

and  between 

-  .S 

d   o 

^-  H 

•d 
G 

03 

•  J2 

2 

o> 
•B 

5 

-d 

§ 
1 

•d 

6 

cd 

** 

.0 

i 

u  « 

*^ 

^ 

"a.  ^ 

^    § 

_G 

'i 

3 
M 

G 

'i 

s-l 

1 

tn 

15 
o 

&  £ 
«  ^ 

bfi  •£ 

eives 

| 

G  U 

rt    w 
W    * 

:n 
3 

0> 

_G 

0) 

o 

'd 

g 

5    . 

o 

•  — 

S 

o 

•^s 

O 

4-> 

S 

tn 

o 

+*  %> 

E 

>, 

s 

<-!       H 

.« 

J3 

'w 

O 

a 
a. 

o 

•a 

c 

nJ 

"c 

V 
0 

4; 

c,  the  positions  are  the  sa 

ie  three  backs  and  the  enc 

ndicated. 
//,  while  KG  endeavors  to  i 

pening  abreast,  and  close 
veight  «j  ^  strikes  the  lii> 

•d 

OS 

•d 

<u 

Cu 

G 
en 

.2 

Is 

O 

then  turns  in  immediate! 

iame  manner  as  shown  foi 
is  formed  as  the  men  stri 

falls  in  immediately  behil 
follows  directly  in  the  rea 

Vi 

<o 

m  » 

G  -t-> 

O    oS 
CD   "5 

as  far  as  possible,  strike  1 

X! 

•d 

^j3 

""  *-•$ 

o   ** 

S 

W 

J.        rl 

33     K^ 

t"~> 

4J 

C 
V 

s 

o 

•d 

O, 

tn 

0)     D 

.S  5 

tn 

£* 

.  •"    G 

S 

jj 

** 

-1 

if 

a 

1 

a> 
^ 

•4-> 

<U 
XI 

d 

ill  is  snai 

.sl 

11 

g  £ 
II 

il 

£. 

3  CD 

-.   bo 

PQ  | 

o  -S 

5    G 

|| 

tn 

bo 
G 

'E 

agram  5. 

•o 

G 
£ 

w 
3 

n 

0) 

rj       C3 

o>  -d 

be  G 

'  §   * 

2  » 

II 

^ 

"S  _G 
•H 

d§ 

(D   "3 

0) 
tn 
d> 

& 

-d 
s 

O 
O 

4-1 

c<    g 

M 

O 

^ 

G 

x  tJ 

Q    "*"- 

(_,  ^^ 

rH    en 

*       -^ 

bo 

& 

_ 

43 

at 

G    tn 

Co      t/1 

ol 

G   'r3. 

»^     ^H 

*d 

fO 

M 

£ 

0 

tn 

.S 

D  'G 

^  -d  ^ 

K     e    <" 

•  ^"^     n*     ^O 

tl 

5 

»  g 

U     4) 
> 

(I) 

"5  w 

0) 

•S 

i 

V 

•d 

01 

o 

*.  i 

_§  S 

*»  •«   ^> 

•S     H 

S 

-d  '^ 

§     0 

a  s 

0) 
,G 

£ 

£ 

3° 

|fa  | 

O 

9   § 

ii 

-s^1 

S  8 

W      ^c 

cfl 

* 

1 

o       5 

.Q 

^ 

^   & 

js    j; 

^ 

5  >2 

i. 


105 


it! 

•°  « 

jS    B  ^5 

J3     t«    -*-1     xV.         ' 
"^  cc    o  .2-1 

0 

-g  S 

§  ,2 

bfl 
.S 

<u 

3 

s 

•4J 

•a 

c 

rt 

;  position  of  the  men. 

forward  for  the  point 
ile  RT  forces  his  man  b 

opposing  guard  with 
i  interferes  with  the 
through  and  runs  dire 

a 

L- 

(0 

V 

% 

to  interfere. 
'tead  down  dives  into 

e  opening  between  RG 
ugh  and  getting  LE  be 

& 

1 

o 

o 

>^ 

c 

cj 
09 

•4-) 

-H 

rt 

3 
bo 

x 

.5 
o 
M 

-Si 
aS    p 

^^ 
«    C> 
J  •>» 

o> 
fi 
-w 

bo 
_C 

'^i 

^^ 

T5   "3 
^     § 
««     8> 

o 

_2 

2 

15 

o 

— 

3 
j| 

o 

2 

o 

i 

bO 

0) 

p    bb 

^1 

T3      S 

V 

4J 

i 

"S5 

"S 

^3 

m    as 

•5  ^ 

"5 

1 

S 

o 

'8 
o 

C    0* 
c4    O 

^ 

3  -1-1 

ea 

o 

-    0) 

'Jo 

o 

.  o 

*o" 

.-,  t« 

^ 

ffi 

^: 

c* 

0)      rj 

o 
o. 

o 

c 

§ 

k*  ^ 

l-s 

1 

S 

O 

§> 

8 

3    ^ 
O      X 

a 

•j\ 

I-  a 

[f 

^  S 

^ 

,d 

0 

C     0 

<G 

-3  ,« 

o 

P 

M      C3 

p( 

05     35 

a 

CA 

p 

c 

<U   s-i 
0}     s^ 

<L> 

»    ci 

A 

0 

5 

a  ^ 

0) 

0)    fo 

d 

S 

(H 

•r. 

i 

£  ,3 

d 

0> 

u 

•5  £ 

0)     O 

•±J 

t/3 

ri 

r! 

C- 

4-> 

14-  End  between 

^ 
5 

o 
« 

0 
V 

? 
M 

•d 

§ 

X 

o 

The  instant  the  ball  is  snapped 
:n  RG  and  RT.  RG  lifts  his  man 

^O 

4 

p 
o 

,g 

"o 

c 

•sj   ^ 
.^  0 

k      -/ 

cu   g. 

6  [I 

0   (§ 

K| 

^   O 

Cu      r^ 

is  £ 

51 

•^  IS 

JS  M 

o  £ 
3  g 

0)     S 
•^     D 

^<-i    .H 

1  «  2 

E 

"x 
0) 

CD 

5 
S 

5' 

'•7: 

a 

a 

o 

0 

ugh  the  center  of  the  opening  i 

LE  receives  the  ball  at  x  on  a 

directly  behind  LH. 

LT  plays  as  shown  in  diagram 
After  making  the  pass  the  best 

prevent  the  opposing  guard  or 
trikes  the  line. 

"S      0> 

a  -° 

aj    K 

B  « 

4J       W) 
«l 

•-•S 

tu  t; 

^      CJ 
CTj     r* 
-^     « 
M   13 
&    g 

w 

o 

•d 

H 

O    ci! 

O 

o 

o 

O    tr. 

-    (D 

p 
O 

B  .g  ?3         S 


•s* 


107 


^ 

i 

C    *-• 

c 

G  *    h 

5 

0 

~4j 

*^ 

| 

m  S 

c 

u 

O 

v}- 

o 

•  o 

3 

T3 

|U       J 

I 

"5 

fc  .2 

•d 

tn 

G 

<U     o 

3 

o 

<5   .5 

n 

3 

G"  B, 

c 

J8 

_ 

* 

BO 

ci 

—     o> 

i 

••"•      Q^ 

—I 

w 
0 

8 

2  3 

^r 

•d 

bO 

5  "S 

u 

I 

1/3 

3,  -M 

1 

3 

G 

°  ^ 

rt 

4J 

(G 

<c  In 

H 

4> 

1. 

<N*  *H 

•o 

I 

1 

11 

t/3 

i 

a 
P 

P< 

|JS 

_> 

4) 

tn 

G  w 

•  ^ 

,_^ 

0) 

•*•* 

T3 

i 

1 

£    O1 

O     0> 

<D   ««-i 

0 

tj 

5  s1 

G 

to 

-*-> 

12 

o  § 

flj 

4) 

id 

c  """ 

rG        0) 

_2 

"^     0) 

aj 

<L> 

o    <u 

u 

C 

^*j  . 

*•/ 
i  » 

^ 

<L> 

°  .c 

«"  t: 

p 

•  «-• 

G    ^ 

* 

CU 

<i> 

m  .fa 

-G  XI 

0 

S 

$  tl 

O 
O. 

£ 

4-1 

8 

c    be 
•*3    3 

O      4-^ 

g    G 

S 

1 

Cj     yi 

0. 

0 

V 

c 
1 
a; 

TJ 
C 

in 

M 

H 

^ 
a 

a 

D 

I 

'o 
H 

1 

4j 
a 

O 

•teen. 
RE  plays  as  shown  in  diagram  eight. 

RH  plays  as  LH  in  diagram  eleven. 
FB  plays  as  shown  in  diagram  seven. 

QB  plays  as  shown  in  diagram  eight. 
LH  proceeds  in  the  line  indicated,  at  utm 
ing  side  as  he  rounds  the  tackle  and  con 
;  either  the  opposing  LG  or  I.T  breaks-thro 

irevent  LE  from  being  stopped  before  he  r 
LT.  leavinjr  the  line  as  shown  in  diagrai 

a 

c 

B 

a 

5' 
PI 

4) 
4> 

RT  plays  as  shown  in  diagram  eight. 
LE  receives  the  ball  at  x  from  QB,  and,  p 
field  in  the  line  indicated  at  utmost  speed 
NOTE.  —  The  end  must  be  careful  to  run 

opposing  rushers  as  they  break  through. 

*  See  NOTE,  diagram  seven. 

2 

c/)    t/5 

\-L* 

'Z* 

0) 

(U 

1 

8,8 

£ 

1 

o  ; 


0^0 


<«  -d   c 

cS    oj    »H 

t-l        4>        3 

£  In  ~ 

S-a-g 

II  a 

<o    tn 

a*1? 


il! 


-a 

G 

O 
u 
aJ 

•a 

C 

UJ 


O     OJ     V= 

5  g  f 
^  ! 

g  ®  •§ 

*-C       r-       d) 

T3 

uj     .^ 

•o  £L  " 
'S  &^ 

.5  o  -5 
D  u  s- 

•T3   ^3     O 

5  **  *« 

<-!  tn  -M 
C  <U  ,£3 
tn  £J  W) 

'^•2  2 

-  S  « 
CX  « 


-*-»      H   "5   T3 

.M      a)    tn  .is 

(/) 

o 

a 
a 
o 


Z    «    bCtn 
^5    y    o  •£ 

VM     l-i    "^     t-i 

ooo^ 


^  ^  -S 


bp-s 


«*! 


^3  '- 


w    -M  'C 

5    §    ? 
-M     D    _OJ 

T3       *         «*-! 

C3       "TO 

§     %     « 
J-*     ^j     »-4 

S  c^ 

1-1    S    «8 

S  2  * 
•S  &  ^ 

•d  .3  •§ 
S  *3  *3 

I  a{ 

£  a  c 

t^1  >  s 

o  ^ 

"S  *o 


i 

*•   o 


•^       t>     rr* 

%>2       g 

•B  "5  a. 
^2^ 

S  ^3  ^ 

'^'E  J3 
o  o  a< 

C    C  T3 

^">,S 

a!  13  ~H 
«^1 


««s 

^s 


t"  T; 


S^« 

tn    o 

IS    &* 
.  I*H    fn 


>2  ^3 
'25  .5P- 
"s  " 

—    § 

rO      IH 

I  I 
'S 

0)     _ 

5  -S 

-  c 


3  "1  2  2  § 

g^g  S  S 

»^     -4-»    f-H      fli 

•r1    V    uS     O 

-fi|3 

^  «  < 


i^« 


3 
o 


E  =5 


oi    o 


:o 


O 


III 


opposite  guard. 

position. 

£ 

o1 

a 

4) 

£ 

•4-> 
Ul 

•-£ 

0) 

ed 

o 

5  3 
fco-d 

'>  ^ 
'5   ? 
o   * 

D     r-l 

II 
J* 

0)     fl 

ft  -rt 

&1  M 

Cj      (U 

S  g> 

in  £ 

•7; 

S 
*3 
^ 
c 
fl 

> 

c: 

£ 

00 

| 

H 
4> 

4) 

it  assistance,  I.E  may  follow 
ear  and  to  push  him  through 

<D 

"" 

a 

^ 

cd 

0 

>> 

0     ^ 

"O 

c 

rt 

u 
<u 

i 

to 

4) 

,C 

o4 

15 

^2 

t3 

5 
re 

'5 

0 

0 

£ 

rt 

1 
'C 

_H 

j= 

a/ 
*« 

!>> 

necessat 

X      CD 

11 

4J 

4) 

O 

r; 

-  •-" 

Q 

V/J 

^- 

r3 

<— 

g 

G 

0 

u 

eserv 

0) 

tc 

a> 

s 

tn 
C 

j 

2 

a 

| 

e8 

•-z 

0 

p. 

l! 

0    re 

0) 

** 

— 

i 

M 

O 

.£ 

•a 

H 

tfl 

.£J 

1 

1/5     O 

2    bo 

4-J 

C 
U 
o 

•d 

(3 

ed 

u 

'C 

1 
O 

re 

S 

•d 

s 

0 

^ 

o 

& 

in 

_d 

to 

0 
O 

•c 
m 

>, 

rt 
ft 
^ 

B 

;= 

2-1 

S-0 

s-i    en 

£ 

•u 

(U 

.Q 

4) 

0 

a 

c 

c 
pj 

a5   o 

tn 

3 

n 

s 

^j 

"3 

XI 

4) 

rt  S 

in    ro 

JTS 

'G.'C 

>,^2 

9^ 
y  *j 

^    G 
•^    « 

JU 

o 

". 

.S  **-• 

"7. 

^3 
+J 

t) 

c 

T3 

<D     CL, 

u 
nt 

H 

— 
.  —  > 

02 

a 

>, 

"5 

•S 

^ 

!  ' 

apposing  1 
aks  away 

j,  turns  ir 

-C 
O 

a 

Q 

.£ 

n 

01 

•d 
c 

^posing  R- 

able  to  b: 
lind  LT  to 

j 
>    tr. 


Sr 


bO  3 

•2 


03  s  _j 
°  ^  .S 


sir  e  8^ 

o   <u   s   w   ^  iJ 

J-<      rC  "I      fV        *"* 


Sat!  .3      P  -13 

a)         re  •-  *5        .s    a: 

^o  o     ^  4_j  *^     Ca 


S-.O 


/    i 


00  O  '"O 

-    V-'   OC  V^ 


>>   V 

C 

c  t 

a 

ID    O 

.C   J3 

1   rt 

s-g 

^3    cS 

2 
t-i 
0) 

1! 

c  S 
£,« 

-i->    -r. 

—    •*-> 

g  £ 
2  > 

O 

3 
u 

B     «> 

.5  _c 

-4-J     *""' 

3     <U 

"rt 

1 

M-l 

J     V 

o5 

a  P 
S>  a 

0)   T3 

w    G 

8-1 

•*  « 

0)  "* 

•°  JJ 

rt 

0   J= 

O 

•-,   m 

T! 

§d 

3  S 

•*•• 

_i    +J 

•d 

S   0 

-4-J 

^  ? 

*O 

c 
rt 

| 

r3       K~J 

*^ 

—       "-- 

fa  ? 

<D 
U 

•3 

a 

5    3 

^§2 

T3     0) 

bC  "§5 

.2  'S 
-d  £ 

8 

E 

"3  i* 

•°  1 
S  a 

V 

0) 

^-*   *^ 

C   o 

rt 

A 

•a 

'•7 

•^ 

(-1 

C     >-> 

<fH       l-c 

ifi 

t.,6 

u 

8 

-w'  "** 

U5 

ol  73 

C  '5 

«  5 

rt 

P. 
_g 

2-S 

«  S 

D 
^3 

S  "§> 

cS  -J3 

te    0 

0     « 

•f  .;2 

w 

ju 

*« 

.2  2 

•C    r, 

W 

O 

^~ 

*^~^    .^ 

(_4 

b/)     i 

C/J            pH 

G" 

•^  3 

<U 

cX 

^ 

^"   "^ 

cS 

^  'cS 

«5 

rt 

C    m 

g 

-» 

T^ 

o    v 

T3 

'S      rO 

rt    c 

^ 

3 

te 

i8.  Tackle  between  the  opposi 

To  send  LT  between  RG  and  RT,  there  is  no  chj 

3 

<3 
5 
| 

c 

"v: 

SI 

r2 
E 

— 
w 

RH  is  nearer  the  opening  and  should  pass  thr 
hind  him,  but  both  must  take  great  care  that  th 

t  stopped  so  that  they  choke  up  the  opening,  an 
ance  than  help  to  the  runner. 
LT  leaves  the  line  as  shown  in  the  preceding 
j  between  RH  and  FB,  with  head  down  and  the 

m,  or  clasped  at  the  stomach  with  both  hands.. 

RG  and  RT  play  as  shown  in  diagram  six. 

QB  and  LE  following  LT  immediately,  and  pust 
LH  also  follows  f  directly  behind  LT  to  throw 

M 

o 

CJ 

4) 

0> 

rt' 

o 

ja 

0 

tn 

1 

t/3 

tn 

rt 

f 

*  When  RT  runs  he  will  carry  the  ball  in  the  left  arm. 
e  farther  from  the  opponents  where  it  will  be  less  lia' 

a  toward  the  opposing  tacklers  free  for  use  in  warding  c 
t  See  NOTE,  diagram  seventeen. 

o 

J3 

c  -S 

Mf 

_g 

rt 

5 

2 

a 

S 

o 


opposite  tackle  and  end. 

,H         « 

o  5 

«  J 
S  5 

c4    ^ 

13 

3  3 

.S  6 

c  .52 
o 

!ji 

CS   ,0 

c8    ^ 
^  n 
=  ^ 

ta  "o3 
*   u 

H3     <D 
§5 

^ 

% 

fl 
S 

'ar  as  possible  to  the  left. 
:>r  takes  the  opposing  LT  in  case  he  succeeds 

am  seventeen  and  carrying  the  ball  in  his 
fteen. 
opposing  tackle,  if  necessary,  or  follows  LT 

revent  him  from  being  tackled  from  behind 

'C 

3 

(U 

-x 

c 

;  flank  of  the  line,  the  rushers  on  that  side 
ake  the  play  successful.  When  the  play  is 
in  turn  block  with  their  utmost  power. 

0 

_     0> 

<^* 

*T* 

K 

«C  <u 

M4 

n 

5  P 

^; 

Tackle  between  th 

«•§ 

I  ; 

*  S 

U     0) 

*i 

c  .S 

3 

£  £> 

c«   *j 

U    I" 

D   *O 

8 

1 
TJ 

3 

rt 

C 
0) 

.  6 

It 

£  T3 

.2! 

tiis  man  and  forces  him  as 

;  shown  in  diagram  eight 
ough  the  line. 

f 

d 

c 

CO 

a 

9 

O 

iys  as  does  LE  in  diagram 
nto  the  line  and  blocks  th 

own  in  diagram  seven, 
close  in  the  rear  f  of  LT  to 

m  by  interference  as  he  r< 

all  plays  around  the  rig 
their  energy  in  order  to  1 

rushers  upon  that  side  wi 

iagram  eighteen, 
iagram  seventeen. 

<> 

M 

•£  « 

'C    1" 

§  § 

U3    ••"> 

:ra  man 
and  RG 

M 

U 

C 

2 

en  *-• 

r. 

p 

rt 

TO  -T-l 

"Pn  £ 

„    D< 

E  6 

S.E, 

•a  | 

S  J2 

^<s 

IS 

4J 

'£ 
'7. 

rt 

C    0) 

~! 

d| 

4> 

A 
•M 

<t£ 

ri 

•o  -a 

faT  w" 

H  H 
0  0 
fc  ^ 

,0    « 

S  S 

u)    I  1 

5 

3-     c3 

,5 

*  w 

^S    K 

_o 

£  S 

0) 

(U  v 

tfl 

. 

^ 

^•Q 

TJ 

r^ 

«5 

+3 

*  -t- 

N 

.2 

'C 

a 

S 

2 

0 

117 


•o 

G 
0) 

g 

rt 

'7. 

B, 

0) 

E 
o 

c/. 

a 

'7. 

c 

I 

c 

0 

a5 

^ 
•d 

~ 

g  almost  directly  behind 
end-rusher  if  necessary, 
down  the  field. 

iking  the  direction  indi- 

js  LE  in  diagram  sixteen. 

in  and  take  LT'S  man,  as 
he  rounds  the  end. 

OJ 

•M 
"55 

0 

.£ 

p 

.1 

.£ 

C    be  C 

HE 

-o  £•'£ 

4-S 

»d 

c 
3 

j: 

M 
C3 

Cfl 

"    en 
0,d 

e  s 
•£,£ 

a 

ex 
o 

o 

JG 
-M 

is  no  chang 

§ 

£ 

"5 

5 
s^ 

•d 
5 
•d 

to 

0 

p 

.2 

(-1 
O 

^   §/c 

Hi 

^-^  ^ 
--3  -_>  u 

goo 

rQ      -T      S-l 

seventeen, 

,2 

•d 
§ 
•d 

CD 

-2 

n 

2  U5 

a'i 

o  "H 

>,  5 

•a 

G 

O 

u 
as 

JJ 

H 
d 

CM 

around  the  right  end,  there  : 

2 
n 

-d 

0) 

o 

1 
ed 

p 

X 

0 
rt 

3 

o 
8 

0) 

eft  exposed,  bowls  him  over, 

rts  with  the  snapping  of  the 
tly  outside  of  him,  helping  t 
3  on  ahead  of  LT  to  interfere 

i 

0) 

5 

g 
g 

c 

to 

3  shown  in  diagram  nineteen 

5 

E>. 
n 

^ 
_g 

d 
1 

•s 

to 

c^ 

o 

.E 

C9 

^ 

the  right  end  at  utmost  spec 

play  as  shown  in  diagram  ni 
RG  block  their  men. 

may  be  necessary  in  this  pla 
ne  ;  otherwise  he  may  follow 

H 

" 

^-* 

•  —  ' 

C3      rC        CD 

CO 

w 

05 

w  *& 

^•-j 

••> 

to 

^ 

en 

^ 

+•*    M  35 

i«  .2r  t/i 

to 

M 

tu 

_o 

-<  c 

*—  '    o) 

"C 

E 

tt 

cp 

0 

O  In    ^ 

>• 

-^ 

o 

(H 

-d   rt 

1    £ 

S 

:: 

J^ 

^ 

J5    w    ft 

»2 

K 

'3 

^   c_T 

K 

•j-_ 

CO 

{A 

o3     CD     C 

^ 

^( 

,  —  i 

p 

cu 

H      4) 

O 

U 

— 

2 

c/;    CD 

^  X 

H 

m 

H 

V 

a  o 

0     > 

e 

P4 

« 

o 

^    S  ? 

^ 

O) 

J 

| 

"ri 

J  J 

z    ^ 
3 

CD 

;o 


.o 


119 


u 

•M 

C 

0 

•a 

c 

aJ 

•a 

- 

rt 
3 
bO 

'55 
o 

he  instant  the  ball  is  snapped  LG  jumps 
from  the  opposing  guard.  He  whirls  di- 
e  ball  from  his  hands  as  he  passes,  plunges 
;  ball  held  as  shown  in  diagram  one. 

iS 
o 

.S 

be 

'S 

d> 

'S 
o 

3 

* 

i 

4) 

•^ 

£ 

rt 

.£ 

'i 

to 

1 

i^ 

•d 

S 
o 

(0 

X 
as 

'rt 

5 

5 

"o 
,5 

tt 

u 

"S 

•y. 

tpped,  dash  into  the  opening  ahead  of  LG, 

0. 

•** 

^, 

•C     ,-i 

d)    *^fj 

c 

C5 

•J 

'r* 

a 

0 

c 

OJ 

o 

3 
o 

rt' 
rt 

bfl 

c 

I 

,  receiving 
.  RG,  with  t 

diagram  fi 
start  instai 

^ 

£ 

J2 

o 
p 

^ 

H] 

-d 

.£ 

'o 

^ 
>, 

S 

1 

i/. 

7. 
•2 

"rt 
rfJ 

o 

a5 

-u 
X5 

•a 

u 

rt 

3 

.G  between 

£ 

.0 

o" 

^E 

0) 

A 

a  pivot  and, 
tween  c  and 

1- 

0     ^ 
^5   TJ 
1/2   1 
e§ 

•  ~ 

•d 
a 
3 

u 

pc 

immediatel 

k  their  men. 

"c 

line  before  t 

;  in  diagram 

O 

0 

M 

| 

e§  ^ 

>,  s 

4> 

g 

u 

c 

rt 

0 

fe 

bp 

•jE 

SH 

=    be 
z'  a 

"a*  K" 

to 

^ 

3 
^ 

C 

tn 
0> 
O 

2 

•5 

M 

i^ 

r*5     b 

•  ^ 

,^ 

>—  I 

0 

T) 

rjr 

N 

i 

"-Z 
rt 
,3 

c   w 

3     DH 

•i  s" 

'C 
O 

Q 

"rt 

•d 
5 

1 

H 

'rt 

'-> 
•z 

tn 

d 

o 
55 

o 

J= 

^    ^ 

cS    dj 

a 

(« 

0 

'^_ 

rt 

$ 

;— 

M 

^•5 

CJ  &, 

t/J 

d 

J 

^ 

*j 

cu 

09 

'I 

*3    o 

o  i! 

CO 

u 

.SD'C 

jf 

en 

t-i  -S 

'in 

oj 

po  . 

o' 


o   c              oc  ./  ~ 

t/1                                      C     C 

o                      «  .a 

"*"*      tn                      *r^      CH  !5 

a 

"*""*    **^                 '       C)               OJ 

OH                                           1>      bfl 

8  ^         g<|j  -^ 

°            a  .s 

^ 

«  !«     js  »  I 

5            d        g  .2 

—  i      PL,  <U                 :£    s-.    C 

2          ^           «S 

$    .22    *              |    «  | 

.S          -Si      .9  .«s 

+»  "2  >      -S  ^  * 

(5           '5         0  o 

TI    :                    SP^  -^ 

\S        (,  •      rj                        C     *J     -*-* 

rt                   5            -S     > 

22.  Guard  between  the  opposite  guard  an 

To  send  the  LG  around  between  RG  and  RT,  LG  breaks  away  fr 
;tant  the  ball  is  snapped,  as  shown  in  diagram  twenty-one,  re 
as  before,  and  dashes  into  the  opening  with  head  down. 
RG  and  RT  play  as  shown  in  diagram  six. 
RH  starts  forward  the  instant  the  ball  is  snapped  and,  dashi 
tween  RC;  and  RT,  strikes  the  opposing  LG  with  his  shoulder  wi 
>le  force  as  he  passes  through,  and  then  proceeds  on  and  takes 

e  line. 
FB  crosses  behind  RH  and  rushing  into  the  same  opening  plui 
5  tackle  or  the  man  immediately  behind  him. 
RK  plays  as  shown  in  diagram  fourteen. 
QB,  LH,  and  LE  follow  behind  LG  and  play  as  shown  in  diagra: 
LT  plays  as  in  the  preceding  diagram. 
NOTE.—  Rn  and  FB  must  see  to  it  that  they  break  through  1 
ere  blocked  so  that  they  fill  up  the  opening  through  which  LG,  \ 
ediately  behind,  is  to  pass. 

o; 


:0 


123 


oj 

1 

•3 

.    c 

•g    G 

C     > 

<u    o 

»o  *S 

G    * 
rt    c 

0) 

0)  .S 

3  U 

U     X! 

rt   ~ 

•»•»       «! 
0) 

<u    > 

.t!  S 

w  —  ' 
o    c 
a  ~ 
o.  „- 

3 

B,  plays  as  does  LE  in  diagram  fifteen, 
sid  at  utmost  speed  the  instant  the  ball  is  put 
ig  LE,  forces  him  out  or  bowls  him  over, 
ated,  and  passing  outside  of  RT  interfere  by 

5 

V 

a> 

ts 

c 

a 
o 

i* 

11 

a-* 

^   2 

o  *^ 

*N» 

l| 

>»! 

[«  ^ 

«  »  S 
<u    o  .2 

5  S  to 

tC     ^S     j-. 

•N-H          •-           Q 

S 
1 

S 
2 

c 

a. 
3 

'rt 
ca 

,2 

0) 

6 

a> 
1 

s 

c 

0) 

y 

y 

O 

G  0 

o 

*j   •*-• 

43 

4J 

(3 
<u 

0) 

-^ 

'7: 

£ 
1 

4J 

T/; 

11 

cx  5 
a, 

O  (/! 

^^  <U 
D  .-i 

£ 
* 

s 

& 

-3 

as 

(A      <U 

c  -d 
2  o 

IH 
O 
IH 
c4 

1 

<u 

1 

1 

fO 

6 

6  •-§ 

(-1  O 

£ 

z 

.£ 

13  "* 

Ol 

o 
&, 

•M 

4) 

•5 

.! 

££ 

% 

| 

<u 

<D   _g 

D  »d 
^    G 

§• 

c 

3 

O 

•d 

C 

0 
ft 

3 

(9 

i  receiving 

s 

i. 

r^ 

s  -S 

o 

2.S 

opponents 

c 

Ifl 
to 

03 
>> 

d 
p, 

*  J3 

s^s 

rt   -0 
^S 

a  '-^ 
•H    o> 

^^ 

I! 

.^    G 

1 

,  diagram  se\ 

CO 

H) 

-^ 

i 

a 

^ 

o 
a 

H 

IH  ~ 

(5  *g 

4-> 

;/. 

tS 

4) 

^r 

H 
ttt 

-2 

5 

be 

.s  s 

|2 

ence. 

follows 
vertake 

o 
-d 

ee  NOTE 

£ 

& 

>,    — 

,2  ^ 

U 

5 

X      V> 

al 

IH 

0 

t 

W    O    E-1 

>J  bOi-9 

OT 

* 

K 

P< 

'fl 

t3 

.S 

j; 

.G 

"5 

V 

w 

5 

0) 

125 


i 


127 


129 


•o 

c: 

V 

•4-1 

G     0 
'«* 

11 

•s  s 

a  ^3 
"   8 

.s 
§ 

§ 

tn 

ving  the  ball 
ost  speed. 

1* 

-S  e 

tn  .S 

-  A 

P 

G    a) 

O    C 

nj 

§ 

i 

s 

8 

tn 
IS 

O 

M-l 
1 

3 

k 

"S 
» 

3 

2 

1 
o 

<D 

C 

jj-a 

*  *6 

OJ 

c§ 

'S  6 
83 

C     0) 

.«  «« 

.2   M 

0) 

G 

05 
£° 

'5 
^ 
o 

1 

3 

O    V 

OH 

»-"  ^ 

IS   "e 

•w 

G 
.(-t 

0) 

* 

o 

•*-*  OH 

• 

G    ** 

*3  .a 

„ 

p 

c 

H 
j 

u 
rt 

i-3    p 

3 

o-g 

'-W      G 

G 

a 

n 

<u 

cS 
g 

7J 

bO 

'tn 

0) 

G    cfl 

s 

_E 

^ 

_G 

rt 

2-" 

1 

G   £ 

3  2 

3-  S 

tn 

3 

g 

•M 

_g 

1 

3. 

^ 

n 

D 

^    0) 

S 

rH 

0^ 

"•**  >   C3 

t/5 

g  .e 

nj    'O 

~^ 

V-* 

^ 

g 

5 

^ 

C 

* 

Cj      *Q 

P-t    6} 

3 

^  8 

k"' 

.   ^0 

2 

fl 

S 

O 

AJ 

Q  'H 

o   £J 

V 

S  3 

^ 

.    G 

^_) 

^Jj 

Jsd 
u 
rt 
X> 

13 

J3 

OH    Oj 
c3  ftf 

carrying  it  a 

^  8 

**"*    tn 
G    " 

a  I 

.     rr-t 

•g    0. 

^3 

0    |_ 
K     0) 

•e'S 
S  ° 
.  c 

sa"  "^ 

e  greatest  en 

;he  opposing  i 
helping  LH 

a 
g 

'O  tG 
G°^ 

"          •— 

tn  twenty-five 
to  protect  hii 

;y. 

"rt 
-P 

1 

iss-crosses  with 

ii 

ii 

1 
X* 
"rt 

"3    . 

0)    5 

"4J   H 

bO  ^S 

•2  .S 

ill  in  his  position  until 
opposite  direction  anc 

ves  the  ball,  FB,  LH,  Q 
,  dart  for  the  left  end, 

.ock  their  men  with  th 

rectly  for  and  blocks  1 
e  direction  indicated, 
down  the  field. 

-—  !               C 

»d  <i> 

§^ 

^i 

•S  & 

-M      C] 

fl? 

"-1     C 

I'i 

-s  ?? 

tn    i> 

s  as  does  LT  in  diagra: 
nmediately  behind  RH 

3 
w 

0) 

•d 

p 

PH 

?J' 
g 

tn 

OJ 

y 

.a 

_G 

G 
.2 

g;ram  twenty-five. 

u, 
u 

C 

U] 

send  the 
from  his 

'S   rf 

r-*      O 

in    <l> 

tn  5 
|    G 

In    o 

RH  recei 
positions 

.0 

o 
K) 

-^ 
5 

makes  di 
takes  th 
oceeds  on 

a| 

J3  ^ 

t^.S 
£    tn 

PH    & 

o  £ 

vi  £3 

"73    O 

Cy    <4-i 

S 
w 

H 

§\" 

D     O 

0)   tj> 

5  Jo 

rt 
'^ 

tiT 
f-i 
O 
X 

o 

££• 

H-a 

M       ** 

0)    v. 

3j 

tn  .« 
<J| 

5 

s  M  k 

i  rv.    ^ 
M    G 

<D 

—  • 

H      (4 
tf    « 

O 

G    cS 

9 

a 
O2 

* 

N 

1 

T?^ 

5 

G 

1 

s 

Cj     On 

o 


J31 


*o  ja 

G  -^ 

QJ  Q} 

D  .§ 

5  u 

•o  "*"* 

r3  « 

C  o> 

O  g 

IH  i— i 

rt  u 


I      H    fl 

"5.  *  'Z 

c  u 


all 
de 


m 

a 

>> 

.Q  '3 

00 

42 

u   ^ 

a" 

5 

"S. 

fH 

21 

•^ 

_g 

V 

a  ° 

a 

^3 

c8    ^) 

V 

o 

.a 

-M 

T3 
§ 

§5 

•~  a 

0)     O 

tU 

0) 

«3 

tn 

f 

^ 
^2 
0) 
5 

642 

•e  S 

-2-  a 

S-a 

H 
M 

S 

tfl 

D 

la 

>» 

'53 

s  a 

^Q 

/~i 

y 

o> 

*     -M 

TJ 
C 

V 

c 
o 

ives  the  line  as  the 

K 
M 

<M 
O 

•v» 
S 
Q 

^ 
,G 

8 

0 

1 

O 

^! 

O 
M 

M 

T3 

C 

0> 

£ 

£ 

4) 
.g 

:es  him  in. 

0) 

0) 

.8 

c3 

o 

O 

o 

bd 

.5 
'7. 

c 

1 

1 
— 
o 

v      Ctf 

•a  H 

*3. 

o 

| 

p 

rH 

&i 
1 
o 

•s 

O 
M 

•d 

§ 

c' 
3 

VH 
5 

O 

B 

twenty- 
e  inside 

JA 
U 

oj 

5 

1 
et 

W 

5 
oT 
§ 

-./: 
o 

i 
+j 

^ 

«" 
fa 

1 
1 

bowls  hi 

diagram 
takes  th 

"(3 

c 

-M1 

5 

13 

0> 

^ 

.a  8 

X! 

^ 

» 

G 

o 

.s 

ot 

—  *—  i 

jj 

3 

i 

(A 

0 

H 

o 

4-J 

.  « 

4) 

~     cd 

'5 

CO 

^ 

c 

rj 
& 

^' 

M 

| 

ceives 

SB 
M 

M-l 

O 

V, 

'•A 

O 

1.1 

.      tt 

V 
(O 
CS) 

o 

•d 

G 

^ 

.s 

1 
G 
in 

-j 

g 

X 
K 

8 

G 

a 

4> 

o3    f)| 

P*  o 

Ui 
U 

| 

G 
g 

O 

•J 

4J 

03 

> 

^ 

5 

f 

j     O 

"]  £ 

(/) 
.2 

t; 

O 

'x 

n 
9 

a) 

6 

•s 

4-> 

_G 

'^ 

G   ^ 
rt    c> 

-  o 

U 

•o 

Ui 

nl 

O 

^ 

•d 
o 

6H 

.  is  snapped,  as 

"3 

,0 
0> 

^ 

1 

bo 

G 

to 

a 

exposed. 
At  the  momen 

lines  indicated 

FB  runs  direct! 

0"° 

c  5 

•^     t/5 

H"  13 

06 

-z: 

^> 

& 

§ 

N 

^ 

tc 

£ 

S3 

«35 

i 

„ 

g 

bo 

fl  j_; 

<u  .-. 

00 

o 

a 

""• 

_c 

cfl      Q} 

fl  •?•* 

a 

3 

S 

S    "r< 

^5    00 

•^ 

a 

o 

[/I 

Tj 

§ 

'-J    CS 

eij 

0 

7^ 

*3 

_2 

to    u 

£    ° 

•—  1 

& 

1 

bo 
.S 

«  -j 

a)  +j 

fl    bo 

.2 

1 

^j 

X 

•ti 

WA     M 

*7~?      t. 

cd  _o 

c 

r» 

*d 

c 

2 

* 

JS 

,0 

*d 

c 

aj  *d 

5  S 

•4 

•om  RH,  LE  draws  slightly  in  an 

*z 
o 
ft 

& 

a 

•r. 
u: 

^ 
5 
O 

•B 
o 

n  play,  receives  it  at  x,  and  pa 
ushes  directly  into  the  opposing 
•  the  right  end  in  the  line  indie; 

to  protect  him  from  behind. 

help  RT  block  his  man,  or  take 
rush  line  and  force  him  in  towa 

in  diagram  twenty-five. 
RH  and  take  the  first  extra  m 
t  away  with  the  ball  without  1 

aJ    2 

l| 

^    u 
0)   ^ 

js  o 

i^> 

S-c 

&  <u 

c3   ^j 
13    fl 

3  o 

g  J 
o  ^ 

.C   -fl 

e 

IS 

is  LH  in  note  on  diagram  twent 

,lf-back  criss-crosses  witt 
site 

:nd  LE  around  the  RE  on  a  pass  fi 

a  line  with  the  half-backs,  befor 

ashes  forward  as  the  ball  is  put  i 

LE  gives  him  the  ball,  and  then  r 
aving  received  the  ball,  starts  foi 
•  to  his  speed,  as  there  is  no  one 

ay  either  jump  into  the  line  and 
s  through  on  the  right  side  of  the 

G,  LG,  LT,  and  FB  play  as  shown 

y  be  necessary  for  QB  to  precede 
t  end,  in  order  to  allow  LE  to  ge 

nd.  Otherwise  he  will  play  as  s 
5e  a  man  comes  through  the  rus! 

0 

3 

Q 
-P 

oo 

-u" 
y 
0) 

.  FB  may  precede  RH  and  play  ; 

eg 

V 

s 

^ 

J3, 

-j 

H     V 

ft 

CO    M-) 

lc    rt 

^ 

eg 

«*-" 

H 

HH 

O 

^ 

o  w- 

*^~! 

M     § 

LH 

K   •"""* 

X 

1^ 

O 

>« 

X 

O 
•^ 

*    % 

c4 

-u    <0 

1-1  •£ 

^    C 

C 

£ 

y 

r 

_c 

~a 

a 

0 

1 

w 

'37 


;  end  in  play  around  the  oppo- 

ss  from  FB,  RE  works  slightly  in  and  on 
d,  while  FB  moves  a  little  to  the  left  to 

0) 

'>     . 
'S 

X 

.5? 

D 
1 

rt 

o 

SJ 

_g 

rt 

<u 
tn 

4) 

+j 

to 
15 

^d 
rt 
-P 

jives  the  ball  as  he  passes, 
in  the  opposite  direction  and  encircles 

> 

-t-> 
^ 

<L> 
It 

.2 

l 

igh  the  line  to  the  left  of  center,  QB 
y  as  in  diagram  twenty-eight. 

f+  ^^ 

rt 

cl) 

•*-* 

(H 

w. 

i 

c 

1) 

+J 

o   S 

5    C 

•^  <u 

•  -.   j_> 

P 
<d 

rt 

c 

'  a, 

rt 
en 

1 

•d 

» 

C 

w" 

bo 

4) 

S 

C 

rt 
ti? 

1 

^ 

> 

tC 

_>, 

"c 

-a 

'? 
>> 

.S^ 

~  % 
$Z 

•S3 

hi 

s 

c/; 

4) 

.~  >-, 

^  'S3 

CO 

0) 

13 
rt 

h-1 

'x 

O 

£ 
C-, 

o 

O 

instant 

B] 

rt 
J? 

«J 

•a 

2 

§ 

-M 

s 

^    <u 
rt  ^3 

S     0 

&  ^ 

CO 

o 
u 

4) 

a> 

^ 

4) 

fl 

o 

« 

^ 
ti 

1 

1 

M 

.s  '^ 

en     D 

CJ 

^ 

C 

Q 

•jS 

^ 

•V, 

^ 

^ 

*S 

.2     r^j 

"S   ^ 

(A 

<2 

0 

8 

rt 

o 

9) 

Ed 

_~ 

'd   t-i 

.« 

•O 

a 

s 

. 

"1 

X' 

•^ 

o 

^ 

to 

r^ 

H 

tn    C 

Id 

O 

p 

°r  1 

p 

Q 

H 

-*-> 

en 

O 

to 

rt    rt 

r^H 

Jd 

u 

rt 

3 
b 

M 

ai 

S 

4) 
(0 

b 

EH 

"rt 

SB" 

1 

a> 

CD    rt 
-£    en 

^  1 

0 
_!-. 

to 

c 

(5 

e  FB  runs  close  : 

Upon  receiving 

.eft  end  at  utmc 

O 

0 

rt 
O 

RT  plays  as  doe 

LE  and  LT  play 
LG  blocks  his  m 

In  case  anyone 
ediately  blocks 

_ 

c 

rt 

T^ 

o 

"^  "2: 

g 

U: 

0 

CO 

n»    U, 

o 

? 

•5 

.§ 

139 


» 

T; 

« 

l 

t^^ 

p 

? 

n 
3 

1 

S, 

1" 

-4-J 

ta 

,G 

a 

c^ 

P 

.bvj 

be 

Pi 

r^ 

o 

S 

12 

.S 

• 

J5 

O 

u 

*3 

G 

'o 

H) 

1 

5 

§ 

c 
U 

•o 

G 

1' 

^ 

•s 

T; 
_g 

1 

b 

S 
43 

0) 

•"* 

a 

L. 

oa 

•^J 

u 

•t? 

•J3 

X 

<; 

V 

G 

CJ 

.    G 

S 

OJ 

'  0 

•r! 

^ 

.2 

u 

>    o 

1 

•** 

a 
PS 

1 

rt 

1 

i 

1 

-3 

1| 

09 

ti 

*O 

r^-j 

,2 

ff 

c 

C 

c 

"^ 

2 

G 

£ 

<« 

s 

"o 

s 

<U     O 

S 

3 
0 

1 
CO 

(/) 

2 

u 

CO 

.2 
"C 
u 

CO 

•o 

G 

Ul 

around  the  right  end  on  a  pass  from  RE,  LE  a 

back  until  he  is  nearly  on  a  line  with  the  hal 

start  toward  the  left  the  instant  the  ball  is  s 

r3 

"o 

0 

1 

>> 

o 

r2 

4> 

_g 

O 

5 

•S 

G 

3 

S 

rt 

-Jj 

S 

5  the  ball  at  x  on  a  pass  from  QB,  and  running 
d  rushes  on  into  the  opposing  RE. 

4~> 

-a 

'C 
o» 

5 

^ 
c 

rt 

1 

| 

q 

1 

fe 
w" 

w 

o 

ic  first  extra  man  in  the  line  beyond  RT,  LH 

preceding  LE,  plays  as  shown  in  diagram  tw 
the  first  man  through  on  the  right  hand  side 

wn  in  diagram  twenty-five, 
eceiving  the  ball,  starts  toward  the  right  at  u1 

LG. 

d  RT  play  as  shown  in  diagram  twenty-five. 

M 

_! 

I-H 

3 

to 

(H 

4> 

D 

3 

1 

o 

tn 

O    to 

O      IH 

-s  § 

<s  § 

CO 

T) 

3 

ffi 

c 

1 

"o 

'3 

8 

| 

in 

a 

9) 

^ 

'c  ^ 

i  1 

a)   c5 

S 

H 

ctf 

•G 

c 

P< 

rt   >Q 

W3 

'55 

o 

Hi 

(V   &>p4 

Q) 

6 

[fl 

PQ 

-    CO 

S  OJ 

^\  td 

§  J 

rp 

12 

S 

bO 

"a 

<u 

*> 

a 

?• 

c 

t 

5 

141 


1                H 

o       * 

%     * 
o       | 

0 

JS            to 

G             rt 
3          ^ 
0           « 

rt        *" 

1       1 

•s     a 

*O 

G      .    o 

2  8  i 

**  «  ? 

•°  •-  2 
.t;  «  § 

&      * 

»5 
f-i  (—1 

o"    . 

1  s 

0    3 

su    rt 
>    ft 

8  .3 

a  to 

oj    TO 

11 

10     0) 

.a  ^ 

c  a 
^a 

2  to 

•i  ^ 

1  s 

«   w" 

^3    a! 

^  ti 
to    O 

(!)    ^_, 

>  a 

TO      O 

a>   fc. 

0 

i 

e 
2 

I 
.g 

" 

P4 

M 

g 

i 
? 
& 

G 

| 
•M 

'to 
fl 

! 

i£ 
fes 

S  "^ 

i  twenty-nine.* 
ps  in  and  takes  the  opposing  tackle  as  in  diagram 

thirty, 
indicated  as  RE  receives  the  ball,  and  precedes  him 
nt  of  RG  as  the  latter  swings  in  behind  the  line. 

(A 

m 

§ 

'i 

H   fl 

'C! 
Oj 

S 
i 

-s  a 

fl    cd 

S  S 

S     <D 
TO    c 

1 

? 

•CTOSS< 

« 

M 
p 

^ 

3 

i-)  ""• 

>>.  ® 

^  to 

03     o 

"ft  'o 
g   g 

2 

(0 

^' 
"ft 

& 
cd 

•9 

_c 

^  '" 
o 

•S.S 

•fH         ^ 

c   cT 

bV-s 

TO      0> 

^36 

.a  .'a 

_g 

bO 
_g 

'so 

to 

<c 
>> 

c 
o 
> 

(0 

.52 

c 

^ 

X' 

•  rH       C 

^  s 

'so 

Q 

s 

t 

3  g 

«  a 

I? 

2 

o 

+j 

8 

'C 

U 
JU 

3 

o 

TO 
H 

5 

.bo 
w 

•d 

OH    J" 

.2  ^ 

^-.    aS 

13  :=) 

J2     rt 

1 

o 

£ 

5 

aJ 
•a 

o 

0 
CO 

05 

1 

to 

>.   0 

c8   J3 
^s    to 
ft  to 
H    c3 
«    to 

s  as  doe 
eaves  tl 

O     TO 
^3     g 
tn    i-, 

^§- 
to  JS 

-3 

d 

CD 

«*-! 

T^ 

S 
| 
•3 

u* 

0 

rt 

h 

1 

O 
H 

q 
3 

.G 
W 

-X 

V* 

-££ 

to  -^ 
<rl   M 

"S     <u 

(0 

2 

S 

o 
p 

>>  T3     ^> 

^3  c  ,2 

ft   «S    ft 

m   o   PJ 
fe  P^  a 

"ft  S  g 

U     to    ^ 

tf  <  a 

0) 

ts 

'ft  M 
0    W 

iJ  P4 

0) 
.g 

-d 

G 

*  See  NOT 

r^j 

G 

.j^ 

0 

Q 

PO 

V 

o 

•5 

ifl 

a} 

'43 


i 

0 

a 
a 
o 

*o 

e 
3 

2 
9 

•a 

c    . 
<u  -a 

2% 

| 

.a 

•d 
§ 

.S 
te 

I 

V 

W 
M 

O 
i-l 

£ 
c 
i-, 

«J-4 
CO 

i 

from  his  man  as  in  diagram  twenty-one,  re- 
RE  and  rushes  directly  into  the  opposing  LE. 
s  almost  reached  him,  receives  the  ball  from 

:ding  diagram, 
-eight. 
ir  positions  until  the  instant  that  RE  receives 
;  and  precede  RE  at  greatest  speed  to  inter- 

RH  follows  KB  and  assists  him  to  block  the 
e  end  and  takes  the  first  free  opponent, 
id  plays  as  shown  in  diagram  twenty-six, 
agram  thirty-two. 

-M      (U 
_    -4J 

& 

ri 

>> 
d 

(H 

O 

^ 

o> 

rt 

j= 

*S 

H 

a 

rt  '-3 

criss-crosses  with 
si 

E  around  the  left  end  on 

1  is  snapped  LG  breaks  aw 

II 

•  S     jj 
0)     ^. 
•J]     G 
jD     O 

"o  '-5 

tn    55 

D     O 
t«     ft 
tn 
ca    « 
ftS 
x"  .d 

ts  <5 

~= 

_G 
j?' 

H 

is  shown  in  diagram  twei 

d  KB  remain  standing  in  t 

e« 

! 
^ 

ra 

c4 

'd 

S 
.g 

>, 

« 
bo 

G 

1 

ft 
ft 
C 

O 

6 

IH 

•3 

j;, 

O 

D 
U 

•y  or  continues  on  around 

the  line  as  LG  reaches  RE 
ler  men  play  as  shown  in 

•a 

IN 

id 

S 

O 

•d 
G 
u 
to 

o 

3 

^ 

ID 

a 
.  f> 

-»< 

es  the  ball 

RE  remair 

w 

a 

a 

- 

0) 

a 

tn 

§^     . 

s-e  a 

3    .  2 

a|<2 

•d 

(0 

5 

Ei 
£ 

if  necessai 

v.  £5 

g»  ° 

™  S 
^  "S 

O  ^3 
P4  <J 

s 

K 

O 

u 

09 

«  2 

£    <*H 

^ 

0) 

10 


'45 


?! 


rifl 

IB 

•J. 

3 

f, 

E 

(H 

_c 

09 

O 

^ 

C 

(3 

H 

TO 

1 

in 

i~H 

i 

"E/I 

> 

C 

M 

ackle  criss-crosses  with  t 

P*T3 

«  § 

§g 

-0    « 
«  "§3 

<£!  °5 
ju   g 

<0     pJ 

6  &> 

•§3 

§.a 

13  a 

E-    g 
«  j= 

T3    w 

reaches  the  line  RT  jumps  sudden 

0 
^ 

_c 
_c 
>, 

1 

^ 

§ 

(fl 

0 

.c 
t/; 

g 

a 

^0 

1 

cx> 

O 

0) 
^3 

-M 
^bd 

o 

^O 

3 

a 

13 
^5 

T3 

a 

as 
£ 

WJ 

a. 
g 

a 

^0 

H! 

•y: 

rt 

o 

? 
_2 

bvj 
c 
'£ 

1 
§^ 
O 

^ 

09 
1 

1 

H 

M 

n 
D 

cfl 

13 

3 
to 

X 
a; 

-O 

a 

:arts  back  in  the  opposite  directio 

3 

8 

5 

1 
_g 

cc 
u, 

T5 
C 

cS 

a" 
9 

i£  t3 

o-  c 

^i§ 

<0 

u 

I 

^ 

CO 

.s 

c 

a 

EH 

§ 

•a 

| 

s 
a 
a! 

round  the  end  of  the  line. 

h 

O    "~ 
o 

a 

E* 

•^ 

3 

tS 

r 

CO 

T   -0 

i 

a 

to 

to 

i-j 

?" 

'I~> 

r^ 

, 

^ 

^  G 

s 

a 

z 

>. 

M 

» 

a 

u 

k— 

Y^ 

^     0 

o 

^ 

v 

^ 

50 

^ 

•^ 

j 

d 

C    - 

^ 

^^" 

K^ 

•^ 

^^ 

•/, 

rH 

>""^ 

h-4 

rt 

0)   <*i 

SA 

8 

fO 

r1 

<f. 
a 

a 

x 

iJ  S 

ts 

H) 

5, 

U5 

C 

ri      2 

P 

N 


o 


.0-0  •: 


147 


as  pi  M  a 
.2^  ^ 

.  1  » -§  « 

r^    P-J±    C    > 


is     3 

!  5   .:  ^q  < 


'-£  5.5 


P  "  -/. 
•a  .2  & 


2 
<« 

& 


a 

o 

4-> 

-a 
c 
w 

6 
o 


«•«  .i 


rt 


!3*|g||lg.aSj| 

«•  , ,  ^  ^  n  ,g  rt  ^  °J  -J3  ra  c 


^d   <1J 


iiriSilBl 

a&i^s^^fi 

c314^^!! 

ISfl-gSjaa   a 
l«ylllt 


°«:>;ua  « 

rcj    ^    rt    W'5-2 

lo^cS-0 
"^fl^^ 

rt  TJ""    0)  _2    05 

Ss^^'ft! 

^  ^&c  M  *  °^  s  a  "-^^  s  c 

ll^-aa^ala-s-Slna 


a  o 

3   3 
o  c 
VH 


S 


85- 


Si  o 

•^  <u 
j->-° 

03  rt 


&§|fr 

^^•SU 

IS  si 


, 


uiH^nj^vjP.-ca^^rt 


-a 

rt 


sl 

ft  «  P 


I 


149 


•    s> 

C    c 
*d 

J3    o 

•M       C 
*O       ^ 

Se 

O      4) 

Gf 
g 

! 

4-1 

OS 
0) 

a 

11  is  snapped, 
forces  him  in. 
leld,  as  indicated,  to 

ut  slackening  speed, 

3 

g 
c 

to 

1 

3 

n  which  case  FB  will 
Id  to  interfere,  while 

(-, 

d) 

a 

0 

r^ 

•  i~" 

0)      (H 

t 

s 

cfl 

0> 

"£  a 
c  q 

£> 
D 

0     g 

«H       ^3 

£ 

H 

~ 

y3  J> 

fli    tn 

3. 
c 

u 
ni 
JQ 

1 
0 

U 

-l-> 

B 
o 

tn 

i 

5, 

2 
a 

c 

•s 

rt 
2 

2 
9 

I 

tion  in  the  primary  arrangement. 
11  is  snapped,  LT  leaves  the  line,  recei 

end,  precisely  as  shown  in  diagram  ni 
line  and  takes  LT'S  man  as  he  leaves  hi 

play  as  shown  in  diagram  eight. 

iown  in  diagram  eight. 
.  start  for  the  right  end  the  moment  th 

:>r  the  opposing  LE,  and  bowls  him  ove 
necessary,  and  then  cuts  in  down  t 

£ 

T3 

i 

o 

ft 

OS 
(w 

"3 
.d 
en 
C 
C 

2 

0) 

,C! 

tf 
G 
<U 

0) 

6 

•a 
a 

s 
o 

C 
i-i 

"<H 

•r! 

rt 
0 

oJ 

c 
o 

K 

Q 
1 

FB  passes  on  encircling  the  opposing  LI 

nay  be  made  with  equal  success  to  i 
his  man,  and  then  pass  on  down  th< 
rse  just  outside  of  the  opposing  end-ru 

Double  pass 

To  send  FB  around 

i  the  regular  forma 
The  instant  the  ba 

starts  for  the  right 
LE  jumps  into  the 

u 

1 
tt 

at 

bf 

e§    a" 

OH    ClJ 

1£~ 
«  a 

RH  runs  directly  f< 
LH  assists  RH,  if 

rfere. 
As  FB  is  about  to  r 

receives  the  ball  a' 

o 

1 

nd 
a 
V 
4) 

•5 

c 

NOTE.  The  pass  i 
st  RH  in  blocking 
swings  out  in  a  cou 

• 

fc 

T3 

5 

•d 

p 

'55   „ 

o 

Q 

c 

;/;  a 

co 

b 

a 

•S 

rf 

*M 

CS      —  • 

•o  -a 

c  p 

«  2 

V  rj 

5  "3 

-a  § 

a  m 

SB 


o.  S 


u 

as 

XJ 


rt 
O 

-a 
r3 


I       rj 

"c    rt 

II 


O 

D 


1  | 


•d 

c  <u 

3  S 

o  » 


-S    2  « 


D    tn 

^    iu    >    o 

8  SD  8  > 


cj      • 

a   g 


** 

^3 

S2 

£ 

03 

a> 

.  -d 

C3 

0    G 

0) 

J     U 

en 

II 

JH 

•ti 

a 

<«     ^ 

-   O 
«J     13 

CQ 

T3     0 

2  ~" 

b   ^ 

o3    aj 

>   o 


bfl  tn 

03    C 


S     o3  2    "^    jj 


II,  .a 

O  .rf  en 


I 

iiil 

^  u>  s  ^ 

o  ,a   °   o 

4-1     +J      M      03 
Oc  I-1     (-,   'O   ^ 

n-5-2  §« 

^  -^21 

G    'j    o    &i  5 

*^  a  a  a 


5 


Cj     rrt 

PH    0> 

^     Ci. 

g  " 

.    c/l 

11 
^§ 


•*s 

•a 


o 

I 

a 

fi»- 

15 

•s'1 

3-§ 
k*-8 


n  slight 
directly 


oi    c3 


Q  .2 


£  '»  -5 


> 

53      OH 

a 


s 


B    S      -   X 


•d  S 

c   - 


ll 

3^2 
«  « 


CO 


M 


«^J 

I 


^"Q 

§  •« 
£  ^ 
&  « 

2 

e 

3 

line. 
1  the  guards,  as 

oj 

0) 

_C 
tn 

X    i—  i 

o   § 

0)    +j 
Q      tfl 

OH    Oj 

%  z 

ackles  and  ends 
ccompanied  by 

0 

r. 

ut  across  in  the 
mid  it  be  found 

o 
"3 

0) 

C 
1 

0) 

> 

> 

_0 

c 

4_»     "KA 

t/) 

0)   ^j 

C 

-0   bo 

-i—  >      03 

0» 

0    Jji 

n 

r~ 

•»-H 

^  -§^ 

cS 
0> 
i-, 

% 

11 

_o 

<D   '1 

a  c^ 

S   J3 

-M     J3 

•5  S 

•3  ^ 

"w 
^ 

^  M 
£ 

b5     tn 

en 

CX 

S 

T3 

O 

e 

TJ 

15 

X5 
(D 

38.  Slow  mass  wedge  from  a  do 

slow  pushing  wedge  through  the  center  from  a 
s  in  the  wedge  formation,  as  shown  in  the  cut,  < 

mself  as  close  as  possible  to  c's  right,  directly 
firmly  against  c  on  the  left  and  slightly  back  fr 
ing  rushers  and  half-backs  take  their  positions 

imilar  manner  to  that  shown  in  diagram  forty-o 
ust  be  drilled  until  they  can  spring  into  their  ] 

The  ball  should  come  back  at  the  same  momen 
L  to  FB1,  and  the  whole  wedge  surge  forward  wil 

0) 

C 

c 
>, 

1 

s 

ay  be  repeated  several  times  for  short  gains  um 
side  are  drawn  well  in  to  mass  against  it,  whe 

S 

a 

3 

d 

•z 

14 

M 

c 
_c 

d 

I 

S 

£ 

<u 

^ 

S 
1 

-u 

2 
O 

_>, 
V 

-c 

•c 

" 

shown  in  the  diagram;  in  which  case  RII  and  R 
o  block  the  foremost  men  among  the  opponent 

g  backs  come  up  to  help  block  the  play  FB  may 
11  down  the  field. 

d 

2 
o 
^ 

I 
c 

"3 
o 

—i 

5 

•r. 
•r. 

pa 

x 

0) 

^ 
o 

2 
•S 

'i' 

"Sn 

0) 

6 

there  should  be  a  little  delay  in  snapping  th 
.m  more  time  to  draw  well  in  behind  the  center. 

To  send  the 
leir  position 

ja 

.1 

\>  o 

olds  himself 
The  remain 

«l 

c  g 

ll 

g  e 

instantly. 
has  come  ir 

£ 
rf 

This  play  m 
he  opposing 

ng  team,  as 
5  indicated  t 

the  opposin 
ind  punt  we 

a 

c 

w 
o 

^ 

tnd  the  end, 
opposing  tea 

•ij 
3 

SQ 

•2 

,G 
2 

-3 
.S 

a  2 

.2  "S 

'•*3    ? 

0 

£ 

c 

0 

» 

1  % 

p*t  *^* 

rt  "« 

O    fl> 

*"*  *^ 

C3      4-> 

to 
o-1 


88: 


:o 


:o 


...     , 


155 


, 

i       o 

J-<      t/3 

^  c5 

*  § 

J-0 

>  ^ 

-S 
- 

PH 

"5    °5 

W       Q> 

^     O 

<u    bo 

^3     o> 
-4->     r-! 

o 

T3    -• 
C3     C 
ci    0) 

§* 
•rt  +-1 

to  block 

blind  to 
i,  whom 

O 

o> 
1 

S 

6  '55 

2  &< 

H"  ^ 

c^  ^3 

O 

iJ-a 

1  s 

s 

1! 

VM 
UJ 

ci  £ 

jj"1-1 

1 

£ 

1 

^^ 

53  3 

^    5 

O     rQ 

w    tu 

.d 

ci    S 

p,     !-H 

J 

03   g 

cS 

-d" 

'So  Q) 

"S 

T3 
0) 
> 

bO 

.2 

.s 

G    % 
"~    a! 

_s 

J     ^ 

Q 

£   2 

"rt 
o 

o  4g 

'C 

5 

1 

(U 

bO 

§3 

o    O 

SCO 
K£ 

•f 

o-^ 

^ 

2^ 

Td 

1  2 

aj 
0) 

-S 

*^3 

r<      t/3 

3 

? 

en    « 

r-i 

O 

f.  H~* 

aS 

m 

1 

A3 

M    0 

W     O 

u     C 

<*-!       O 
D     '43 

o 

C 

rt    -2; 
o    M 

'O 

.2  .2 

0) 

.S 

..  ,13 

,13 

«3 

u 

05 
>, 

erf   -.S 

tD 

d)  (/j 

(ii 

<u 

a 

o 

/en  signal  j 
pact  format 

t  under  the 
t  demonstri 

bent  over 

O     C 

«  'S 

cj    4) 

O 

•d 

11 

D 

.2 
w 

bO  a! 
£  S 

.sS 
-M 

his  interfen 
nobserved. 

;  successful 

*o 

C 

'So  § 
m  y 

^3    oS 

tv: 

v>  _a> 
In    bo 

| 

^    ^ 

(H 

O     oJ 
t/3    "^ 

S 
o 

11 

0) 

1  £ 

-  § 
05 

4)  0) 

T3    p 

II 

TD 

o 

2 

4J 

a 

o 

u 
cd 

C 

g 

—  > 

.S 

in  the  line  is  formed  at  t 
:n  are  closely  drawn  into 

I 

o 

.5 

2 
!H 

'5 

0 

05 

y 

1 

nt  the  ball  is  snapped  QB 
r,  without  making  the  si 

and  stands  still  in  his  po 

D    -4-J 

G°§ 

•s  s 

&i   O 

bO^ 
•0  ^ 

g  g 

?  Xi 

^  « 

-^ 

2s 

"^  ^ 

?J   *3 

•osition  at  the  same  mom 

A,  swinging  in  a  long  ci 
osing  team  more  time  to 

a) 
d 

a 

_0) 

o 

tn  jj 

tn  rt 

a  S 
5  <U 

'5i  S 

>  have  the  ball.  When  F 
ted,  RE  darts  out  to  the  r 

is  play  can  be  worked 
for  several  downs. 

£ 

d)      O< 

bo  0 
•g  J 

0)   ^ 

^ 
S 

D    J-? 
O    ->-> 

a  '3 

M      O"^ 

_S 

0)    § 

"5   "55 

I-M 

-j 

d    & 

lr 

?  -s 

</3 

a. 

'55  3 

D  <D 

<o  -5 

S    ctf 

y 

o   fl 

P! 

u 

W     0) 

^^ 

3a 

O      -4-> 

•4-* 

'r3       ^ 

> 

>>  s 

^"*    fn 

fe  •*-" 

CO 

J 
c_i 

^ 

H    | 

•d 

u 

o  _| 

<D     0> 

H  -| 

3     ^ 
t/3      «-< 

o  ja 
&  t* 

bo 
*/i^ 

1 

'S 

CQ 

•/. 

a 

r>. 

^     ~ 

c   o 

a 
^ 

"on    bo 

rf      __i 

tn    £ 

CL 

j_»     i_» 

1 

i/l 

the  cut 

k 

S 
•v. 
<^ 

<M 

O 

1 

throws 

•a 

^ 

| 

K.S 
»     <U 

§  a 

•^   _c« 

i 

d 

A 

•-H 

d 

.5t 

aj   S2 

ri 

j 

§ 

•i" 

<3 
k, 

%« 

OJ 

0 
T! 

<a 

| 

S 
k. 

IH    "55 

•-s  a 

1 

rt 

«0 

y 

£ 

o 

•d 

rt  -u 

^> 

i 

'3 

go 

o 

-3 

1 

.h 

a 

_,    ci 

.S  s 

a 

a 

i— 

t; 

~f 

p 

2 

0 

a 

y 

a>   bo 

d 

d 

1 

5 

£ 

0 

^ 

'-M 

•5 

bfl 

o  ^o 

a 

fe 

D 
S 

14 

£H 

d 

0) 

d 

LJ          tfl 

Revolving  wedge  from  a  doi 

ng  wedge  through  the  line  the  arrangi 

e  same  manner  as  explained  in  diagrai 

ay  immediately,  and  the  entire  wedge 
isely  Compact  body. 
,  when  the  opposing  side  have  massed 

ward  progress  is  nearly  blocked,  the  « 

O 

rt 
m 

£ 

IH 

V 

^ 
(H 

C 

.S 
^ 

£ 

.bo 
"x 

be 

c 

'p 
5 

4J 

C 

a 

£ 

"o 

^» 

d  attempts  to  revolve  around  the  opposi 

the  opponents  are  pushing  with  utmos' 
'gin  a  I  line  of  advance  of  the  wedge,  i 

3 

<L> 

IH 

•a 
a 

§ 

a 
.2 

in 
S 

with  the  ball. 

6 

5 

-2 

"Sn 

^^ 

Vk 

en 
•6 

p 

•1 

0 

a 

r* 

••->  ^ 

rt    <a 

•2  •« 

'o 

0 

^' 

.S 

rt 

O 

to 

,i 

«cT 

rC       0) 

^      d) 

•5    bo 

<£, 

0) 

o 

^j 

C 

O 

•    T-1 

.  -- 

fi 

^     ,C 

D 

•/. 

d 

S 

^J 

Ba 

g 

fl      "^ 

**  ^ 

^ 

| 

| 

PH 

•r. 

B 

1 

•2 

4) 

d 

0 

u 

1 

S  3 

2  ^ 

C 

•a 
a 

i 

.S 

-d 

^ 
f 

'"5 

i  83 

i_    a>  -M 
^3   bo5 

3 

to 

o 

<  &S" 
•^  «  a 

£  .c 

|i 

r2 

o 

e 

I 

,0 

O 

^3 

P 

f 

5 

•a 

£ 
? 
0) 

bc,c 
'5  .2 
^   * 

^£  8 
*»      ^ 

i^ 

c 

2 

? 

t/2 

u 

"t! 

^ 

Efl 

9 

s 

."tJ 

u         rt 

p* 

09 

O 


PQ 

O     UJ     x 


'59 


.•£    ° 


CM 


£• 

3  o* 

B 

LI 

03^- 


Sir 


:o  •: 


.o«o 


i6i 

all  I  111^11^  I-  Pt 

"3   •  S      °     •<&  -^  £•  T3  v5  KJ  g  ^  o  •£  o>  j> 

Jg  ^  c       bo      bo*-1  ^  5  3  c3  ^  G  bo   -  o 

ftS    "^  jS  ?J      3     •£  ^  b^x,-,  "^  r  ""  -S  ^  ;g  .22  «J 


•o 

c 
9 
o 

u. 

rt 

IH 
V 

-M 

C 
0) 

0 

4) 

43 
^- 

a 
5 

% 

*o 
a 

edge  around  the  I.T,  a  preliminary  signal 
•ith  the  signal  which  is  to  indicate  the  dire 
in  the  large  cut  is  instantly  made,  in  pre 
ceding  diagram. 
;he  wedge  should  have  the  appearance  cf  be 

the  ball  comes  into  his  hands  QB  whirls  i 
ices  the  ball  in  the  hands  of  RH.  QH  tr 
f  to  the  side  and  a  little  behind  LH,  while  P 
ittaches  himself  in  a  like  manner  on  the  o 
Aether  in  the  lines  indicated,  around  LT.*  ! 
idge  so  formed,  while  RE  runs  directly  in  th 
they  round  the  tackle.  \  LE  throws  his  em 
s  back,  and  LT  forces  his  man  back  and  to  t 
st  take  great  care  not  to  leave  his  positiol 
n.  The  formation  must  be  somewhat  op 

;  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  representation  in 
•  the  guards  are  drawn  close  in  by  the  s 
r  to  shoulder  with  the  guards  in  all  plays 

C5      "£, 


163 


60 

•a 

a; 


-- 
X! 


•a 

e 


•o 

c 


*a 
G 

o 

u 

rt 

•8 

nt 


rt    <a 
•O   v* 


C 

0)     a 
>     0) 


bo  o 
'55    „, 


S 


oj 

s 

-d 

Oj 

<u 
be 

T3 


M   £ 

bO  _ 


2  "£  «  « 
5  S  •£  5 
L.  33  5  8. 


•S  P 

rt 


§  s= 

S  S  2 
"   u   o 


S  s 

-0  -53 

^e 

w>  ,„ 


•d 

c 

IS 

«'JI 

•§  e 

cd    o 


fe    >» 

Jj     0) 


<«    G  rt    «« 

13     ?  OH    - 

O  j*T»  «    O1 

.2  "^  o-  o 

4-J        O  -U 

C3      ^^  T^ 

ff     C  <U   -? 

i  I  &| 

•«   be  rt  ^ 

j  D    at  S    O 

;   ;5  .^-  tfl  r~l 


3  ^ 


i   •"•   t3   t»-l 
M  c3   •*-" 

rrt        •     rtj      t/5 

C       0)     ra       05 

05  •£?'*   £ 

•s  a  I  &* 

8  sa  8  1 1 


0     £*•> 

C       4J      ' 

-    § 


0) 


s 


O          fl  *d 

«H    tn    es    C 

2   2  g   rt 


GO 


3  g 

.S 


wj    *— j 

>  & 


«-H 

rt  ~* 

12 

S  2 


t/1      t/3 


rt 

0» 

CO 


o   m   d   y  *" 

•S  -S  -0  §  S 

t"  •"-•  °  ^  .s 
rt  c  73  ">  'o 
i-  rt  S  u 

0)     ti      t/3      ~      p 

n  s  t3  ^,  ^ 
c  .5  c  •**  K 

p^-3  S « 

Zt*  v  §< 


3   72     0-  ^ 


« s 


PH 


X 

.s 
t/i 
*  . 

O   'd 

^5   c 


O       C     ^S     r— 


I 


ram  forty-one. 

<0 
•4J 

d 
« 
O1 

1 

z 

1 
x 
be 

eft,  accompanied  by 
on,  and  hold  closely 

0> 

1 

»d 
C 

r-.'       D 

I.S 

<u  •*•* 
£<d 

)  intercept  it. 
off  toward  the  side 

;he  opposite  end,  ac- 
3  he  has  come  around 

r-nine. 

, 

bC 

£ 

o 

J3 

o 

M 

•S->  =3 

IA 

i^ 

V 

hO 

•o 

.3 
.S 

*-> 
bj) 

*^, 

"S 

D 

0 

o 

<D 

n 

S 

d 

§ 

>s 

D 

0 

5 

"3 
0)    d 

09 

"p 

'3 

LE  in  ca 

u 

3 

§ 

I> 

d 

•  »-t 

^i 

Q) 

"S 

-fl 

r^i 

, 

oi 

^ 

•s 

8 

. 

bfl 

d 

b 

-t-> 

ft 

-1-1    2 

H 

bo 

n 

& 

43 

o 

-9. 

£ 

-f 

g 

"rt 

«a 

rt 

1^ 

rt 
ft 

'S5 
o 

3 
^ 

4-1 

a 

•d 

0 

3 

IH 

"rt 
^f-; 

3    § 

^ 

ft 

.S 

g 

3 

'? 

$ 

o 

jSj 

tn 

'& 

o 

a 

5 

0 

u 

a 

c 

J8 

0 

tn 

5    « 

_g 

3 

o 

<<-! 

1 

c3 

C 

o 

£ 

G 
1 

0 

0 

ft 

p 

•2  S 

£3 

& 

^ 

•i 

4-> 

rt 

>, 

£ 

•3 

& 

*^ 

o 

IB 

fe  ^ 

J^> 

»g 

aj 

"3. 
j-j 
.5 

£ 

the  signal  the  wedge  is  instantl 
the  ball  is  snapped  FB  rushes  : 
•ouches  down  behind  c,  shielde 

i  tightly  massed  together. 
then  instantly  darts  out  from 

1 
1 

"o 

be 
g 

1 

0 

2 

r  *  to  deceive  the  other  side  int 

e  opposing  team  immediately 

is  being  attempted  and  rush  to 
remains  crouched  behind  c  unl 

a 

« 
•<-> 

i 

2 

2 
§ 

09 

« 
B5     <]j 

,     a) 

<u  -J3 

TE.  Compare  this  play  with  th 

3 

ta 
< 

0 

> 

t-      K 

d  O* 

o 

S 
a 

u 

"^ 

0 

fA 

&H 

&£ 

T3 

1 

is 

o 
fc 

1 

A 

!? 

X 

'iv: 
S 

1 

c 

89) 
^Q 

;o 


i67 


_fi 

<B 

£ 

.S 
^ 

y 

_d 
c 

4>  E*    tn 

S.2* 
0>     0>   13 

8  -5  -° 

'-^     «)     D 

tn    o> 

<U     c 

bO  C 

§  s 
u^ 

0 

^ 
"n 

.2 

y 

M 

g-a 

^^   « 

0)    ^ 

K   C 
«   fc 

fl^S 

!1)      ^ 
1^ 

to  break 

tn  .-j£ 

'3    bo 

bo  C 

rt  2 

r^    in 

ly  strong 
Dpposing 

9 

£ 

1 

S 

.1i 

p 

in 

1    8 

5  ^ 

*«  .§> 
O  'S 

-o  g 
c  > 
<u  So 

0 

J/. 

y 

-C 

£ 

vS 

•d 

'I 
3 

o 

me  to  reach  the  left  end,  by  which 
:n  are  properly  drilled,  and  then  snap 
e  springs  toward  FB,  passing  him  th 

35    •*•• 
fo    -w 

cs 

sl 

^    oj 
bO^__ 

'55  < 

IB 
It 

*: 

^  « 

bO^J 
3     oj 

s-° 

21 

_d 
« 

5 
x 

"^ 

4= 

-4J 

< 

4) 

^ 

5 

0 

C! 

•e 

.S 
ij 

/  angle  to  the  left,  LE  jumps  into  th 
le  QB  attaches  himself  to  the  rear  of  : 

-M     "Hi 
^^ 

.3? 

^^> 

*$ 

bC^ 

C    ^" 

.H    <a 

*->      K«J 
&& 

3  ^ 

^    OS 

Si  s 

a  -! 

n    <u 

1/3      o 

•*.     fe 

5  «S 

^4        j   » 

S    m 

s    O 

>  take  the  opposing  RE  if  he  attempts 

jnds  the  backs  up  into  the  line  to  mas; 
e  ball  down  the  field  instead  of  ru 

^5    O 
'°   "S 

S-g 

0)     ° 
c!    M 

§1 

-M       <U 
§•« 

^| 

^      | 

O 

6     -M 

tn    tn 

tn    3 
0)   ••-> 

O       M 

T3   -g 
0)   "S 
J3  -^ 
tn  ^ 

Bj      0 

future  similar  formations  it  will  coi 
well  behind  the  line  as  a  protection. 

G  ^ 

1 

| 

.„      u/      -— 
-M     c    •= 

*•  °  ti 

^ 

S! 

«  e 

CL,    -M 

w 

0) 

in  A 
0)    "^ 

H  '^ 

S   c^ 

oS    o3 

&1 

1 

"a 

1^1 

i£  -  'S 

•g  '> 

^1 

s  g 

9 

0 

A 

05 

-5  p 

°>    <u 
«  .c 

M    S 

.  -5 

m'$ 

bo 
•B 

0) 

T3  ^j 

•55  .a 

bo-* 
2  ^ 

bO  tj 

'I    ° 
0    "S 

a  2 

o    o> 
tn    C 
oS    O 

^    u 

s 

(H 

'7. 

c 

g-g   g 
1    1    0- 

•9  -w" 

'55    c 

o   g 
a,  S 

'C. 

o 

^ 

5  a> 
•d  "5 

S  2 

&  'Z^ 

g-E 

0    OS 
0)     £ 

<u  £ 

0) 
0) 

'55   2 

as 

£X  » 
O    u, 

a, 
ft  « 
o     - 

1  3 

-    4-> 

0)    sn 

in    03 
O     0> 

&^ 

•'"»  VH    tn 

_,   o 

(Q 

t!  c 

in     o 

di       - 

-(->  /»j 

j3      Cj 

•   ° 

S 

2 

S^< 

Is   S 

3 

O     o! 
«£     C 

•+•< 
T3     .-I 

,2 

|  •- 

2  o 

<^  c 

•g 

:i 

tn 

tn    o 

£   VM     0) 

5  «  3 

13    ^  'tn 

bo  D 
.5  S 
3  S 
S    <u 

^ 
o 
^ 

tn    ti 
<U    o3 

|t 

ll 

S        fH 

•-1  t— 

^13 

OS 

6 

X    0 

a;  -X 
tn    y 

nS    O 
o  3 

«  rrt 

o  4J 
4:  x 

o 

.2  ^ 
2  £ 

£'3 

%  £ 

«     0 

a)  +-> 

<2 

o 

» 

^ 

2 
3 

O 

S 

« 

b* 

°^    1 

•  ^  "| 
s   ^  rt 
S  «  g 

0)     bO    § 
bo's    in 

5  1  3 

5S 

a  « 

t«  T3 

8  5 

T3    b= 
2o 

time  shouts  " 

&| 
1* 

•3   '5 
J   bo 

£    C 

8  2 

•s:s 

2  ^ 

0)     U" 

bo  0s 
T3   rr-j 
4>    o 
^    § 

"  t! 
o  c 

*7     o 

d 

NOTE."  ] 
the  wedge  am 

QB  protecting 
position  from 

back  will  serv 
opposing  side 

169 


•0   g 

{-    a) 
oj    bo 

"2 

,E3    D 

IH 

O 

c3 

tn 

cS 

c 

D    -*-* 

e 

o 

bo 

_c 

C    rt 

«w   'S 

§? 

|c| 

1 

•i 

IH 

o 

tn    tn 

<£ 

'^ 

**   bo 

^ 

c3 

*    C 

S 

j 

<+1 

tfl 

rt    o3 

c 

OJ 

5   bo 

t/)     0) 

83 

5 

l-<     O 

1  rt 

1 

_c 

3 

T! 

a 

tn 
cJ 

C 

C    -j 

0) 

a 

o 

B'-S 

0    g 

EJ    •*-> 

si 

J3 

xg 

1>    o 

3 

C 
bfl 

c 
8 

3 

tn 

'tn    O 
bO-§ 

bo 

o 

<u  S 

rT     Cj 

1 

D  -^ 

tn 

'd 

^3 

2 

G    ^ 
tn    G 

•^ 

<ti 

fcuO  ^ 

J 

£    *d 

35 

-^J 

g 

2 

e« 

*O     4) 

"*   w 

£ 

o   ^ 

i 

C     t* 

1 

O 

&  ° 

^ 

o3  bo 

>    •tJ 

S  s 

^2 

U3     S 

a, 

V     OH 

OS 

^ 

^ 

O    a) 

... 

•*  .S 

'o 

K 

>  ^ 

4-J 

3 

-M    as 

•6  * 

3 

rt 

^   +* 

•g 

fl  1 

4)    C 

Cu  <_i 

'bo 

^ 

.^o 

a 

M 

"*""    ^ 

1—1 

c  ^ 

**    2 

g-s 

C    tfl 

°     0) 
0)   TJ 

a   o 

1 

S 

1« 

0   .2 

8?     ^     M 

,SS  r9   1 

«p    *-•    e4 

£,-0  a. 

| 

IS 
0 

0) 

Ij     rd 

|| 

.S  ° 

C 

*^  c 

(D 

OT      ^» 

-4-> 

u 

S  =« 

o 

•^ 

rC        °* 

-        J-H 

Q     W 

««  ,j 

§  ^d 

7, 

a  ^ 

o 

9   •  — 

I'a 

1 

o 
H! 

0   -S 

u   c 

&^ 

G  jB 

,-T     ° 

rf    o 

c 

|l 

1 

al 

la 

•d 

1 

.S  cL 

tn    6 

0)     ^ 

•si 

£'$ 

^ 

<o   a 

0 

rC      -M 

nt 

tn  T^J 

^d 

o 

^3  ••-. 

t-t     ^* 

rt 

CJ    ~ 

&   n 

•JH 

—   2 

-2 

tS    tn 

3 

S 

J2   Uc 

Si  ^ 

•y  g 

Play  around  the  opposit 

After  the  wedge  has  been  formed  < 

re  may  be  some  delay  in  snapping  t 
xperienced  team,  both  LT  and  LE  ru: 

en  it  advances. 

In  that  case  the  following  modifica 

captain,  seeing  that  the  opposing  L 
understand  as  a  signal  to  indicate  tl 

>osite  end. 
QB  makes  the  pass  as  shown  in  c 

and  then  instantly  turns  and  precec 
FB  and  RE  dash  toward  the  right  a 

opposing  LE. 
RG  attempts  to  lift  his  opponent  b; 

isible. 
As  RE  starts  forward  in  the  line  ini 

iiagram  eight,  and  preceding  RE,  di 
:ceeds  in  getting  around  RG,  while  R 

1  1 

•M       0) 

.a  a 

tl 

g.a 
=3  S 
S^ 

1  § 

3  5 

£    D 

-1 

-d     - 
§1 

NOTE.  This  maneuver  will  prevei 
their  men  from  the  opposite  end  to 

^ 

0>     0> 

rS.S 

A 

1  3 

M* 

eu 
o 

n 

1 

a 

-    u 

II 

^ 

Ooo 
u. 


JO 


171 


0) 

o 

o 

c 
2 

0) 

>1 

!  c  endeavors  to 

a 

!S 

x 

is 

^ 
•d 

0   X 

2  Sf 
11 

C§    £? 

led  to  strike  the 

.selves  on  either 
,g  until  the  man 

"c 

CJ 

"o 

s 

_.j 
15 

"o 

Q 

III 

E< 

<u  *O 

| 

a 
o 

B 

4> 

•S 

1 

-.  Running  mass  wedge  through  the 

FB  through  the  center  on  a  running  mass  play  di 
s  start  forward  the  instant  the  ball  is  snapped. 

C 

-^ 

I 

? 

1 

<o 

fl 

£ 

'5 

to 

•p 

straight  ahead  of  him. 
n  dash  in  and  attach  themselves  behind  c  on  each  si 

;s  forward  at  the  same  moment,  and  receiving  th< 

^  »H 

5,S 

^•s 

O  C 

13  O 
.2  .g 
"S  4) 

^  s 

^"o 

"*J  U5 
^  fl 

«-•  S 

^  « 

o> 

•2  -S 

|J 

'-s^ 

«  6 

T3 

•s  8 

4)  -g 

§  « 
2 
0  U 
•4->  a 

A3 

»~^  (~* 
ui  rp 

If  -backs.  QB  throws  himself  in  the  rear  of  FB,  and  a 

en 

I 

0 

| 

3 
" 

to 

rf 

u 

1 

2 

'•/i 

point  in  the  play  is  that  all  strike  the  line  at  as  r 
ind  form  a  tightly  massed  wedge,  which  is  driven 

J2 
| 

a 

-ti 
" 

•O 
0) 

a) 

.g 

bC 

.2 
>• 

1j 

2 
tt 

o 

-5 

CD 

i 

0 

_s 

v" 
M 

he  rushes  forward.  The  wedge  must  never  cease  p 
is  actually  downed  and  absolutely  held. 

t^ 
•«*• 

^ 

•g  s 

g-0 

a 
3, 

a  * 

c^ 
E  c 

on 
5 
'C 
& 

9  -" 

J2  C 

£  « 

2 

4> 

.n 

^ 

M 

i; 

a!   +j 
.—     C 

>  5 

ri 

Z 

V.  — 

«»  13 

M  ^ 

<«  -o 

*n 

t/3      ^ 

CA 

-  C/l 

4-1 

^ 

m   J2 

^H 

« 

&•  0) 

£  S 

.= 

IS  s 

« 

O1  "- 

•d 

p 

*  .£ 

,0 

^ 

<+-(  ^ 

O  "*""* 

~    tn 

•e 

c 

0) 

1 

2  c 
o  1 
£  S 

c^ 
"o 

^ 

1 

i 

0) 

c 

u 

*2  •? 

'So  £ 

•ot 


o 


u 

4-> 

C 
u 

•o 

e 

rt 
T> 

^  x£ 

rt    x    o 

^  ^  "3 
|'rt  | 

q    .S    ^ 

s  1  "°  J 

the  line  dash  straight  for 

nan  back  and  to  the  left. 

trikes  the  opposing  c  with  M 
s  the  opposing  guard  in  a  £J 

en 

'C 
to 

1 
tn 

9 

2 

"co 

ic  greatest  possible  force, 
he  receives  the  ball  at  x, 

h 

t-. 

a 

0 

1 

09 

-H 

a 

01 

1 

C3 
fl 

•jt 

I 

"3 

d> 

| 
"o 

IM 

d 

e 

X 

e 

r5 

3 

bo 

"S    c4 
co    ~ 

c  -1 

J3    *3 
rt    W) 
bo  S 

n  ^ 

ja 
1 

en 
en 

CO 

en    co 

11 

CO 

•a 

2s 
•§  «• 

^•s 

•s. 

1 

_fl 

•d" 
3 
v> 

C 
<u 

"^  ° 

'S  'C 
8,« 

CO 

1 

•2  G 

bo  .5 
C  .a 

§ 

^"^ 

CO 

"w 

en    « 

co  .C 

3 

be 

«u 

^ 

~ 

- 

^5 

<u 

bfl 

•o 
<u 

^ 

*•"    co 

If 

il 

co    co 

me  to  reach  the  o 
T  headway  before 

S 

i* 
|g 

Q 
TJ 

vT 

•*; 

Qg  ahead,*  at  an  a 
;  directly  behind 

ith  his  head  dowr 

:ely  behind  the  er 
themselves  to  his 

.5 

o 

en 
rt 

3 

•5  ° 

•^  .s 

co  *3 

•sS 

a 
<a 

a 

co 

£ 

co 

§ 
«« 

TJ 

C 

n  reaching  the  openi 

48.  Running  mass 

To  send  the  running  mass 
backs  draw  back  slightly  before 

in  order  to  give  the  ends  more  ti 
enable  themselves  to  gain  greate 

RE  also  works  over  slightly  1 
At  the  instant  the  ball  is  s 

the  opening  in  the  lines  indicatec 
C  lifts  his  man  back  and  to  t 

LE  passes  through  the  openi 
his  full  force,  while  RE,  crossing 

similar  manner. 
At  the  same  moment,  FB  w 

the  opening  so  made,  immedial 
the  half-backs  firmly  attaching 

and  forcing  him  through.  RT  '. 

in  diagram  thirteen,  and  toge 
together  as  before  and  drive  din 

3 

CO 

S 

u 

'S 

•d 
"o 

1 

H 

*  When  the  ends  find  difficulty  i 
as  in  the  preceding  play. 

jo  so 


O; 


to  so 


J75 


.22   ° 

£2   m 
rt    9 


*0     ,.-  .M 
1-4     ^    rt 

g^3 

*!*• 

J-3     til 

4)     n    o 


1 1  g.s-3 

!fi    0)    o  "tn    os 


.,    *3    a 

^T        f »      /ti 


- 

hO 


(A 

OJ 

s 

hO 

C 


6^ 


(0  U 

'.a  o 

-^  •— 

0)  j) 

•Q  -s 


c  a  § 


>  2  -2 

[>        *-•       -4-» 

•s  ^  s 
^  ^  § 
t  a  ^ 
I  d^ 

b   c  *• 


•f    -yi 

_•    o 
^    ^ 


•d    g    <n 
rt    K    rt 


(3    tfl 


C 

0)     <D 
Cfi    p| 


rt 


3  a 

^3    C 


g    ||  ^    | 


•n     W> 


•c  a  rt 

w    rt  . 

ft«  4) 

Oi  T3 

TO    a)  rt 

C  J3  e 

C/3     -*J  G 


o 


83 


•  o 


177 


o 


2 

"oJ 

43 

*O 

u 
<v 

"S 

u 

0> 

43 

2 
o 

1 

<*- 

"5 
o 

a 
.S 

| 
'7. 
3 

*Z 
1 

5 

-c 
c 
3 

o" 

-s 

3 

S 

<0 

& 
o 

•f. 

y 
•O 

it  has  been  prearranged  that  he  shall 

retaining  it  in  his  hands,  and  passes  ^ 
1  the  right  end.  At  the  same  instant  ^ 

right  as  one  man,  and  dash  into  the 

rt 
'a 
a 

13 

•d 

c 

0) 
0) 

«  rt 

0     ^ 

•>->    o 

do  not  betray  by  their  looks,  before 

run  is  to  be  made. 

•w 

E 

£ 

bO 
.S 

'S 

(U 

"o 
0 

"3 

S 
0 

o 
"S 

derstood  around  which  e 

the  opposing  side  whom 

by  kicking  it  while  still 
play  is  to  be  made  arouni 

e  diagonally  toward  the 

meet  midway  between  t 
s  to  interfere  for  him  as 

must  see  to  it  that  they 

e  direction  in  which  the  i 

a 

0 

Ui 
(14 

M 

10 

? 

0 

1 

i 

a 

x  feet  apart. 

d 
P 

—  ' 

en 

1 

£ 

"H 
^ 
w 

'•A 
< 

.ayer  selects  the  man  on 
lock. 

X 

rt 

H 
_c 

"3 
,3 

o 

6 

0} 

is 

0 
ft 

u 

0 

^ 
Q 

1 

.S 

1-1 

o 
-p 

^ 

1 
ft 

le  entire  rush  lines  mov 

jposing  rushers  as  they 
RH  and  FB  precede  LI 

0 
0 

5T 

in 

0 

C 

NOTE.  The  rushers 

te  ball  is  put  in  play,  th< 

°5a 

ft.0 

.ti 

•£! 

o 

z 

M 

181 


•d 

V 

I 

"ft 

% 

u    E 

Jj       i) 

•3  £ 

O     Cu 

•Sj 

-4-1   y 
o   rt 

1   J3 
M   i3 

h  toward  the 
heir  distances 

G 

C 

IS 

n 

rt 

.be 
In 

bO 

o 

t/2 
0) 

1 

rt 

ft 

1 
1 

"S 

cd 

^ 

rt 

SH 
1 

t:  M 
fe   « 

"S  *-" 

1  2 

d  of  across  in 

<D 

(0    -"-1 

YJ 

•  tn 

^» 

G 

'C 

(1)    b 

rt 

C    1 

(L>       *- 
U      0 

o>  ^ 

G      ^H 

>rH   ^3 
G    te 
rt    ? 
x.  o" 

$    G° 
K  '> 
J    l> 

T3     « 

vances 

S 

s 

rt 

| 
rt 

&-S   o 

T3  ^ 

1  a  S- 

rt    £  .G 

aid  inste 

5  ^ 

"^^      C 
O 

be  2 

G 
•>  T3 

r-<      ^ 

s  *- 

rt    p. 

1 

1 

^ 

1 

| 

-4_> 

s-s 

G  r3 

<G 
Q 

rt    G 

w"   tn" 

D 

&-< 

0 

•"    rt 

3 

6    £ 

£    rt 

t-5     ^ 

id 

r^ 

*^ 

t/3 

8 

G  ^ 

o  ^ 

£       0) 

tf  o- 

.    G 
f-  ^ 
^    tfl 

a 

G 

5 

-^ 

15 
c 

H 

•C 

^    « 
rt  X 

•~~  -t-> 

S 
§ 

^ 

£ 

13     rt 
^    § 

tt    S 

x~ 

^ 

_o 

^     M 

•§ 

rt  "^ 

rt    i> 

^  S 

rt 

'd 

"rt 

'7. 

s  1 

•y 

a  § 

bO  rt 

-S  -^ 

oj  ^ 

(S  v 

*>,* 
1*5 

X 

2 

J^ 

-s. 
O 

1 

£> 
O 
,G 

c 

«    C»< 

T^           ^^ 

t/i    rt 

bO 

1 

.5  ^ 

O  rO 

ft'g 

t/2 

-3 

a 

i-H 

t/5 

•5 

^3    oa 

is 

G    *  —  * 

^     crj 

G  —  i 

rt 

b£ 

'C 

O     O* 

P 

jj     ft 

"*~*     j>^ 

•^«     D 

O. 

c 

^g 

c 

_G 

13  ._ 

t-« 

a  bo 

0    .5 

|| 

^   1 

bo 

G 

_rt 

CO 

rt 

0 

- 

^1 

13 

•^    rt 

p 

Q 

»" 

rt 

6  "rt 

^ 

u 

CO     a> 
(0    ft 

rt  -c 

4> 

e 

0>    (X 

rt 

§, 

h 

-*-> 

(B 

S  e 

'£ 

•2 

52.  Double  pa 

To  make  the  double  pass  c 

as  indicated,  on  the  center  line 
ten  yards  between  c  and  QB,  ar 

about  three  yards  behind  the  li 

The  instant  that  QB  puts  1 
center  of  the  field  in  lines  nearl 

m 
« 

•a 

0 

"o 

0) 

I] 

M-l 

O 

la 

_bo 
'C 

0) 
^3 
•«-> 

3 

C 
(U 

.    U 

3     rG 

2  H 

• 

1 

toward  the  center  to  block  the 

LH  passes  close  in  front  01 
KB,  to  take  it  as  he  rushes  by. 

>, 

1 
M 

_C 

d 

0) 

5 

H 
O 

'd 

3 

B 
£ 

speed  to  encircle  the  opposing  1 
NOTE.  From  this  same  fo: 

kick,  in  which  case  the  rushers 
the  lines  indicated  in  the  cut. 

*  See  description,  diagram  fifty- 

if—       ^  3: 


183 


center  with  team  divided. 

e  diagram,  on  either  side  of  the  field,  the 

ends  about  five  yards  from  the  side  lines, 
icks  about  three  yards,  behind  the  center 

>ther,  in  order  to  render  the  opposing  team 

the  right  or  left,  or  to  FB  for  a  kick  down 
shown  in  diagram  fifty-one,  and  makes  a 
t  x,  following  it  immediately  to  make  the 

D     fl^ 
^     1 

**"*    tn 

•s  g* 
1* 

*    G 
^3  _O 

13  £ 

0)      Q, 

•S 
.S  "3 

Dy  his  opponents  as  the  other  three  men 

c 

o 

S 

1 

8 
1 

Every  man  upon  the  team  rushes  to  his 
a  signal  the  ball  is  immediately  snapped 

the  field  to  RE,  who  catches  the  ball  upon 

T3 

bo 

G 

rt 

1 
I 

1 
0) 

CJ    *r^ 

—    c$ 

a  > 

,c 

ID      <1 

w 

O      - 

ci 

^  r^5 

Ca 

(H 

<U   «p^ 

53.  Opening  play  from  the 

The  men  are  arranged  as  indicated  in  t 

lers  being  about  two  yards  apart  and  th 
s  placed  about  two  yards,  and  the  half-1 

QB  looks  to  the  one  side  and  then  to  the 

;rtain  whether  the  ball  is  to  be  passed  t< 
field.  He  then  puts  the  ball  in  play  as 
;  pass  to  LH,  who  receives  it  on  the  run 

co 

v: 

fl 

'1 

eJ 
t3 

rt 
O 

'"H 

V. 

The  instant  the  ball  is  in  play  every  p. 
5  indicated,  except  RE,  who  stands  st 

ind  close  to  the  side  lines,  unobserved 
i  across  the  field. 

It  is  of  no  consequence  if  only  a  small 

kness  of  the  following  play  for  success, 
tion  in  the  line,  and  without  waiting  fo 

a  long  pass  made  by  QB  straight  across 
run  and  has  the  entire  field  before  him. 

1  § 

^H     4J 

s  § 

1  >ss 

>,  ^ 

.2    G 

a 

|| 

1/3     G 

2    «8 

W    ^ 

H    £ 

&   H   <u 

y     (D 

M 

-- 

0> 

O     f3 

3  'o 

^     0) 

§ 

3   ,w     C 

tH      fo      S 

§6 

I 

G 

'-  -      Gj 

a*  &< 

c  J 

03     *J 

3 

I 

o 


o; 


185 


2 
"3 

o 

0) 

o 
0 

ossible. 

6 

-y. 

9 

OH 
1 

•u 

a 

OH 

43 

"rt 
0 

its  formation,  and 

'3; 

OH 

a 

h 

^rf 

a 

"d 

tightly  with  both 
his  entire  weight 

.  run  in  a  compact 

o 

OH 

O      t/J                 —  : 

^  <!    be  -0        -ti   u 

^ 

IH 

0) 

tT 

a 

.9 

_c 

o 

& 

tn 

§ 

§ 

4J 

S 
o 

from  the  cente 

bound  togethel 

'1 

bt 

d 

2 

0 

idy  to  receive  it, 

act  mass,  preser 

:um  to  advance  1 

is  stomach,  clas 

O 

C 

E 

0) 

1 

"S 
<-£ 
i- 

OH 
1) 
0> 

Iginated  at  Princet 

,>•« 

^ 

PI 

o 

S 

OH 

-*-> 

& 

- 

S 

u 

a 

4> 

1 

^' 

J 

£ 

0 

o 

i 

1 
•a 

a 

4) 

O 

c 

T3 

^ 

•ti 

Oj 

^2 

rt 

£ 

.  -rt 

•~ 

4) 

H 

s 

<*•  *s 

.£ 

o3    tr. 
O    <u 

| 

__ 

^ 

s— 

.s 

^- 
3 

h 

§ 

bO  o 

6 

"rt 

"s 

|..  *  Princeton  opening 

To  send  the  wedge  straight  dc 

*p 

"o 

3 

o 
o 

£ 

d 
p 

0 
"7. 
in 
c 
O 

"3 
^ 

5 
u 
"3 

i 

"8 

0 

J 
>> 

1 

^ 

0 

1 

•J: 

C 

o< 

3 

the  entire  wedge  rushes  forwa 

savors  by  mere  force  of  weight 

straight  towards  the  opponent's 
QB  upon  receiving  the  ball  pi 
Is  and  charges  forward  with 
i  behind. 

1 
j-j 

t 
"rt 

ot 

£ 

4J 
HH 

M 

JE 

s,  preserving  the  formation. 

The  wedge  formation  at  the  center 

m 

'x 

EH 

1 

>, 

d 

"On 

w 

•a 

C 
4) 

Wl 

JH 

ll 

i 

* 

s 

0 


187 


«4-t       4) 

1>    O           ,r         4^           ^          *O    *V    4) 

®     fajQ 

-fl*C                   ^                   O                ^3                  flrrfb/) 

»d  *g 

S2.  s  i"l"8H 

J3   £ 

°S     3<"     M    SB* 

in   „. 

£  J3 

|&  Ul  i  »=•§ 

VM 

g  -g      ^^^       ^-       »  &  a 

bo   ~ 

rO       fe                i»^       ^     *4-*                ^7^                                       ^fj 

« 

C 

'S  ^ 

.S|      JBe5       s      l5^! 

v*\ 

&  s 

rr-i^          "^-^O           °           4>t'1'r! 

»T—  ' 

y  >*> 

Te  *        oejc       -M        fe«« 

J-H         *V                       X         t->      •**                       i-t                       ^      r-*         >W 

ale  modification  of  Princeton  we( 

rs  in  one  very  important  respect  from  the  pr 
wedge  formation  the  guards  are  placed  OK 

ball  is  put  in  play,  LG  and  RG  spring  forwa 
opposing  guard  and  center  midway  betwee 
ir  opponents  start. 
ly  into  his  man  and  attempts  to  throw  him  1 
c  in  the  same  manner,  attempts  to  throw  hit 
ncing  immediately  behind  is  thus  saved  the  s 
•ds  under  full  headway, 
charge  thus  at  an  angle  slightly  to  the  rigt 
c  and  RG  or  c  and  LG,  as  the  case  may  be. 
highly  desirable  that  the  men  without  the 
found  more  advantageous  to  place  the  tack 
these  positions,  while  the  guards  are  retain 

> 

I  J 

|!|Ji!lirpf 

iA 
m 

lb 

T3   -M 

•^flS.y^&wWJtuC^bc 
^gc^tng-bC.CbOg-^gS 
ij-tj'-'feCJLi        rOcnrO5r'C4J 

^      rf 

Cui^-j^c^mouO 

?    fl, 

-S-ScgBa^^^Sw--^3 

«5 

l^'^S'^bO^o'^'SH^- 

3      ^ 

:>>  r-  1      •»  -rl    rt    2*  S    w  _S           O    00   fc 

__^         *^^             fl\         '—             L.  '             ^         »*-•             fl-i         *±+            ^f.        V»            *M             ^. 

H    bo 

^H  Sj-^J-^e'^e  n^^-S-^ 

Q 

D          T3C           OJ          *J          -rt          "S> 

C            0)   'R            4>            ^         -^            9  -rt 

2 

•^              CO              r-<              ^'            crt              S5    43 

13       ^o.      8      &      2      'Ocs 

189 


191 


!_ 
OS 

1i 

• 
« 

a  S 

4-1      4-1 

11 

£  a 

£ 

o 
^- 

1 

"oS 

S    0) 

^ 

'/- 

to 
6 

_d 

o 

4^ 

1 

T3   ^ 
<-l  ^ 

•*^    cj 

1 
a 
So 
o> 

H 

o 

i* 

03    o 
^    +5 
tfl 

yr  by  touchin 
ing  it  back. 

ill  have  had 
will  be  upon 

tid  seizing  RI 
LE  follows 

a 

M 
«l 

^ 

'5 

o" 

1 
1 

•4-4 

O 
0) 

"be 

1 
I 

C 

0? 

a 

13 

^>x> 

0 

*^»  13 

jS    -^ 

^    to 

S3    a) 

rr-t 

1 

C 

oS 

•J: 

13 

1 

•1  8 

O 

«  ^ 

CX      tH 

«  <y 

•c  IS 

>-SJ     tO 

p 

c 

^J 

•5 

.% 

!_i 

^ 

§  | 

•S  'c 

O*  u. 

. 

4J 

o 

to 

'ay 

r~ 

Z. 

^ 

•*-> 

i-, 

£  'It 

^ 

o5 

£> 

i 

g 

•  1 
w  « 

a 

c 

•N-S 

^1 

•^ 

t/3    T3 

II 

r& 

zi     n/j 

3  jf 

*^    bJO 

CO          (_ 

"^   o 

o 

O 
to 
0) 

O 

4-1 

mation 

03 

"K*     T^J 

"x 

«  c 

TJ    to 

-M     ^H 

fH 

•d 

oj 

,f! 

(H 

&     & 

bO  2 

*o  '-3 

^       " 
*Kt       O 

3 

•t. 

v  S 
-1 

bO    . 

c  •? 

03    ^ 

to"     0) 

|| 

1     § 

-o 
13 

0) 

£ 
B 

8; 

§  bii 

*~-  G 

i 

,e 

H-l 

C    « 

11 

0   ^ 

_r"|    '^ 

to   "*" 

fl 
<D      ° 

G5"! 

T3 
gl 

5 

0) 

4-> 

q 

& 

4-> 
^ 

S  •§ 

r2 

•rt 

ex  o 

C  ^ 

3 

-H  «> 

73 

^ 

o 

ex  £ 

2     "^ 

c 

to   ^ 

D    *J 

aj  ^ 

to    ~ 

^  *S 

09 

a 

.ti  ^ 

C 
^ 

OT      ^_, 

"c 

9 

4) 

3  « 

>  -^ 

0)     C* 

4J     <4H 

?       • 

'o 

^1 

^ 

1)        VH 

0)     S 

>, 

•5 

4-1  a 

•a  "^ 

C       O 

^ 

fe 

~-s 

13  « 

1    ^ 

c 

C 

«  "^ 

X>  eg 

g    oS 

to   "3 

Sfi 

c   g 

'p  l 

03 

JjH      j 

<O    "^ 

<w 

5 

5     D 

(1)     0 

?    p 

.^   o 

•7* 

8U 

(0 

0) 

'to 

2  44 

z 

0) 
TJ     ^ 

'to  T<~; 

!-l      "*" 

C  jj1 

5 

o 

> 

^ 

^ 

«—  ^    o 

rt 

V 

'"^        ^ 

0)      4J 

4-» 

^    c/3 

c? 

i 

*w         *-< 

V 

,C 

OS    t) 

4J       ? 

r£     y 

•^ 

4-»     ^" 

g 

g 

**••     4) 

in  > 

to 

!^ 

_2" 

"5 

tfl     «> 

§1 

0>   ~- 

_(-, 

S 

.2  g 

p 

o. 

0) 

1)     4) 

•c    fe 

.S 

XJ 

-^  5 

O     ^3 

rr<     '  —  ' 

^  ^ 

"^   XI 

G 

£ 
»j 

~'% 

g 

be 

'd 

The  formatior 

arranged  so  that  t 
brace  themselves 

c 

U 
S| 

£ 
ea 

tackles,  and  half-bj 
row  unobstructed 

V  'fj 

0)     0) 
u     4^     0) 

S   o   o 

S  ^oS   -^ 

2  O  ^ 

the  same  moment 
time  to  secure  the 

go"5 

f  J3 
1  8 

I-! 

<4-l       C 

o  c 

X    «J 
0)     0) 

g^  J3 
03    4-< 

mediately  behind 
apex,  and  QB  direc 
to  the  original  dire 

4) 

rG 
g 

0 

that  the  second  we 
utmost  speed. 

OJ 

4-> 

C 
o 
V 

4-> 

ts 

60 
a> 


II 

^    <fl 

Wl     5>    J 


o  ic^'g 

5   °  $   o   § 
"  »rt    *""      -  2    u 


^    fe 

fH        rt^ 

C     t- 


Q  *5?  3 

OS     0)  ^ 


>    £X  uj    tn 
•55    cS    a,    rt 


o    ^ 

U3     g 


fe  . 

O  ^ 

^  O- 

1/3  o 

01 


O. 

0) 

OT 


•a  -a 


»H  ®  "S  >, 


PH 


^s   C 

-M     <u 

•e  "tt 


G     (D 

1.1 


§JJ  ^ 


00 

m 


•a  ss  a 


2i^ 


OJ      O 

*§  .i2 
<s   ^ 


.Si  w 
y  H 
.ts  o 


as    ei 


'95 


OJ       G 


<u 


S, 


J3   -S1 
1i>     O 

0)     -!-> 


I  ^ 

cS  "pi* 

•a  a 

43  •- 


G 

0 

3 

Q 

43 

w 

'35 

4^    § 

*j   a> 

jj 

"c 

0 

•  ^* 

to 

tn  'g 

CJ 

0 

Cj 

-4-> 

nJ 
g 

£ 

O 

O 

<L> 

•S 

0> 

O 

o 

cd 

e 

4J 

S 

O 

~J      >' 

43    P 
(«    _O 

—      rtl 

^ 

1 

<  — 

_o 

(H 

.rrangem 

:  putting 

ffective. 

t. 

bC 


S-g 


'-     0) 

B     S 

2O 
G 

)   0>     ^ 
^3     C 


C     P 


O    w 

•s-s 

H      rrt 


HI 

a 


.S  8 

^  S  -  c 

a  5  o^g 
p  .s  -s  '§ 
a=3  s 


m  «> 

S 


M  S    *^      X  O         » 

DOtu^DiU^OG 
P     G4^     ri.fa     *-t^- 

h  -~  ..'.    u  rR  rn  T?   fl 


M 

§5 


bo 


cS  73  ^3 

6  .S 

rM  f-* 

^> 

CJ  f^ 

r-t  »*-• 


197 


o 


199 


ic  center. 

•o 

C 

a 

0 
0 

•s 

c 

.0 

irily  the  position  of  RG. 
dashes  forward,  receive: 

u/ 

bo 

.S 

1 
t/i 

c" 

13  «C 
a!    - 

o  G 
A  a 
2  fcj 

.s 

09 

0 

A 

.3 
T; 

§ 
fc 

* 
li 
a 

c 

-4->' 

MJ 

1 

2 
a 
a. 

1 

be  very  effective  to  have 

.2 
n 

G 

o 

•9 
3 

s 

i 

"bo 

.W) 

'S 

4-> 

in 

C 

o   0 

a  2 

<c 

c 

CJ 

rH 

;3 

•c 

s 

10 

Jd 
u 

3 

i-H 

£ 

0,04 
B 

0       . 
*J   T3 

J3  'd 
'S  G 

jj  •'-i 

bo 

^C 

I 

S 

I 

4J 

C^ 

y 

•d 

IH 

S 

3 

•d 

•a 

G 

to 

3  21 

«3     CH 

•«    G 

U     1 

"S^ 
•tt  * 

ta 

CJ 

£ 

o 

-4-> 
<H 

aroun 

M 

e 

03 

'55 
d 

0 

G     I/I 

rt    tn 

O'^^ 

§8 

«H        0) 

.S 

.9 

rt 

<2 

0 

8 

c 
p 

t/5 

0 

•8 

oS 

,0 

_> 
ed 

-u 

aj 

^H 

a  3 
M 

a>  ^3 

-    G 
O    ^ 

"o 

i 

1 
a. 

0 

s 

03 

u 

1 

enter  on 

^ 

T3 

M 

CO 

0. 

8 

•o 

center, 

a  g 

(X   •£ 

oj  '55 

s  a 

.s  .S 

8.  « 

^5 

O     >-( 

(/i 
g 

"rt 

G 

a 

j? 

_rtJ 

"jjj 

at  the  c 

"o 

•d 
3 

o 

i 

s 

OH 

*a 
i3 

1 
>«f 

*  <» 

o.-  2 

u   ^ 

^  .3 
S& 

H 
<y 

13 

.s 

M 

03 

"E, 

0) 

•H  a 
|S 

"5: 

G 
(U 
,G 

0 

a 
o 

3 

O 

M 

To  send  RG  to  buc 

ces  the  position  at  R 
As  soon  as  RG  is  ii 

it  x,  and  plunges  in 
e  hard*  An  openi 

a 

X 

H) 

K 
W 

VI 

"3 
.S 

o 

S 

•d 

H 

•d 

a 

^5 

1 

o 

^0 

avy  and  powerful  g 
After  RG  has  been 

B 

2 

1 

o 

,c 

tfl 

1 

r3 
^ 

O 

rt 

•4-i 
§ 

8 

1 

*See  NOTE,  diagram 

3 

.*!  s 

rt 
U 

0) 

a 

& 

:0 


t/:  <u 

,*  y 

y  c 

c4  oj 

5  S 


2  S 

—    ,0 


be 
a 
o 


S 

OS 
w 

v 

J3 
j_> 

CO 

1 

,0 

"5 

<M 

i4 
o 

0) 

to 

u 

S 

•=• 

«    M 

~r   d    <u 
5,  &,  bo 

^  -2  .3 

^  3 

•-5-0 
»  J§ 

y*J  »*"5 

-  — 

o 

"H 
^ 

0) 

.d 

HH 

n  opening  on 

a> 

5 

cT 
<— 
o 
*j 

5"- 
'C 

» 

£j 

0 

CQ 
fa 

1 

0 

_£ 

e8    J"         5    CX,  3 
•S    y    o  '>    rt    y 

s  a  -s  ^.  §  a 

•^  2    -  *S  2  J§ 

s  5  o  a  -^  « 

Cj     *"       S      O     «    *J 

^    «X   .    bfl  aS    oj 

a  2  3  wi!  -3 

.0     *   -   .S   £    5 

>»•«  ^   o   «   & 
^5  -a  S  "°  ^-^  G 

11  out  and  receive 

'S 

to  make  a  forward 

* 

o 

en 

J3 

be 

m 

C 

1 

^ 

n 

"3  fx       ® 

J2  .^^3  ^ 
S'3    ^* 

5  ^  o  *S 

5^ 

o  2 
5  "3 

S 

i 

>, 

u 

^0 

1 
a 

a 

•f. 

€ 

e 

n 
a 

IS 

"S 
jj 

own  op< 

•n 
3 

^" 
u 

3 

.-<         fi*      *H         C 

•g    g  ^    cl 

-a  c  d  ^ 

x  ^ 

59 

0  g 

iccessful 

*d 

a 

o 

0 

^ 
>, 

5 
2 

£ 

0 
0 
j 

3 

| 
-*j 

•a 

M 

2 

ja 

to 

I 

ci 

1 

<j_i 

01 

0        fl)                   -4-* 

>  a,  o  2 
•S  &  **  -9 

y    ™    • 
y   n   %   « 

>  IS 

«  a) 

^3  ^ 
-r  ,0 

pj 

•r. 
•f. 
•r. 

^j 

•n 

be 

c 

S 

^ 

<*H 

nost  abso 

must  be  t 

i—  t 

as 

,2 

3 

o   22   rj 
*j        fli 

'§  E 

^' 

>. 

3 

£ 

0 

2 

•a 

1 

•*••    EH               C 

3    c3  .f    C 

OH  O 

O  > 

<u  S? 

"En 
U 

ej 

'E, 

2 

o 

p 

S 
o 

• 

l 

•a 

o 

3,5  "§  "S 

5| 

1 

"S 
o 

•A 

a 
H 

^o 

o 

I 

C     C/3        "  *^ 

^3  D 

w 

,£5 

-^ 

3 

e 

"S. 

_Q                        «0 

3  O 

•< 

p 

E 

£ 

0 

bC    ""*' 

C 

- 

a 

•s    .si 

^ 

C 

VbJ 

1 


o 


=01 


203 


c 

•+-<  .5 
o  .3 


13  rf    bO 

§r 

8-d  o 

rt    O  ;=! 

t/3     ctf     ra 


*d 

e 
9 
o 

rt 

C 


•o 


rt  ej 
*1  •£ 
•*  O 


45    tn 

O 

oS    o 


•••*  .— -  o 

4)  ^3  X.  OJ 

W<  G  ^^  ^H 

•^  ?i  rt    « 


O         d    & 

rt    J>    5    S 
-  -S  *j  o 


^     oO 

tD    ••-• 


i 


o  a,  a. 
5  S  « 
3/.a 


P! 

00   t/j     <D 

.a  •;  -3 
i^^ 

8i  ^ 
»  .  % 

.«      y     Ol 
^     -"     P< 

III 

^•^•s 

>      Q     05 


_3    S    ° 

5  8£ 

Is  1 


^1-S 

•§  N 

8  S^5 
•§11 

D   "     3 

^^S 

a  P  w 
11* 


-  .-  . 


10  « 


a   o 


« 


p 

.2 

,G 

o 

G 

H 

^ 

H 

bfl 

+j 

'rt 

o 
a 

to 

^c 

^         "55    2 

^          g,^ 

•o             o.    r\ 

F 

9 

be 
a 

'S 

0) 
T3 

be 

1 

"i 

,s 

1 

1? 

.« 

O 
a) 
5 
o> 

darts  ti 

•o 

a 

V 

-i-> 
A 
be 

in  waiti 

2 

rt 

e 

rt 
<u 

1 

.2 

^ 

u 

<; 

•^ 

3 

H  <J 

j-;, 

•n 

SB 

3 

to 

r^ 

V 

s 

'J2 
o 

-4-J 

o 

ja 

e 

a 

P 

(4 

"8 

'c 

1 

4) 

5 

h 

•-W 

c 

•7) 

2 

0 
0 
0> 

-o 


205 


.s 


.C 

bo 

3 
o 

u 
43 


Ml 

.53  a 


q    2 

- 


I 

•d 


•a 

3 

o 


- 


-4-»       S 

d  -S 


X 

o 


«*-i    -s    o 

«-^     >«<    :!:  i— i 


3 

-4-> 

_d 

<y    CQ 

Cj 

g 

O 

_G 

A 


•~j    m 


i«9| 

c  >-  £  "^ 

•—1         Q         1-1         O 

^i      "**      .2       "*"" 

oj  *d  J3    x 


S, 

d 

0) 

<ii 

xi 


«  - 


a   S  2   gl 

s  -s  ^  >.-! 


i  2 


i-    rt  .h  ^    W  *> 


rt 

U3 


< 


:oo 


o: 


" 


'        \ 


207 


o 

o 

3 

o 

(D     D 

•S  £ 

(fl     o 

(D    5 

<4H      "* 

•Si 

0)            t-< 

Q)                1_( 

-d        o 
'55         a) 
<u         g 

•S      -S 

"o 

U3     "^ 
O     J 

2  ^_, 
£  o 

in  the  oppo- 

03 
0) 

'51 
a) 

J2 

<i> 

"2 
'53 

'd 

1 

ct 

a 
IS 

ry  line  as  he 

-2 

cj  *a 

, 

S 

oj  .S 

M 

"*"* 

r^ 

? 

rt 

(U* 

•s 

M 

^ 

tn"    3 
»d    O 

a  *" 

o  .Q 

S     1 

C                   .4^| 

tn          ui 

*s 

_0 

a> 

to    di 
^3  J> 
'o    u 

o 

T3 

e 

3 

^3 
^ 

o 

a 
o 

^ 

a 

| 

•  ~H 

d 

_o 

tn 

*S 

E 

p 

-J 

O 

C 

o 

2 

E 

cS 

^ 

4> 

C 

£ 

*O    ^ 

a        u) 

y 

0) 

c   S 

og 

aj 

C 

in 

JO 

4J       ^ 

4J                   .« 

~ 

•^ 

S3 

J^' 

Wl 

OS 

o 

'w 

*s 

4-J 

3     C 
O 

tn          p  , 

«y            O 

p 

.s 

£  fo 

1 

.2 

be 

% 

o 

J3 

0 

j-l    *" 

PH            CJ 

O 

IH 

CJ 

2    . 

•y. 

tn 

CCI 

o> 

t 

•*•• 

v; 

"o   &• 

3 

'd 

^ 

j>*  5 

'H 

4_> 

rS 

** 

to 

e 

o 

u 

f; 
^ 
» 

0)    O 
X!    +-1 
*J     >, 
bfi-d 

O1    O1    0> 

S'sl 

^ 

c" 

•4-1 

'S-l 

I; 
A 

0) 

o 

•d 

2"         ' 

a 
m 
X! 

5 

4-> 

C 

a 

"3, 

tfl 

O 

- 
U 

•5 

(3 
O 
,4 
£ 

>, 

gj 

'E, 
to 

V. 

;he  field,  keepin 
in  his  hands  rea 

&r*i 

^   ^   otc 

_tn    o  r^    ^ 

a  ^  S  a 
S   o   <u   i> 

gS*  a 

cJ   o  -d   § 

losely  and  solidl 

!fi    tn 

O     1) 

I* 

"75 

-S 

a 

ED 

0 

1 

PH 

a 

t/i 

•d 

01 

0)     3 

"""  .2 

0     0 

^     tn 
O     w 

th  equal  success 

e  greatest  care 

to 

£ 
u 

2  ^ 

,  o  g 

^                r^\ 

4? 

u 

a  ^a 

JH 

3 

*d    tn" 
t-4    tn 

cj    Cj 

'$ 

5 

'C 
U 

in 

•r. 

53 
o 
0 

IS  .Q 

.•£     0) 

c4     C     ? 

•"  ,n  4-> 

!>,§ 

t/3     "tj    *t5 

'C 

S 
i> 

0 

d 
o 

tn  *O 

'"   u 
1  | 

•f. 

£ 
A 

FB  reaches 

cS    >, 

^  a 

S   f 

§  2 

o 

•s  . 

SCO 
0) 

<u  .a 

o 

JH 

5 

4J 
§ 

•8 

8"o1 
*w     ° 

1^  2 

B.g| 

•^ 

*^ 

*S 

0)     ^ 

5  ,a 

4_) 

-4-" 

£ 
IS 

a| 

O     (1) 

a^ 

0   X! 
.fa     ^ 

^  •*-< 
u    tn 

£  •** 

S 

o 

3      t/2 

C       —  •        4-1 

^ 

i^ 

to 

4->     XI 

«  a 

p 

• 

p« 

o   a 

ctf  ^3    -Ji 

u 

,i 

O       y 

p 

fll     "tn 

4)     O 

H 

rc 

4> 

*3  '^    x 

2       0     &H 

01 

•1 

^  -d 

'So 

|l> 

a  J 

O 

rt    §* 

§  §^ 

•2 

j: 

S 

*d 

0 

0)     0) 

•2 

"E,  o 

ti  S 

rt 

p 

o, 

in 

£ 

'3 

?  a 
tn  V3 

IH 
O 

209 


<U 

bo 
•a 

V 

* 
v 

G 

V 

J3 

4-1 

a 

o 

& 

u, 
0 

4-» 

G 
<L) 
U 

•o 

c 

nl 

X 

'7. 

t- 
y, 
'7. 

B 
9 

& 

^a 

_e 

£ 

o 

f 

-ward  several  times  in  succession  for  short  gains 
osing  LG  has  found  the  way  to  dive  into  it  low 
t  the  signal  for  the  play,  RG  allows  his  opponent 
j  ball  is  snapped,  without  resistance,  and  then 
cks  his  man  and  forces  him  hard  to  the  left. 

1  to  LE  (instead  of  FB),  who  immediately  darts 

H 

id 
G 

a 

M    *J 

(i.    iG 

>»^ 
^1     (U 

0)    *J 

c_r  n> 

i) 
1 

0 

,2 

10 

a 
•o 

1 

to 

-j; 

1 

4) 

^ 

C 
0 

^ 

? 

H 

rt 

Q 

PH    C5     S 

-^ 

O 

a 

c 

"+J 

"£ 

2 

§*^-   ^    ^ 

1 

•d 

2 
c 

ci 
-C 

c 

to 

V 

bfl 

"bo 

"3 

OJ 

0 

0 

—i  "S  IS  *J 

^ 

a 

2 

_^> 

o 

^C 

U 

C     0   .5?'Sj 

p 

a 

5 

"E, 

.* 

£ 

U 

-f 

.     -        'C 

c§ 

0 

g 

1 

^T 

fl 

CJ 

'•5 

3 

,{3  "E   S   fl> 

Oi 

fli 

M 

r^ 

rt 

0) 


_J-j    t-, 

§1 


^  5  ^  S 
**  s  ^  -B 


- 


-9 

-a 


6,1 

O 


"*J_ 

-.O 


-o-o 


So   •£ 


o 


213 


'S   fl     >  U3 
ft  en    !>  13 


215 


s-s s 

H  £  § 

••*        *        t-4 


®  C 

rS  03  ' 

|  SP 

•5  "3 

u  c 


•o 
c 


-a 
c 

o 

u 
nJ 

(U 


*a 

c 

rt 
4) 

bo 


d 


9 


-     e     a!     p   ^5     y 
rt   =J     1  -     ^   O  S 


|  8 

l^ 
.2  & 

g-S 
|  « 

•s< 

w 

c8      . 

l! 


•g  a 

5  a 

tn  tn 

.S  o 


'7. 


<L>     tn 


•§  M 

b  ^t 

^  s 

d,   n- 


5  -o 

^H    C    tn 
bo  'S  -rH 

jirf 

-d  ^2   cs 

fl  T3   -0 

'rt  3   ° 

III 

1/3  «  -2 

to   4!  2 

oJ    bo  3 


o 

a 

d    c 


O    rt  ^ 

§  s  s 

s  s  - 

«  ^  2 

£  8  H 

.2  '^  -2 

<u    »  '35 

bo  «  o 

•cffj  o- 

^  tn 

a  -2 

o    d  •/ 

i-|  4) 

"*3  ^-T  > 

|  Jl 

^  J  ^ 

0)    -S  M 


-3    bo 
.5  t3 


°  o 

-S  5 

n3  0 

|  a 

*cu 

0  D 


illl 

.  3       ft 

a5  2  ^S 

u?   S   S   <P 


ill! 

n     °     ^    W> 

*  3  8| 
cSlo^^ 

•"      .9 

« /M  bo  'C 
°^  tn  C  .2 
c  bO'in  f 
6  q  g  >, 


tn    0 

X     CD 

" 


Q  a 


•j-. 


s   « 


0> 


a>   <2 
4-1  ti 
p<    C    3 

•elS 

O     P     H 

*  'rt  5 
s  2  e 

BH  D 

111 

^  5  g 

£    tn  <« 

^  -S  -3 
0$% 

.S    p    cj 


£     0) 


^5 


'd  *4_, 

d;    ^ 


bO       -a 


216 


CO 

tid  center  on  his  own  side. 

nd  tackle  on  his  own  side, 
nd  end  on  his  own  side. 

-d' 

jy 

o 

c" 
o 

c 
o 

Lf 

5 
'c 
o 
o 

'd 

nd  tackle  on  the  opposite  side, 
nd  end  on  the  opposite  side. 

iite  end. 

)etwen  center  and  guard. 
d  and  tackle. 

•d 

G 

1 
^ 

*^\* 

d 

d    d 

<u 

d 

d    d 

UJ 

Q 

_* 

3 

flu 

u- 
0 

X 

UJ 

Q 
Z 

FIRST  SERIES. 

If-back  between  guard 

If-back  between  guard 
If-back  between  tackle 

If-back  around  his  own 

SECOND  SERIES 

If-back  between  guard 

If-back  between  guard 
If-back  between  tackle 

cx 

& 

0) 

J3 

•d 
s 

^ 

S 

d 

4^ 
O 

d 
^p 

THIRD  SERIES. 

1-back  through  the  line 
1-back  between  the  gu£ 

Ll-back  between  the  tac 
ll-back  around  the  end. 

d 

d    d 

ffi  K 

d 

a 

d 

H 

cj    rt 

K  ffi 

d 

K 

pT^      fj. 

fafa 

ci 

4o 

06 

eJ 

4^d 

co' 

«   4 

O    CO 

d 

d  d 

d 

d 

d   d 

d 

J3'   ° 

d    d 

,J 

rc3  ro 

•d 

id 

•d  «d 

13 

•d  -d 

"^   *X? 

c 

C     S3 

c 

Q 

G     C 

C 

c  c 

C    G 

a 

d    d 

d 

d 

d    d 

d 

d    d 

d    d 

M 

co   vn 

r^ 

M 

CO     W> 

t^ 

M       CO 

m   r- 

d 

d   d 

d 

d 

d  d 

d 

d   d 

d  d 

fc 

g  ^ 

£H   ^ 

^ 

^  J5 

^1  ^ 

£ 

217 


£ 

'd    d  ^4 
b  *J   w 

g  T3   5 

p 
be 

and  tackle, 
and  end. 

"*-*  "^      " 

8M     ctf    G 
-M     tl) 

C     C    G 
d    d    d 

G 
4) 

•d 

G 

o 

o 

•d 

G 
S 

S  c 

J2    ^ 

11 

d    J3 

ClT    ^ 

bC     S     rrt 

J3 

*d      vl) 

m      rr-*        t\\ 

^ 

^ 

G    r- 

FOURTH  SERIES. 

between  center  and  opposite 
between  the  opposite  guard  £ 
between  the  opposite  end  am 
around  the  opposite  end. 

FIFTH  SERIES. 

le  between  center  and  opposi 

le  between  the  opposite  guar 
le  between  the  opposite  tackl 

le  around  the  opposite  end. 

SIXTH  SERIES. 

d  between  the  opposite  guarc 
d  between  the  opposite  guarc 
d  between  the  opposite  tackl< 
d  around  the  opposite  end. 

SEVENTH  SERIES. 

-cross  half-back  play  around 

criss-cross  with  half-back  in 

le  criss-cross  with  half-back  i 
d  criss-cross  with  half-back  ii 

13      '^      *^      *^ 

o 

o    o 

••jj 

d    d    d    d 

»J 

•r. 

•si 

^ 

*o    d 

C    C     C     C 

X 

d    d 

-^ 

3    3    3    3 

"T~ 

d    fl 

H  W  W  K 

e>  e 

*" 

O  O  O  O 

'5 

W 

h  O 

W      rf   vd     OO 

N 

40 

06 

vN      ^-  O    CO 

<N 

4 

O    oo 

d   d   d   d 

d 

d  d 

d 

dodo 

d 

d 

C     0 

£5  ^  ^  J5 

X 

J5  £ 

^  ^  £5  <5 

fc 

*d  T3  T3  T3 

•d 

*d  T3 

r^J 

Tj    'd    ti    T3 

r^; 

,  —  ' 

^^   *"O 

G    C    C    C 

a 

c  c 

P 

C     G     G     G 

o 

5 

G    C 

d    d    d    d 

3 

d    d 

ot 

d    d    d    d 

a 

rt 

d    d 

«    c<i   m  j^ 

H 

w   m 

t^ 

M     en   in    r- 

M 

« 

in   t^ 

d   d   d   d 

d 

d   d 

d 

o   o   o   c 

O. 

O 

0     0 

^^^^ 

55 

S* 

^fcfcfc 

fe 

^   fc 

CO     ^     U^    v^ 

E 

CO     O 

(-(       M 

fi 

M      IN      C^     Tf 
IN      IN      IN      IN 

M 

c< 

r-  co 

IN      C) 

218 


0           £ 

0*          0* 

D            <u 

S      Hi 

2      § 

«           3 

^  t  i 

Pt         13,         5 

|    .a    | 

C           Q          T3 
"            <D            C 
^            0)            S 

:nd  in  play  around  the  opposite 

*. 

§• 

0> 

rS 

T3 

o 
ft 

05 

ClJ 

"E, 

c 

;  tackle  in  play  around  the  op- 

-back  in  play  around  the  end. 
ull-back  in  play  around  the  end. 
alf-back  in  play  around  the  end. 

0) 
Q 

o   fs 

?2  ^ 

_e 

& 

w 

a) 

5 

rfi 

£3    **-< 

«S  5 

o 

cc 

O 

EIGHTH  SERIE 

Half-back  criss-cross  wit 

site  end. 
Full-back  criss-cross  wit 

site  end. 
Ends  criss-cross  and  plaj 

Tackle  criss-cross  with  t 
end. 

Guard  criss-cross  with 

£ 
o> 

_o 

'•/; 

1 

.2   § 

O     D 

1     ^ 

EH 

NINTH  SERIE! 

Double  pass  from  end  to 
Double  pass  from  tackle 

Double  pass  from  guard 

TENTH  SERIE 

a 

? 

^ 

B« 

£ 

0 

p 

M 

Feint  run  around  the  en< 
Revolving  wedge  from  a 

c   c 

o5     oS 


d   o   o 

^^  ^ 

rrt    rri     rC3 

c   c;   c 

oj    oj    cj 


O     O     O 

fc  55  5? 


219 


•d 

G 

0) 

• 

<u 

d 

fi 

7' 

-% 

£ 

0> 

C 
& 

•d 

0) 

£ 

IB 

•g 

l  , 

p 

^  *d   n> 

|4 

-rd 

'd 

3 

c 

0> 

^3 

G    §   o 

fl 

S 

«s 

o 

D 

rt 

0> 

a 

'g     0)     <D 

O 

0 

<D 

.•     D 

« 

o 

-     0) 

J3 

*-• 

ELEVENTH  SERIES. 

Lifting  wedge  through  the  center 
Wedge  from  the  center  around  th 

Quarter-back  around  the  end  fron 

Feint  play  from  the  wedge. 
Wedge  at  the  end  of  the  line. 

S-l 

0) 

I 

o 
.c 
-d 

G 

a 
g 

cS 

^ 

TWELFTH  SERIES. 

mass  wedge  through  the  center. 
Running  mass  wedge  between  gu 
Running  mass  wedge  directly  at 
Running  mass  wedge  directly  at  1 

THIRTEENTH  SERIES. 

Free  opening  play  from  the  cente 
Double  pass  opening  play  from  tl 

-M 

u 

*J 

"G 

0) 

o 

0) 

1 
bo 

0) 

O 

FOURTEENTH  SERIES. 

opening  wedge  from  the  center  of 
ification  of  Princeton  wedge. 

.   d 

M 

bo    •    •    • 

8*8 

ci    4 

o 

CO       M 

o 

C<    co   m  r^ 

ci    4 

vd 

1  1 

0   ^0 

o 

h°     H° 

•z 

C    o    O    d 

d  d 

d 

o 

55 

<H 

nd 

§  <5  55  55 

55 

£°  "3 

'd  -d 

•d 

'd  *d 

G 

pr  *x3  'd  *d 

T3    T3 

'd 

^ 

C     G 

2 

c   c 

e4 

c  c  c 

G    C 

G 

c3    cS 

oj    «j 

OB    GQ    OQ 

03    ol 

OJ 

M       CO 

in 

r-    0 

" 

~     n     rf  •& 

11      CO 

in 

w    ci 

O    O 

O 

0    0 

0 

d  6   6   6 

d-  d 

d 

0  ^p 

55  £ 

55 

55  55 

55 

55  55  55  55 

55  55 

55 

220 


Princeton  split  wedge. 

o      c 
J5     ^ 

1      ' 

a5  *P<     ' 

$  « 

s>  rs 

£  CO 
+j 

"S.  >d 

^  ,3 

J.YliC>^E/Lil>.tt.rN  C/WUO. 

Hard  running  wedge  with  loose  formation. 

6 

| 

o 

fcc 
a 

'£, 
«c 

^ 

1 

<j 

0 

O 

5 

1 
rt 
,0 

1 

'^ 

•a 

3 
O 

Guard  through  his  opening  on  the  same  side.  « 
Full-back  feints  a  kick  and  runs  around  the  end. 

1 

Q 

•S 

w 

3 

O 

1     \ 

I.I  [ 

^  °     t 

^->    *&        * 
T3  'a       $ 

13  ! 

si 

a  43     fc 
^5   >>    c 

<S   ^ 
M   « 

O     O 

-•   '— 
2    o 

fc  O 

Q 

q 

-( 

4 
tj 

0     <u 

c  ^ 

H        <1) 

?;.  ^ 
d   m 

L3       £ 

r  *o 
^  i-. 

-"     ci 

L(        > 

CS 
ffi 

C 

ed 

<H 

a 

0) 

o 

a 

^ 

n 
M 

a 

p 

"3 
o 

V 

o 
M 

•a 
u 

fa 

•4- 

d 

£ 
ci 

and  No.  6.  Feint  wedge  and  full-back  between  opposite  guard  and 
t»r 

and  No.  8.  Feint  wedge  and  tackle  around  the  end. 

tn 

T*    in 

M, 

c3 

to 

^   in 

0    r- 

1-1 

CO 

m 

•^ 

O 

O   ^ 

^ 

c 
55 

o 

C     O 

C     0 

£  £ 

^o 

55 

O 

o 
55 

ir, 

r-~  co 
m   in 

o 

in 

,x 

3 

N      CO 

Tf   in 

o 

i  - 
o 

co 

& 

TEAM  PLAY. 

American  football  is  pre-eminently  a  game  for  the 
practice  and  display  of  what  is  known  as ' '  team  play. "  No 
other  game  can  compare  with  it  in  this  particular.  Not 
that  the  individual  element  in  skill,  in  physical  capacities, 
in  strategy,  and  headwork  are  overlooked,  but  these  are 
made  subservient  to  the  intent  of  the  particular  play  in 
hand,  and  so  adjusted  to  that  play  as  shall  best  contribute 
to  its  success.  To  get  eleven  men  to  use  their  individual 
strength,  agility,  and  speed,  their  wit,  judgment,  and 
courage,  first  in  individual  capacity,  then  working  with 
one  or  two  companion  players,  then  as  eleven  men  work- 
ing as  one,  is  a  magnificent  feat  in  organization  and 
generalship. 

The  individual  element,  perhaps,  is  most  prominently 
set  forth  in  defensive  play,  although  there  is  abundant 
opportunity  in  offensive  play  also  for  it  to  show  itself;  but 
individual  and  team  play  are  so  closely  joined,  as  a  rule, 
that  the  beauty  of  the  latter  is  heightened  as  the  individual 
efforts  of  each  player  are  perceived.  In  defensive  work 
the  players  have  more  reason  to  feel  their  individuality, 
because  they  are  often  compelled  to  combat  alone  one  or 
more  opponents  before  they  can  get  an  opportunity  to 
tackle  the  runner.  The  defensive  system,  however,  gives 
a  splendid  chance  for  clever  team  play  in  the  placing  of 
the  players,  in  the  general  and  particular  understanding 
that  certain  men  shall  nearly  always  go  through  to  tackle 
behind  the  line;  that  certain  others  shall  wait  to  see  where 

(221) 


222 

the  attack  will  be  made  and  there  hurl  themselves  against 
it ;  that  others  shall  go  through  the  line,  or  not,  just  as 
it  seems  wisest  at  the  time;  and  that  still  others  shall 
never  involve  themselves  in  the  scrimmage,  but  act  only 
\\hen  the  play  has  been  carried  into  their  territory. 
Furthermore,  there  is  constant  opportunity  for  the 
exercise  of  team  play  in  the  working  together  of  certain 
players  of  the  rush  line  in  defense,  and  also  in  the  work- 
ing together  of  any  two  or  three  players  at  special  times; 
for  example,  when  one  or  two  men  sacrifice  themselves  to 
clearing  away  the  interferers  so  that  a  companion  can 
tackle  the  runner;  when  one  follows  hard  after  the  runner 
to  overtake  him,  if  possible,  even  after  having  missed  a 
tackle;  or  helps  check  him  from  further  advance  when 
tackled,  or  endeavors  to  secure  the  ball. 

In  the  rush  line  the  center  and  guards  work  together 
in  defense,  having  an  understanding  with  each  other  and 
with  the  player  hovering  in  their  rear,  whenever  it  seems 
best  to  try  to  let  him  through  on  the  opposing  quarter- 
back or  full-back,  or  whenever  a  special  defense  for  certain 
plays  seems  best.  Likewise  the  ends  and  tackles  are 
closely  joined  in  team  play,  in  that  they  are  the  players 
relied  on  to  stop  the  end  plays  and  those  between  tackle 
and  end.  The  most  perfect  adjustment  and  team  work  is 
needed  in  doing  this,  for  they  play  into  each  other's  hands 
while,  at  the  same  time,  they  seek  to  tackle  the  runner. 
Similarly,  but  less  closely,  do  the  guards  and  tackles  work 
together  in  defense  against  certain  plays. 

It  is  an  essential  point  in  the  working  out  of  this 
team  play  between  the  different  parts  of  the  rush  line, 
that  the  players  study  most  carefully  the  positions  they 
should  occupy  to  meet  the  different  kinds  of  play  —  how 
far  from  each  other  they  should  stand  for  this  play,  how 


223 

far  for  that.  In  doing  this,  they  must  have  regard  for 
their  own  freedom  to  attack,  not  allowing  themselves  to 
take  a  position  where  they  can  easily  be  tangled  up,  nor 
one  in  which  they  can  give  their  opponents  an  advantage 
in  blocking  them.  Except  on  wedge  and  mass  plays,  the 
players  in  defense  should  draw  their  opponents  apart 
sufficiently  to  give  themselves  space  to  break  through  on 
either  side 

The  backs  supplement  the  work  of  the  rushers  in 
defensive  play,  arranging  themselves  behind  the  rush 
line  at  such  distances  from  each  other  and  from  the 
forwards,  as  shall  give  the  strongest  defense.  In  that 
degree  in  which  they  make  their  work  strong  in  team 
play,  will  they  give  the  rushers  encouragement  and  sup- 
port in  going  through  the  line.  The  forwards  will  thus 
be  enabled  to  play  as  a  unit,  because* they  know  that 
there  is  a  reserve  force  directly  behind  them  to  lend 
them  assistance  and  make  their  play  safe. 

The  backs  work  together  in  special  defense  on  a  kick, 
arranging  themselves,  either  one  or  both,  in  front  of  the 
catcher  to  protect  and  encourage  him,  and  to  secure  the 
ball,  if  muffed;  or  one  stands  behind  to  make  the  play 
safe,  or  to  receive  the  ball  on  a  pass  from  the  catcher  for 
a  run  or  kick.  The  ends  sometimes  come  back  with  their 
opponents  at  such  times,  to  bother  them  all  they  can  and 
to  be  in  a  position  to  interfere  for  the  catcher,  if  he  runs. 
The  backs,  also  sometimes  have  a  chance  to  help  one 
another  out  by  blocking  off  opponents,  while  one  of  their 
number  makes  sure  of  a  rolling  ball  which,  perhaps,  has 
been  kicked  over  the  goal  line  or  into  touch. 

When  one  side  has  the  ball,  it  is  often  possible  for  the 
opponents  to  guess  in  which  direction  it  will  be  carried,  by 
the  way  the  half-backs  or  quarter-back  stand;  by  their 
'5 


224 

unconscious  glances  in  the  direction  they  will  take;  by 
certain  anticipative  movements  of  the  muscles;  by  false 
starts  before  the  ball  is  put  into  play.  Further  informa- 
tion is  often  given  by  the  rushers  themselves  —  often  by 
the  rusher  who  is  to  carry  the  ball.  Frequently  the 
players  who  are  to  make  the  opening  indicate  by  the  way 
they  stand,  by  shifting  their  positions  after  the  signal  is 
given,  or  by  certain  actions  peculiar  to  them  at  such  times, 
the  general  direction  of  the  play,  and,  perhaps,  the  exact 
place  at  which  it  is  aimed.  All  this  is  most  valuable 
information  and  ought  to-be  imparted  to  the  rest  of  the 
team  whenever  sufficiently  positive  to  be  of  service. 
Indeed,  the  team  play  of  the  future  will  not  be  considered 
satisfactory  without  a  set  cf  signals  being  used  to  spread 
just  such  information. 

At  the  same  time  that  it  is  possible  to  gather  much 
information  of  this  character  from  the  side  with  the  ball, 
it  must  be  remembered  that  shrewd  players,  knowing  how 
they  are  watched  for  these  tell-tale  signs,  have  cultivated 
certain  false  motions,  and  are  using  them  as  points  in 
strategy  to  deceive  their  opponents  into  expecting  a  differ- 
ent play  from  the  one  which  is  actually  made. 

From  the  foregoing,  one  draws  the  lesson  to  hide  the 
intended  play.  At  least,  the  play  must  not  be  indicated 
by  any  of  these  signs  which  the  green  player,  and  too 
often  the  experienced  player,  shows.  Thoughtful  self- 
control  in  every  particular  is  what  each  player  must 
cultivate,  if  he  would  do  the  greatest  service  for  his  team. 

Now  and  then,  also,  in  offensive  play  the  maneuver 
resolves  itself  into  a  test  of  individual  skill,  speed,  endur- 
ance, and  head  work;  but  this  is  nearly  always  the  out- 
come of  team  play  in  the  first  part  of  the  movement. 
Occasionally  a  mishap  furnishes  a  player  a  chance  to  make 
a  run  wholly  through  his  own  unaided  efforts. 


22$ 

The  history  of  the  evolution  of  the  hundred  and  more 
plays  in  American  football  is  the  history  of  the  develop- 
ment of  a  "team"  game.  The  perfecting  of  this  has 
largely  increased  the  number  of  combinations  now 
possible  and  has  given  a  wideness  in  variety  of  play,  and 
at  the  same  time  a  definiteness  of  action  for  each  play, 
which  makes  it  possible  for  every  member  of  the  eleven 
to  assist  powerfully  in  its  execution.  In  fact,  the  execu- 
tion of  the  play  depends  on  every  player  doing  his 
particular  work  for  that  play.  Hence,  the  interdepend- 
ence of  the  players  is  very  close  from  the  moment  the 
ball  is  down  until  the  run  is  made,  or  until  a  fair  catch  or 
a  down  by  the  opponents  declares  that  the  ball  has  been 
released.  It  is  therefore  exceedingly  important  that  the 
adjustment  of  every  factor  in  the  play  be  made  with  per- 
fect skill  and  in  exact  sequence,  from  the  beginning  till 
the  end.  It  is  most  important,  however,  that  the  starting 
of  the  play  be  well  made,  for  no  amount  of  cleverness 
afterward  can  atone  for  a  bungling  start. 

Team  play  from  a  scrimmage  should  begin  the  instant 
the  center  receives  the  ball  from  the  hands  of  the  runner 
(which  should  be  immediately  after  he  is  stopped).  Every 
rusher  and  back  should  be  in  position  for  the  next  play, 
and  the  signal  be  given  before  the  runner  has  had  hardly 
time  to  rise  from  the  ground.  The  delay  of  one  man  in 
taking  his  place  might  be  sufficient  to  spoil  the  play, 
whether  that  man  be  a  rusher  or  a  player  behind  the  line. 

As  soon  as  the  ball  is  in  play  the  rushers  must  give 
their  united  support  to  the  quarter-back  and  the  runner, 
blocking  their  opponents,  if  necessary,  long  enough  for 
the  quarter  to  pass  the  ball  and  the  runner  to  get  well 
started.  The  center  and  guards  especially  must  work 
together  to  protect  the  quarter  while  receiving  the  ball 


226 

and  passing  it,  and  then  all  or  part  of  them  may  move 
elsewhere  to  help  out  in  the  play,  or  may  stay  in  their 
positions  to  make  an  opening  for  the  runner.  There 
must  be  the  most  united  work  in  these  preliminaries  to 
the  run.  Irregular  snapping  of  the  ball,  either  in  direction 
or  in  speed,  which  causes  the  quarter  to  fumble  or  to  be 
delayed  in  getting  it  to  the  runner,  a  poor  pass  from  the 
quarter,  a  muff  or  fumble  by  the  runner,  the  letting  of  an 
opponent  through  too  soon,  are  usually  sufficient  to  spoil 
the  play. 

The  rushers  will  do  well  in  the  preliminaries  if  the 
runner  succeeds  in  getting  up  to  the  line  without  en- 
countering an  opponent,  or  in  the  end  plays  if  he  is  able 
to  get  under  good  headway.  They  perhaps  need  only  to 
make  a  strong  blockade  in  those  parts  of  the  line  where 
the  particular  play  is  in  greatest  danger  of  being  checked, 
but  in  order  to  do  this  well  they  must  regard  each  other's 
position  as  well  as  their  own,  touching  elbows  when 
necessary,  or  separating  according  to  the  line  tactics 
deemed  most  effective  at  the  time. 

The  work  of  a  part  of  the  rushers  consists  jn  preceding 
the  runner  whenever  possible,  working  together  by 
strategy  and  combination  to  make  an  opening  for  him 
and  his  interferers  to  go  through.  The  others  follow 
closely  from  behind  to  render  what  assistance  they  are 
able.  This  work  comprises  the  hardest  part  of  the  whole 
play,  for  it  must  be  executed  in  the  face  of  the  strongest 
part  of  the  resistance.  The  rushers  can  block  their  men 
for  a  second  or  two,  but  to -block  them  from  three  to  six 
seconds  is  impossible  against  good  players.  It  is  here 
that  the  interferers  come  into  especial  prominence  and 
value,  for  they  are  to  clear  the  way  of  these  free  oppo- 
nents. It  is  in  anticipating  the  probable  positions  of  the 


27-1 

opponents  in  the  vital  stage  of  every  maneuver,  and  in 
providing  the  cleverest  team  play  to  meet  each  con- 
tingency, that  a  team  excels  in  advancing  the  ball  by 
running. 

Several  things  are  especially  necessary  to  produce  skill, 
ful  team  play.  First  there  should  be  a  wise  selection  of 
players,  and  they  should  be  placed  in  their  final  positions 
as  early  in  the  season  as  possible.  There  also  should  be 
such  judgment  in  the  arrangement  of  these  players  for 
each  position  as  will  produce  the  least  friction  in  working 
out  the  plays,  and  that  arrangement  will  usually  be  most 
effective  in  which  there  is  the  least  delay  and  ill  adjust- 
ment in  making  the  plays  quickly.  There  should  be  hard, 
systematic  daily  practice,  backed  by  a  close  study  of  every 
play  by  each  player  in  his  particular  position.  The  same 
players  should  be  used  together  as  much  as  possible,  so 
that  they  can  become  thoroughly  acquainted  with  each 
other's  style  of  play  and  know  each  other's  weak  and 
strong  points.  In  this  way  only  can  the  fine  adjustments 
and  combinations  which  go  to  make  up  team  play  be 
brought  about. 

Team  play  in  interference  can  only  be  the  result  of  a 
carefully-planned  system  in  which  every  player  studies 
the  general  directions  laid  down  for  each  play  with  a  view 
to  perfecting  his  particular  work,  varying  his  position  on 
the  field  whenever  necessary,  starting  like  a  flash  in  this 
play  and  delaying  somewhat  in  that,  blocking  his  man  in 
one  game  perhaps  in  a  certain  way  and  in  the  next  in  one 
entirely  different,  because  his  opponent  plays  differently, 
sometimes  taking  another  opponent  instead  of  his  own, 
when  he  sees  that  he  can  be  of  more  assistance  by  so 
doing,  and,  in  fact,  doing  whatever  will  most  conduce  to 
the  furtherance  of  the  particular  play  in  hand. 


228 

In  most  plays  the  part  which  each  player  shall  take  in 
the  interference  can  be  laid  out  very  definitely,  but  in 
the  end  play,  and  plays  between  end  and  tackle,  only  part 
of  the  interferers  are  to  take  particular  men;  the  rest 
block  off  whatever  opponents  come  in  their  path.  It  is  in 
this  free  running  that  there  are  frequent  chances  for  the 
display  of  fine  team  play  in  interference  in  striking  the 
opponent  at  the  nick  of  time,  in  pocketing  him,  in  forcing 
him  in  or  out  as  it  seems  best  on  the  instant  (the  runner 
being  on  the  watch  for  either),  and  in  the  runner  some- 
times slowing  up  to  let  an  interferer  who  is  close  behind 
go  ahead  to  take  the  man.  Very  often  the  reason  that 
a  play  is  not  successful  is  because  the  interferer  is  too  far 
in  advance  of  the  runner  to  be  of  any  service  to  him. 
Interference  must  be  timely  to  be  effective.  It  must  be 
the  projecting  of  a  helper  at  the  moment  a  point  of  diffi- 
culty arises  —  the  swinging  into  line  of  a  series  of  helpers 
in  timely  sequence  as  the  runner  advances.  Nor  must 
the  runner  be  delayed  by  the  interferers  except,  perhaps, 
when  the  guard  comes  around  on  an  end  play  where  it  is 
necessary  to  slow  up  a  little  at  a  certain  point  to  let  the 
guard  in  ahead. 

The  execution  of  nearly  all  the  play?  depends  for  its 
success  on  each  player  doing  his  duty  at  the  right  moment. 
Here  and  there  in  certain  parts  of  the  play  one  or  more 
players  must  delay  a  particular  work  as  much  as  possible, 
otherwise  their  action  would  be  immature  and  so  value- 
less ;  but  for  the  most  part,  the  movement  of  each  player 
should  be  quick  and  definite,  and  those  plays  are  most 
effectively  made  in  which  every  player  does  his  duty 
quickly. 

Naturally,  the  end  plays  and  the  plays  between  end  and 
tackle  require  more  delicate  adjustment  of  the  players  in 


229 

the  interference  than  do  the  center  plays.  In  the  latter, 
the  interference  nearly  always  must  be  done  after  the 
line  has  been  reached  and  penetrated.  Here  the  extra 
men,  who  rush  to  the  opening  as  soon  as  they  see  where 
it  is,  will  be  encountered,  while  in  the  end  runs  an 
opponent  is  likely  to  show  himself  here  and  there  and 
everywhere  before  the  runner  reaches  the  line. 

In  all  mass  and  wedge  plays  where  the  pressure  is 
brought  to  bear  on  one  point  in  the  line,  the  team  play 
is  not  nearly  so  delicate  and  skillful.  The  virtue  in  the 
wedge  play,  be  it  quick  or  slow,  lies  in  the  power  to  pro- 
ject great  weight  and  strength  on  a  given  point,  while  at 
the  same  time  closely  protecting  the  runner. 

Every  play  should  be  made  as  safe  as  possible  by 
having  at  least  one  player  always  in  a  position  to  get  a 
fumbled  ball,  or  in  case  an  opponent  secured  the  ball,  to 
prevent  him  from  making  a  run.  Where  there  are  so 
many  parts  to  every  play  in  snapping,  handling,  passing, 
and  catching  the  ball,  there  is  constant  danger  of  a  slip. 
The  value  of  having  one  or  more  players  behind  the 
runner  is  frequently  demonstrated  also,  when,  by  the  aid 
of  a  timely  push,  the  runner  is  able  to  break  loose  from 
the  grasp  of  some  tackier  who  has  not  secured  a  strong 
hold  on  him,  and  so  adds  several  yards  to  his  run. 

In  running  down  the  field  on  a  kick  the  rushers  should 
run  in  parallel  lines  two  or  three  yards  apart,  for  most  of 
the  distance,  converging  as  they  approach  the  man  with 
the  ball,  in  order  to  pocket  him.  The  ends  approach 
the  catcher  in  such  a  way  that  he  will  be  forced  to  run  in 
towards  the  approaching  rushers,  if  he  runs  at  all.  All 
must  be  on  the  watch  to  thwart  a  pass  to  another  man. 

There  is  a  nice  point  in  judgment  to  be  considered  by 
the  rushers  in  going  down  on  a  kick.  The  end  men 
being  so  far  away  from  where  the  full-back  will  stand 


230 

when  about  to  kick,  can  start  instantly  down  the  field, 
leaving  the  half-backs  to  block  off  their  men  if  they 
come  through  too  fast ;  for  the  ends'  first  duty  is  to  be 
under  the  ball  when  it  falls.  Occasionally,  when  kicking 
from  near  the  side  line,  it  may  be  necessary  for  the  end 
next  the  side  line  to  block  his  man  or  to  push  him  back 
as  he  breaks  through  to  go  down  the  field.  What  the 
ends  will  do  in  this  case,  the  tacklers  should  do  nearly 
every  time  that  a  kick  is  made.  Both  tacklers  should 
feel  it  their  bounden  duty  to  support  the  ends  by  going 
hard  after  them  the  instant  they  judge  their  opponents 
cannot  reach  the  full-back  in  time  to  interfere  with  his 
kick.  Hence,  any  tactics  which  they  can  put  into 
practice  which  will  enable  them  to  block  their  opponents 
and,  at  the  same  time,  not  delay  them  in  going  down  the 
field  are  the  ones  to  be  used.  The  tackles  must  bear  in 
mind  that  the  distance  from  their  positions  to  the  full- 
back is  not  very  great,  especially  on  the  side  on  which 
the  full-back  kicks ;  but  while  this  makes  the  duty  of 
blocking  on  that  side  greater,  the  other  tackle  can  afford 
to  take  an  extra  fraction  of  a  second  from  blocking  his 
opponent  and  use  it  in  a  quicker  start. 

On  the  guards  and  center  rests  the  greatest  burden  in 
blocking  their  opponents  on  a  kick;  for  while  there  is  not 
that  openness  in  the  line,  as  at  the  tackle  and  end,  which 
will  let  an  opponent  through  quickly,  the  distance  to  the 
full-back  is  here  the  shortest  and  it  is  usually  here  that 
tricks  are  worked  by  which  one  or  two  men  are  let  through, 
one  usually  being  the  quarter-back.  They  must,  there- 
fore, be  very  careful  not  to  be  over  hurried  in  going  down 
the  field,  remembering  that  it  is  their  first  duty  to  block, 
following  the  tackles  and  ends  as  soon  as  possible.  If  the 
guards  and  center  are  very  skillful  there  need  be  no  great 
delay  in  doing  this,  for  it  is  necessary  to  check  their  oppo- 


nents  only  long  enough  to  enable  the  full-back  to  punt 
over  their  heads.  Whenever  it  is  possible  for  the  guards 
and  center  to  carry  their  men  before  them  for  a  few  feet, 
it  is  generally  safe  to  leave  them  and  go  down  the  field  at 
full  speed  It  is  comparatively  easy  for  the  center  to  do 
this  at  the  instant  that  he  snaps  the  ball.  Generally 
there  is  too  much  blocking  done  and  too  little  "follow- 
ing the  ball." 

In  this  connection,  as  a  help  to  the  rushers,  several  points 
must  be  borne  in  mind  by  the  full-back  in  kicking.  It  is 
not  enough  for  him  to  kick  the  ball  as  hard  as  he  can  each 
time  it  is  sent  back  for  that  purpose.  That  would  be  a 
poor  performance  of  his  duties.  He  must  kick  for  his 
team's  advantage  always,  and  therefore  must  regulate  the 
distance,  and  direct  his  kick  with  the  utmost  skill.  Even 
long  and  puzzling  kicks  are  dangerous  unless  closely  fol- 
lowed up  by  the  rushers;  for,  let  a  good  dodging  half-back 
get  free,  with  one  or  two  interferers  in  a  broken  field  of1 
opponents,  and  he  will  be  almost  sure  of  a  long  run. 

The  full-back  must  take  into  account  the  ability  of  the 
rushers  to  get  down  the  field  in  time  to  prevent  a  run  or  a 
return  kick  and  punt  accordingly.  He  may  find  it  nec- 
essary to  elevate  the  angle  of  his  kick  so  that  it  will  give 
his  men  time  to  get  under  it,  or  he  may  find  it  best  to  di- 
rect the  ball  straight  ahead,  in  order  to  give  his  rushers 
the  shortest  distance  to  run,  and  at  the  same  time  be  able 
to  advance  in  the  best  formation  for  checking  a  run.  At 
least,  he  must  punt  the  ball  where  it  shall  be  difficult  for 
the  backs  to  reach  it  quickly,  and  so  give  the  rushers  the 
advantage  of  a  longer  time  to  get  under  it.  Especially 
must  he  be  very  careful  not  to  kick  the  ball  diagonally  across 
the  field  without  weighing  well  the  risk  involved,  in  com- 
parison with  the  chances  for  increased  advantage;  for  the 
risks  are  unusually  large  in  such  a  kick.  It  would  be  well 


232 

for  the  full-back  to  give  the  rushers  a  signal  as  to  the  direc- 
tion he  meant  to  kick.  This  should  always  be  done  when 
he  intends  to  kick  off  to  one  side  of  the  field,  or  when  he 
purposes  making  a  high  kick  or  one  outside  of  bound  in 
order  to  put  his  men  on  side  by  running  forward.  The 
rushers  would  be  able  to  work  some  splendid  team-play  on 
such  occasions. 

The  question  of  when  to  make  a  fair  catch  and  when  to 
run  is  well  worth  the  consideration  of  the  backs,  who  are 
the  ones  almost  always  called  upon  to  exercise  their  judg- 
ment on  this  point.  It  was  formerly  judged  best,  in  hand- 
ling a  kicked  ball,  to  make  a  fair  catch  on  all  occasions. 
To-day  there  is  a  division  of  opinion,  some  adhering  to 
the  old  way,  while  others  prefer  to  run  whenever  they  get 
a  chance. 

There  are  two  points  to  be  considered  in  deciding  this 
question:  First,  whether  it  is  possible  to  kick  a  goal  from 
the  place  where  the  ball  will  fall,  or  whether  a  punt  from 
that  point  would  be  desirable;  second,  wrhether  it  will  add 
much  to  the  risk  of  not  catching  the  ball,  if  the  attempt  is 
made  to  run.  It  is  clear,  that  when  near  enough  to  the 
opponent's  goal  to  try  a  place  kick,  every  effort  should  be 
made  to  secure  a  fair  catch. 

When  a  goal  from  the  field  would  be  impossible,  it  is 
almost  invariably  best  to  run  with  the  ball,  unless  this 
would  add  greatly  to  the  danger  of  muffing  it.  Catching 
the  ball  necessitates  a  positive  loss  of  ground  before  again 
putting  it  in  play,  and  it  is  doubtful  whether  this  loss  is 
compensated  by  the  advantage  of  putting  it  in  play  unmo- 
lested by  opponents  and  behind  the  whole  team  under 
slight  headway. 

In  attempting  to  run  the  player  will  at  the  worst  be 
forced  to  make  a  down,  which  would  furnish  only  slightly 
less  advantage  than  a  fair  catch,  while  on  the  other  hand 
it  presents  opportunities  for  gain. 


FIELD  TACTICS. 

Clever  tactics  on  the  football  field  depend  first  of 
all  on  the  captain's  possessing  an  accurate  knowledge 
of  the  strength  and  weakness  of  his  team,  both  in  in- 
dividual play  and  in  team  play.  This  can  all  be  acquired 
during  practice  by  carefully  noting  every  play  which  is 
made,  and  giving  thought  to  the  strength  of  the  in- 
dividual men  and  the  value  of  the  play  in  its  relation  to 
the  others,  both  in  regard  to  the  perfection  of  execution 
and  in  intrinsic  merit  from  a  strategic  point  of  view. 
It  also  depends  upon  the  captain's  observing  as  soon  as 
he  enters  the  field  and  throughout  the  game,  the  inci- 
dents of  the  day  ;  the  direction  and  force  of  the  wind  ; 
the  position  of  the  sun ;  and  the  condition  of  every  part 
of  the  field.  All  these  points  are  of  great  importance 
in  good  generalship.  Lastly,  it  depends  upon  the  study 
which  he  makes  of  the  way  the  opponents  arrange 
themselves  on  the  defense,  as  well  as  the  style  of  their 
play  when  in  possession  of  the  ball.  He  must  also  seek 
to  find  out  by  trial  which  of  his  plays  can  be  used  most 
effectively. 

Having  the  knowledge  of  the  first  and  second  requisites 
for  good  generalship,  the  captain  must  immediately  pro- 
ceed to  find  out  the  weakness  and  strength  of  the 
opponent's  defense,  not  by  trying  each  play  in  turn  and 
just  noting  its  success,  but  by  using  the  best  tactics  the 
occasion  demands,  and  closely -observing  the  result  on 
each  play.  Every  play  known  to  be  strong  because  of 

(233) 


234 

the  ability  to  concentrate  or  mass  the  players  at  some 
part  of  the  line,  or  for  any  other  reason,  should  be  tried 
at  least  two  or  three  times  early  in  the  game  in  order 
to  give  it  a  fair  test,  that  the  captain  may  know  which 
will  be  his  most  effective  plays.  It  is  a  mistake  to  keep 
pounding  away  on  two  or  three  plays  which  give  an 
advance  of  a  few  yards,  just  on  that  account,  until 
after  other  reliable  plays  have  been  given  a  fair  trial. 
In  making  this  trial,  the  time  should  be  well  chosen, 
both  as  to  position  on  the  field  and  as  to  the  number 
of  the  down,  and  the  previous  loss  or  gain,  if  it  is  the 
second  or  third  down.  It  often  happens  that  a  powerful 
play  is  discarded  because  in  one  or  two  trials  it  did  not 
work  well.  The  difficulty  may  have  been  in  its  im- 
perfect execution,  or  in  a  neglect  of  duty  on  the  part 
of  one  man  even,  or  it  might  result  from  the  inability  of 
one  player  to  do  his  work  because  of  circumstances 
or  tactics  on  the  part  of  his  opponents  which  he  could 
not  overcome,  but  which,  later  on,  he  would  discover  a 
way  to  meet. 

By  confining  the  tactics  to  a  few  plays  which  have 
proved  successful  for  more  or  less  gain,  the  captain 
limits  his  play  very  decidedly  and  clearly  indicates  his 
policy,  thereby  giving  his  opponents  a  knowledge  which 
is  invaluable  in  thwarting  him.  The  result  will  be  that 
all  the  available  players  upon  the  opposing  team  will  be 
called  from  the  appointed  positions  where  they  had  been 
placed  in  order  to  meet  the  most  varied  style  of  plays, 
and  stationed  where  they  can  render  these  particular 
plays  most  ineffective.  The  knowledge  that  the  play 
will  probably  be  one  of  a  few,  also  gives  every  player  on 
the  defense  a  certainty  of  action  which  will  make  his 
opposition  very  much  stronger.  The  uncertainty  which 


235 

comes  from  combating  a  variety  of  tactics  weakens  each 
man's  defense  considerably,  and  puts  him  at  his  wit's 
end  to  discovei  what  the  play  will  be  and  how  to  meet 
it.  It  also  makes  him  more  liable  to  be  blocked  off 
and  pocketed. 

Sometimes,  to  be  sure,  it  is  fine  strategy  to  keep  pound- 
ing away  at  some  particular  point  or  points  in  the  line, 
in  order  to  draw  the  attention  wholly  to  this  place  and 
to  draw  the  men  away  from  other  parts  of  the  line  in 
order  to  weaken  it  for  a  sudden  attack ;  but  this  is 
quite  different  from  the  limited  style  of  play  so  often 
used,  and  really,  if  well  done,  is  a  mark  of  clever 
generalship. 

The  captain  sometimes  uses  all  his  plays  in  succes- 
sion simply  because  he  has  been  accustomed  to  run 
through  them  in  practice.  This  is  poor  tactics.  If  it 
has  once  been  clearly  proven  that  a  certain  play  cannot 
for  any  reason  be  made,  every  clear-headed  captain  will 
realize  that  it  is  very,  poor  policy  to  waste  downs  in 
the  effort. 

A  similar  mistake  sometimes  grows  out  of  giving  the 
signals  in  practice.  If  the  captain  or  quarter-back  in 
giving  the  signal  is  not  careful,  he  will  get  into  the  way 
of  unconsciously  arranging  the  plays  according  to  the 
law  of  association  of  ideas,  one  play  following  another 
in  unvarying  sequence.  The  principle  of  sequence  in 
plays  would  not  be  fatal,  and,  indeed,  would  sometimes 
be  very  effective,  if  the  plays  are  well  selected.  But 
account  should  be  taken  of  the  physical  capacity  of  the 
players  ;  the  duties  which  they  have  just  been  called  on 
to  perform  ;  and  the  right  time  and  place  on  the  field, 
in  reference  to  the  side  lines  and  nearness  to  the  goal. 
The  great  advantage  to  be  gained  lies  in  having  the 


236 

sequence  come  in  the  form  of  a  series  which  is  perfectly 
learned,  so  that  play  after  play  shall  be  made  in  rapid 
succession.  The  series,  however,  should  not  consist  of 
more  than  from  four  to  six  plays,  as  contingencies  often 
arise  which  seriously  injure  their  effectiveness.  In  any 
case  the  series  ought  to  be  stopped  if  for  any  reason  it 
is  unwise  to  make  the  next  play,  or  if  the  conditions  allow 
a  much  better  move.  A  simple  signal  will  indicate  that 
the  series  is  to  be  stopped.  The  great  virtue  in  series 
plays  lies  in  the  fact  that  a  certain  signal  starts  the  series 
and  each  play  can  be  made  in  the  quickest  manner, 
because  the  players  all  know  what  is  coming  next  and 
are  ready  the  instant  the  ball  is  in  the  center-rusher's 
hands.  Series  plays  are  especially  effective  against  a 
team  which  is  slow  in  lining  up.  They  are  very  valuable 
also  in  their  moral  effect,  because  of  the  rapidity  and  en- 
thusiasm with  which  the  plays  are  made. 

Under  a  varied  style  of  play  where  many  movements 
are  well  executed,  the  opposing  team  must  exercise  the 
greatest  headwork  and  caution  in  its  defense.  If  the 
other  team  has  not  already  indicated  its  policy  by  clearly 
defining  its  plays,  every  one  on  the  opposing  eleven  will 
be  conscious  of  so  much  uncertainty  as  to  what  the  play 
will  be,  that  his  attack  through  the  line  is  likely  to  be 
cautious  and  therefore  not  strong  ;  or  else  it  is  likely  to 
be  sufficiently  daring  to  give  the  opponents  a  decided  ad- 
vantage in  making  their  plays.  When  undue  caution  is 
exercised  on  the  defense,  its  effect  often  is  to  make  the 
players  hesitating.  This,  when  extending  throughout 
the  rush  line  is  fatal  to  a  strong  defensive  game.  A  dar- 
ing, reckless  defense  is  far  more  effective  than  the 
cautious  defense  which  makes  a  rush  line  hesitate, 
because  of  the  moral  effect  on  the  other  team,  if  for  no 
other  reason. 


237 

And  this  leads  us  to  consider  the  moral  effect  of  certain 
tactics.  The  three  most  effective  styles  of  plays  when 
successfully  used  are  :  a  kicking  game  when  there  are 
weak  catchers  behind  the  opposing  line  (or  when  the  lat- 
ter are  poorly  positioned) ;  end  plays ;  and  dashes 
through  the  center  in  mass  or  quick  wedge  plays.  These 
three  plays,  in  the  order  named,  have  the  most  disheart- 
ening effect  on  the  opposing  team,  when  the  side  having 
the  ball  has  a  long,  accurate,  and  scientific  kicker  who  is 
able  to  place  his  punts  well,  and  also  to  regulate  the 
height  and  twist  which  the  ball  shall  take. 

Every  football  player  knows  the  chances  for  a  fatal 
misplay  which  hang  on  a  kicked  ball  :  first,  because  of 
the  difficulty  of  judging  it  accurately  if  it  be  twisting  in 
certain  ways  ;  second,  because  of  its  exceeding  suscepti- 
bility to  currents  of  air  which  make  its  gyrations  and 
deviations  excessively  perplexing  ;  third,  because  of  the 
nicety  of  final  judgment  required,  even  when  the  player 
is  well  under  the  ball,  since  its  shape  and  elasticity  make 
it  necessary  to  allow  for  its  full  length  and  its  smallest 
dimension  at  the  same  time,  also  for  a  quick  rebound 
from  the  arm  or  hands.  The  catcher  must  attend  to  all 
this  in  the  face  of  a  fierce  line  of  rushers  coming  down  on 
him  at  full  speed,  eager  to  tackle  him  or  to  seize  the  ball 
if  he  muffs  or  fumbles  it. 

The  moral  effect  of  having  uncertain  catchers  behind 
the  line  is  very  telling  on  the  team.  If  all  the  hard, 
wearying  work  of  the  rushers  and  half-backs  to  advance 
the  ball  forty  or  fifty  yards  is  to  be  spoiled  over  and  over 
by  muffed  punts,  even  though  the  ball  is  not  lost  to  the 
other  side  (as  it  is  likely  sometimes  to  be  in  such  cases), 
there  is  sure  to  be  a  diminution  in  effort  in  a  short  time 
on  the  part  of  the  whole  team.  This  comes  imperceptibly 


238 

at  first,  but  comes  just  as  surely,  and  ere  long  evinces  it- 
self in  the  more  determined  and  successful  efforts  of  the 
other  team. 

Almost  equally  disheartening,  if  not  fully  so,  is  it  to 
have  runs  made  repeatedly  around  the  ends;  because  the 
runs  in  that  locality,  if  successful,  are  usually  for  long 
gains  often  resulting  in  touch-downs,  and  they  arouse 
the  greatest  fears  in  the  minds  of  all  the  players  from  a 
feeling  of  inability  to  stop  them.  The  result  is  that  every 
effort  is  centered  on  anticipating  these  end  plays,  and 
the  rushers,  instead  of  going  through  the  line,  wait  to  see 
if  it  is  an  end  play,  in  which  case  they  run  out  to  the  side 
to  stop  it.  That  very  moment  in  which  there  is  a  hesitancy 
on  the  part  of  the  guards  and  tackles  in  going  through 
the  line,  is  a  moment  of  triumph  for  the  team  with  the 
ball;  for  it  immediately  gives  them  a  decided  advantage, 
in  that,  while  perhaps  unable  before  to  make  progress 
through  the  center  part  of  the  line,  they  will  now  have 
two  strong  points  of  attack.  The  chances  now  are  that 
the  defense  will  grow  weaker  and  weaker  as  the  game 
advances,  for  unless  the  end  runs  are  well  stopped  the 
players  will  decrease  their  efforts  somewhat  and  the 
tackling  will  become  less  and  less  daring  and  effective. 

It  is  hard  to  say  which  of  these  two  styles  of  play  really 
has  the  more  discouraging  effect  on  the  opposite  team. 
If  the  eleven  which  has  the  poor  catchers  back  of  their 
forwards  are  successful  in  making  advance  by  rushing  the 
ball,  they  have  a  vast  deal  to  encourage  them,  even 
though  now  and  then  they  lose  it  all  through  the  muffing 
of  their  backs.  The  period  in  which  they  have  the  ball 
is  one  in  which  their  minds  are  not  conscious  of  the  weak- 
ness of  their  own  defense  but  are  completely  taken  up 
with  the  good  work  they  are  doing,  and  they  are  unani- 


239 

mous  and  bouyant  in  it..  That  period  of  success  does 
much  to  keep  up  their  spirits  during  the  time  when  the 
other  side  has  the  ball  and  their  fears  are  so  all-powerful. 

When  a  team  is  able  to  make  frequent  runs  around  the 
opponent's  end,  there  is  perhaps  less  to  actually  dis- 
hearten them  than  in  the  preceding  case,  for  there  is  less 
fear  of  losing  the  ball.  It  can  be  gotten  only  through  a 
failure  to  advance  the  five  yards  in  its  three  trials;  through 
a  fumble  ;  through  a  penalty  imposed  by  the  umpire;  or 
through  a  kick.  The  latter  will  be  tried  probably  only 
under  extreme  conditions  where  there  has  been  a  loss  of 
yards,  while  in  the  kicking  game  mentioned  above,  the 
side  not  in  possession  of  the  ball  always  has  the  hope  of 
securing  it. 

That  captain  is  not  a  good  general  who  follows  out  the 
same  tactics  in  each  game;  who,  having  perhaps  worked 
out  a  system  of  plays  which  his  men  could  best  execute, 
attempts  to  apply  this  system  in  every  game,  regardless 
of  the  composition  of  the  opposing  eleven  and  their  sys- 
tems of  defense  and  offense.  The  captain,  in  truth,  has 
learned  a  good  deal  when  he  has  learned  what  plays  his 
team  can  best  execute,  and  he  has  most  valuable,  though 
far  from  complete,  information  for  conducting  a  wise  cam- 
paign against  the  opposing  eleven.  He  still  has  much 
need  to  exercise  his  generalship  as  to  whether  this  point 
of  attack  should  be  assailed  three  or  fifteen  times;  this 
place  a  few  times;  and  this  place  not  at  all,  or  perhaps 
only  once  or  twice  for  the  sake  of  trial  or  strategy. 

Oftentimes,  the  rusher  can  give  invaluable  information 
to  the  captain  as  to  his  own  ability  to  handle  his  opponent, 
where  for  example  the  opponent  so  places  himself  con- 
stantly as  to  render  it  an  easy  matter  to  get  him  out  of 
the  way  for  certain  plays,  although  it  is  impossible  to 
16 


240 

move  him  on  other  plays.  This  is  especially  true  in 
handling  a  large  man  who  stands  constantly  in  the  same 
way;  as  for  instance,  well  over  to  the  side  of  his  opponent. 
It  would  be  comparatively  easy  to  block  such  a  man  for 
opening  up  a  hole  in  one  direction,  but  almost  impossible 
to  shove  him  in  the  opposite  way.  Such  information 
would  furnish  the  captain  valuable  data  on  which  to  base 
certain  tactics,  and  would  inform  him  that  he  could  doubt- 
less make  plays  to  one  side  of  this  man  and  seldom  if  ever 
on  the  other  side. 

It  would  be  foolish,  even  if  it  were  possible,  to  lay  down 
a  complete  system  of  tactics  which  should  be  followed  in 
a  game.  Indeed,  the  wonderful  part  of  football  is,  that 
it  is  a  game  which  cannot  be  worked  out  by  rule  and 
learned  by  note.  One  play  does  not  follow  another  in 
sequence,  but  only  as  the  captain  or  commander  of  the 
day  directs. 

What  makes  the  game  preeminently  one  requiring 
science  and  brains,  is  that  to  be  well  played  the  captain 
must  use  the  utmost  wisdom  and  strategy  in  directing  the 
plays,  and  the  players  to  a  man  must  do  their  duty  in  ex- 
ecuting them.  Very  many  points  of  advantage  and  dis- 
advantage must  constantly  be  borne  in  mind,  or  else  the 
best  generalship  and  results  cannot  follow.  It  is  far  from 
true  to  say  that  the  captain  must  simply  take  into  account 
the  strong  and  weak  points  of  his  opponent's  play, 
together  with  the  incidents  of  the  day  and  field,  such  as 
the  direction  of  the  sun  and  the  condition  of  the  grounds 
in  each  particular  part  of  the  field;  he  must  also  have  re- 
gard for  his  men,  selecting  his  plays  with  such  wisdom  as 
to  secure  the  greatest  economy  of  physical  energy  with 
the  greatest  result,  so  that  no  man  nor  men  shall  be  over- 
worked at  any  time  of  the  game  and  thus  be  incapacitated. 


241 

No  captain  is  a  good  general  who  does  not  know  the 
limitations  in  strength  of  his  ground-gainers,  and  who 
does  not  take  this  into  account  in  directing  the  play. 
Men  differ  greatly  in  their  power  to  repeat  a  performance 
quickly;  essentially,  then,  in  their  powers  of  endurance. 
Some  men  can  do  effective  work  only  when  in  first-class 
condition;  that  is,  when  they  have  had  a  certain  length 
of  time  to  recover  after  each  effort,  they  can  be  relied  on 
for  a  good  gain,  if  not  a  brilliant  run.  Then,  there  is  a 
vast  difference  in  the  kind  of  play  as  to  the  drain  on  a 
man's  strength.  End  runs,  and  runs  in  which  a  consider- 
able distance  is  covered,  or  runs  in  which  there  is  a  good 
deal  of  dodging  and  struggling  to  get  loose  from  tacklers, 
are  the  most  taxing  on  the  wind  and  strength.  Most  men 
can  stand  two  or  more  dashes  through  the  line  in  quick 
succession,  or  two  or  more  mass  and  wedge  plays  where 
the  runner  does  not  run  fast  for  a  long  distance  before 
being  tackled.  But  when  a  run  has  been  made  which  has 
called  for  a  vast  deal  of  energy  the  captain  should  not 
fail  to  notice  it,  and  in  calling  the  next  two  or  three  plays, 
choose  such  as  do  not  ask  for  too  much  strength  from  this 
player.  The  star  runner  as  a  rule  is  the  one  who  suffers 
most  from  overwork  through  injudicious  leadership. 

This  does  not  preclude  the  fact  that  there  are  occasions 
in  the  game  when  some  player  or  players  must  be  forced 
to  draw  heavily  on  a  reserve  fund  of  energy  in  order  to 
secure  a  permanent  advantage  or  to  prevent  disaster.  It 
sometimes  seems  necessary  when  nearing  the  opponent's 
goal,  that  some  player  be  put  to  his  supreme  test  of 
strength  in  order  to  secure  points,  and  likewise,  when  it 
is  necessary  to  carry  the  ball  away  from  one's  own  goal, 
and  there  is  only  one  man  who  is  sure  to  meet  the  crisis  ; 
but  these  are  in  truth  critical  periods  and  are  exceptions 
not  to  be  mentioned  in  this  connection. 


242 

We  Know  tnat  it  is  sometimes  considered  clever  tactics, 
when  there  are  strong  substitute  players  for  certain  posi- 
tions, to  work  men  in  these  positions  to  their  utmost  limit 
of  service,  and  then  "have  them  get  hurt  "in  order  to 
substitute  a  fresh  man  or  men.  If  this  be  shrewd,  it  is 
at  least  not  honest  tactics. 

If  a  team  is  not  capable  of  playing  an  uphill  game,  or 
is  one  which  is  strongly  affected  by  success  and  repulse; 
or,  if  the  opposing  eleven  is  one  which  is  similarly  in- 
fluenced, the  tactics  should  be  those  most  likely  to  pro- 
duce the  exultation  of  success  on  the  one  hand,  and 
the  feeling  of  discouragement  on  the  other.  The  plays 
should  be  those  which  can  be  executed  quickly,  and 
which  have  a  certainty  of  gain  with  little  risk  of  loss  ; 
which  combine  the  efforts  of  every  man  in  the  eleven 
sufficiently  to  make  him  feel  that  he  has  an  important 
part  in  them;  which  bring  the  energies  of  the  opposing 
eleven,  particularly  the  rushers,  to  the  severest  test,  tax- 
ing especially  the  wind  and  courage. 

It  must  always  be  remembered,  as  a  point  in  tactics, 
that  the  side  in  possession  of  the  ball  has  a  great  ad- 
vantage, especially  if  the  other  side  is  weak  in  defensive 
play,  and  that  it  requires  a  greater  outlay  in  strength 
and  wind  to  check  plays  than  it  does  to  make  them.  It 
is  likewise  true  that  the  courage  of  a  team  may  be  meas- 
ured by  its  promptness  and  determination  in  defense. 
If  a  team  repeatedly  and  continuously  comes  up  to  the 
scrimmage,  after  being  outwitted  and  outplayed,  it  has 
the  true  courage,  the  courage  which  would  probably  ena- 
ble them  to  win  if  possessed  of  an  equal  degree  of  skill 
in  team-play. 

What  style  of  game  shall  a  team  play  ?  That  depends 
on  many  contingencies.  Setting  aside  for  the  time  the 


243 

incidents  of  the  day,  such  as  wind,  rain,  and  sunlight; 
the  soft,  slippery,  and  rough  places  in  the  grounds;  the 
up  and  down  grades  ;  —  not  even  taking  into  account  the 
strength  and  weakness  of  the  opponents,  and  the  contin- 
gencies which  arise,  let  us  consider  solely  the  composition 
of  the  team,  and  see  if  we  can  deduce  any  style  of  play 
which  applies  to  teams  made  up  of  certain  types  of  men. 

Without  defining  the  make-up  of  the  team,  except  on 
general  terms,  we  see  that  when  the  rush  line  is  strong  and 
heavy,  the  chances  are  that  they  will  be  able  to  handle 
their  opponents  and  make  good  openings  for  the  dashes 
through  the  line.  Plunges  through  the  central  part  of 
the  line  will  probably  be  the  most  effective,  if  the  center 
guards  and  tackles  are  large  and  strong  men.  If  the 
backs  are  slow  and  heavy  also,  a  center  game  will  prob- 
ably be  the  only  kind  they  can  play  with  success.  And 
the  result  is  that  this  will  be  the  style  of  game  adopted; 
not  perhaps  because  the  captain  has  analyzed  the  reasons 
for  the  ability  of  the  backs  to  make  advance  in  that  place, 
and  their  inability  to  circle  the  ends,  for  example;  but 
just  because  that  is  the  part  of  the  line  in  which  they  can 
make  their  gains  every  time.  Perhaps  it  will  occur  to 
him  that  those  same  backs  can  be  so  quickened  in  start- 
ing and  running,  and  then  so  well  guarded,  that  they  will 
be  able  now  and  then  to  try  an  end  play,  or  a  tackle 
and  end  play  successfully,  and  by  so  doing,  strengthen 
that  very  center  play.  The  chance  for  making  a  success- 
ful end  play  is  increased  where  a  center  game  is  being 
played,  because  the  ends  will  be  likely  to  draw  in  some- 
what to  help  the  center. 

When  the  center  men  of  the  line  are  rather  light,  if  the 
backs  are  heavy  and  slow,  the  advantage  will  still  be  in 
attacking  the  openings  between  the  center  and  guards 


244 

and  between  the  guards  and  tackles;  for,  if  the  backs 
and  ends  mass  on  these  places,  as  they  can  do  quickly 
and  powerfully,  they  can  still  force  a  few  yards  at  a  time, 
and  now  and  then  break  through  for  considerable  gain. 
When  well  massed,  this  can  be  played  even  against  the 
strongest  centers.  All  that  the  rush  line  will  need  to  do  is 
to  hold  their  men  momentarily  until  the  backs  get  under 
headway,  and  the  combination  of  so  much  weight  and 
power  will  be  sure  to  make  advance  when  well  directed. 
If  it  be  remembered  that  the  advantage  is  always  with 
the  side  which  has  the  ball,  and  if  the  players,  though 
checked  now  and  then,  go  into  each  play  with  undaunted 
courage,  advance  will  surely  be  made. 

As  a  general  rule,  when  a  team  has  light,  swift  run- 
ners behind  the  line,  they  should  lay  the  emphasis  on 
plays  around  the  end  and  between  the  ends  and  tackles. 
Not  that  they  should  confine  themselves  to  those  points 
of  attack,  but  it  would  be  foolish  for  a  team  composed 
of  such  material  not  to  perfect  the  plays  in  these  parts 
of  the  line,  because  of  the  ability  of  the  backs  to  move 
quickly  to  these  remoter  places.  Such  men,  too,  are  not 
so  well  built  for  the  hard,  plunging  work  in  the  center, 
and  will  probably  stand  less  of  it,  and  be  less  effective, 
than  heavier  backs.  This  of  course  depends  in  part  on 
the  build  of  the  men,  but  in  general  it  is  true. 

But  even  if  the  backs  are  equally  good  in  plunging  into 
the  line,  it  would  be  better  policy  to  keep  the  line  spread 
out,  for  no  runner  can  make  much  gain  through  a  close 
line.  Swift  drives  through  the  line  can  be  made  fre- 
quently, and  are  usually  very  telling  when  the  line,  being 
spread  out,  is  opened  up  for  these  little  backs  to  come 
darting  through.  But  if  the  backs  and  the  central  part 
of  the  rush  line  are  both  light,  while  those  of  the  oppo- 


245 

nents  are  heavy,  the  end  style  of  play  must  of  necessity 
be  depended  on,  or  the  opposing  rushers  will  be  able 
to  resist  the  plunges.  Furthermore,  it  will  be  exceed- 
ingly hard  to  make  holes  through  the  line,  and,  in  fact, 
even  to  hold  their  opponents  long  enough  for  the  backs 
to  get  up  to  the  line. 

The  question  of  what  shall  be  the  proportion  of  end 
plays  and  plays  between  the  ends  and  tackle,  to  the 
plays  through  the  other  four  openings  in  the  line  depends, 
of  course,  very  largely  on  the  backs.  The  composition 
of  the  rush  line  as  to  strength  and  skill,  especially  the 
center,  guards,  and  tackles,  also  affects  the  proportion. 

On  the  ordinary  college  and  preparatory  school  team, 
the  relative  effectiveness  of  an  end   game  to  a  center 
game  would  be  much  smaller  than  where  the  teams  are 
better  trained,  simply  because  the  risks  are  larger;  for, 
while    the  defense  against    well    executed    interference 
would  be  much  weaker,  the  attack  also  is  much  weaker. 
f     Every  enfl  play  and  play  between  the  tackles  and  end 
I   is  attempted  with  a  much  greater  risk  from  actual  loss  of 
/    ground,  or  with  a  loss  of  a  down  with  no  gain,  than  are 
/    the  plays  in  the  center.     The  reason  is  that  the  rushers 
\    are  given  time  to  break  through  the  line  while  the  runner 
is  moving  out  to  the  point  of  attack,  and  unless  well  pro- 
I    tected  he  will  not  reach  the  opening. 
V       Further,  this  movement  for  a  considerable  distance  is 
almost  entirely  sidewise  before  an  advance  can  be  made, 
while  in  the  plays  in  the  central  part  of  the  line  the 
rushes  are  made  nearly  straight  forward,  except  when  the 
rushers  take  the  ball,  and  the  runners  scarcely  ever  fail 
to  reach  the  line.     The  times  when  there  is  no  gain  what- 
ever and  when  there   is  an    actual  loss  are  compara- 
tively   few,  for    the  runner,    catching  the  ball   at  full 
speed,  is  up  to  the  line  in  an  instant,   and  then  it  be- 


246 

comes  a  question  how  far  he  can  advance  beyond  that 
point.  Taking  these  elements  of  risk  into  account,  it 
would  seem  that  the  proportion  of  plays  at  the  end  to 
plays  through  the  line  should  not  be  larger  than  one  to 
three,  and  oftentimes  less,  even  where  a  team  is  able  to 
use  both  styles  effectively.  The  only  occasion  for  a  larger 
use  of  end  plays  than  this  would  be  when  the  runner  sel- 
dom fails  to  reach  the  line,  and  is  usually  good  for  a 
gain.  In  that  event  the  large  element  of  risk  has  been 
taken  away,  and  the  proportion  of  use  should  then  de- 
pend on  the  relative  amount  of  gain  which  the  trials 
have  shown  can  be  secured  from  each  with  the  least  ex- 
penditure of  energy. 

Right  here  it  might  be  well  to  add  that  it  requires  more 
skillful  generalship  to  know  when  to  use  an  end  play 
than  when  to  make  a  play  through  the  center.  It  is 
only  occasionally  that  the  ball  is  down  so  close  to  the  side 
lines  that  all  four  openings  in  the  center  are  not  available 
on  account  of  running  outside  the  line,  while  it  is  fre- 
quently the  case  that  the  ball  is  down  near  enough  to  the 
side  line  to  limit  the  end  play  to  one  side,  that  is,  to  two 
openings.  Nor  is  this  enlarged  space  on  one  side  of  the 
field  sufficient  compensation  for  the  loss  of  the  two  points 
of  attack,  but  it  adds  to  the  science  of  the  game,  as  it  re- 
quires more  varied  tactics  and  maneuvers. 

It  is  poor  tactics  to  keep  trying  end  plays  when  it  has 
been  clearly  proven  that  it  is  not  possible  to  make  them 
and  that  there  is  a  likelihood  of  a  loss  in  the  trial.  If  it 
seems  best  to  try  the  end  for  the  sake  of  keeping  the  op- 
posing line  spread  out  so  that  the  center  plays  can  be 
made  more  successfully,  the  most  propitious  times  should 
be  selected.  It  should  never  be  on  the  second  or  third 
down,  because  the  risk  of  losing  the  ball  by  failure  to 
gain  the  requisite  five  yards  would  be  entirely  too  great. 


247 

There  are  times  when  an  end  play  should  not  be  used 
at  all,  or  very  rarely,  on  account  of  the  risk  involved; 
as,  for  example,  when  the  ball  is  being  carried  out  from 
under  the  goal  where  it  has  been  forced  by  the  opponents. 
Anywhere  within  the  fifteen  or  twenty  yard  line  it  is 
much  better  to  trust  to  bringing  it  slowly  out  a  few  yards 
or  feet  at  a  time,  sufficient,  perhaps,  to  secure  only  the 
requisite  five  yards  in  three  trials.  Beyond  the  twenty- 
yard  line  and  up  to  the  thirty-five-yard  an  end  play  should 
be  tried  only  on  the  first  down,  or,  in  rare  instances,  on 
the  second  down,  unless  the  risk  of  losing  ground,  and 
subsequently  the  ball,  is  worth  taking.  In  such  cases  the 
possession  of  a  powerful  punter  behind  the  line,  who  could 
place  the  ball  well  out  of  dangerous  territory  if  necessary, 
might  be  a  sufficient  reason  for  attempting  a  long  kick 
down  the  field.  It  does  not  seem,  however,  that  it  is  nec- 
essary to  run  any  risk  of  losing  the  ball  if  there  is  good 
reason  for  not  playing  a  kicking  game,  for  there  will  be 
ample  chance  to  try  an  end  play  on  the  first  down.  Mis- 
takes in  generalship  are  frequently  made  right  along  this 
line  in  nearly  every  game  which  is  played,  an  end,  run 
being  sometimes  tried  on  the  third  down  when  there  is 
less  than  a  yard  to  gain.  Better  gain  the  yard  or  two  by 
the  surest  ground-gaining  play  and  then  try  an  end  run 
on  the  very  next. 

When  inside  the  opponents'  twenty-five-yard  line  the 
greatest  skill  must  also  be  used,  and  the  aim  should  be  to 
get  the  requisite  five  yards  by  the  most  reliable  tactics. 
Plays  which  risk  the  loss  of  ground  and  the  ball  should  be 
sparingly  used,  and  every  caution  and  strategy  be  exer- 
cised to  place  the  ball  across  the  line.  Nor  should  there 
be  less  prudence  because  a  team  has  a  good  drop  kicker. 
The  proportion  of  goals  secured  from  drop  kicks  is  not 


248 

more  than  one  in  every  four  or  five  attempts,  with  the  best 
kickers  in  America,  and  the  most  certain  way  to  score 
will  be  to  strain  every  nerve  to  place  the  ball  across  the 
line  by  steadfastly  holding  the  ball  and  using  the  drop 
kick  only  as  a  last  resource. 

Every  now.  and  then  a  point  is  lost  unnecessarily  when 
the  ball  is  in  the  possession  of  a  team  under  its  own  goal. 
It  is  judged  not  wise  to  kick.  Perhaps  the  wind  is  strong 
in  the  opposite  direction  and  there  is  no  reliable  punter, 
or  perhaps  it  would  simply  give  the  opponents  a  fair 
catch  from  which  to  make  a  try  for  goal  if  kicked.  The 
captain  also  realizes  that  if  the  opponents  secure  the  ball 
they  will  force  it  over.  Two  downs  may  already  have 
been  used  up  and  ground  lost  in  vain  attempts  to  advance 
the  ball  by  running.  There  seems  to  be  no  other  alterna- 
tive, and  so  another  trial  is  made,  but  without  avail, 
whereupon  the  ball  goes  to  the  other  side.  Under  these 
circumstances  it  would  be  well  for  the  captain  to  remem- 
ber that  by  making  a  safety  touchdown  and  allowing  the 
opponents  to  score  two,  he  could  have  brought  the  ball 
out  to  the  twenty-five-yard  line  and  prevented  a  proba- 
ble six  points. 

The  mistake  is  often  made  of  frequently  using  end  plays 
when  the  ground  is  slippery  and  soft  from  rain.  Nothing 
can  be  more  foolish,  unless  the  aim  is  to  get  the  ball  on 
firmer  ground,  for  with  insecure  footing  it  is  impossible 
to  start  quickly,  run  fast,  or  turn  and  dodge  quickly. 
This  makes  it  easy,  also,  for  the  opposing  eleven  to  stop 
the  runner  and  nearly  always  with  a  loss  of  ground.  The 
same  is  true,  in  a  measure,  when  the  ground  is  soft  or 
very  sandy.  It  is  comparatively  hard  to  make  end  plays 
even  when  there  are  no  unfavorable  conditions,  when  the 
ground  is  firm  and  level. 


249 

He  is  a  wise  general,  therefore,  who  notes  the  field 
carefully,  knowing  where  all  the  soft  and  slippery  and 
rough  places  are,  as  well  as  where  the  good  ground  is, 
and  then  keeps  them  in  mind  throughout  the  game,  and 
makes  his  moves  wisely  in  reference  to  them.  Few  cap- 
tains take  the  field  sufficiently  into  account  in  directing 
the  plays,  so  that  the  greatest  advantage  can  be  secured 
by  avoiding  the  hindrances  as  much  as  possible.  Again 
and  again  unsuccessful  trials  to  advance  have  been  made 
in  muddy  places,  when,  with  one  well-planned  move,  the 
ball  could  have  been  placed  on  solid  ground  with  little  or 
no  sacrifice,  and  a  vast  advantage  secured.  It  is  usually 
worth  the  loss  of  two  or  three  yards,  and  oftentimes  more, 
to  make  an  end  play  in  order  to  give  a  better  footing  ta 
the  backs  and  the  rushers  for  putting  the  ball  into  play, 
for  handling  it,  for  making  holes,  and  for  starting,  run- 
ning, and  dodging. 

When  the  ground  is  very  slippery,  all  plays  which  cause 
the  runner  to  move  a  considerable  distance  sidewise  and 
across  the  field  before  turning  to  advance,  and  all  plays 
requiring  a  sudden  change  in  direction,  whether  when 
under  strong  headway  or  not,  are  hard  to  gain  ground 
on,  and,  therefore,  must  be  used  with  great  judgment. 
Equally  hard  to  make  are  the  plays  in  which  the  tackle 
and  guard  and  end  carry  the  ball  around  for  a  run 
through  one  of  the  openings  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  line. 
There  is  not,  however,  the  chance  for  so  much  loss  of 
ground  in  these  plays,  as  usually  played,  that  there  is  in 
a  run  out  to  the  end  by  the  half-backs,  because  the  former 
run  closer  to  the  line  and  the  play  is  not  so  quickly  per- 
ceived. 

It  naturally  follows,  then,  from  what  has  been  said, 
that  those  plays  which  send  the  runner  directly  forward; 


250 

those  in  which  the  impetus  from  the  start  is  more  forward 
than  side  wise;  those  in  which  the  runner  does  not  have 
far  to  run  before  he  strikes  the  opening;  and  those  in 
which  he  can  get  the  greatest  protection  and  assistance 
quickly,  are  the  plays  to  be  relied  on  when  the  ground  is 
soft,  sandy,  or  slippery. 

In  bringing  the  ball  in  from  the  side  lines,  the  privilege 
is  given  of  having  it  down  anywhere  from  five  to  fifteen 
yards  from  that  line.  This  option  of  ten  yards  should  be 
valuable  in  determining  the  tactics  to  be  used  next.  Too 
often  is  it  the  habit  for  the  captain  to  shout  out,  ' '  Bring 
it  in  fifteen,"  whether  the  "fifteen"  would  carry  them 
into  a  mud  hole,  or  whether  there  wras  a  positive  advan- 
tage in  operating  from  a  nearer  point  to  the  side  line  by 
avoiding  the  usual  custom  of  an  end  run,  and  sending  the 
runner  through  on  the  other  side.  Generally  the  fifteen 
yard  point  is  the  best  place  to  have  the  ball  down,  but 
not  always.  The  ten-yard  point  has  decided  advantages 
in  making  certain  side-line  plays,  because  the  opponents 
will  reason  that  the  chances  are  in  favor  of  an  end  play 
being  attempted,  and  will  draw  one  or  two  men  away  to 
strengthen  their  defense  in  that  quarter.  These  they  will 
feel  that  they  can  well  spare  from  that  side  without  very 
apparently  weakening  the  defense,  because  they  are  pro- 
tected from  long  runs  by  the  side  line. 

The  side  line  does  not  enter  into  the  consideration  in 
field  tactics  as  much  as  it  should.  As  a  rule,  it  is  consid- 
ered a  misfortune  when  the  ball  is  down  within  less  than 
ten  yards  of  this  boundary  line,  because  it  gives  the  op- 
ponents a  good  chance  to  anticipate  the  play,  which  is 
likely  to  be  a  run  around  the  other  end.  The  free  men 
who  are  behind  the  rushers  nearest  the  side  line  rarely 
fail  to  move  over  as  far  as  the  center-rusher.  This  leaves 


the  defense  of  that  part  wholly  to  the  rushers,  supported 
by  the  side  line,  and  is  the  best  situation  possible  for  mak- 
ing certain  plays.  Long  runs,  however,  cannot  be  ex- 
pected, and  the  captain  must  be  contented  to  work  stead- 
ily up  the  field  by  short  gains.  After  several  dashes  into 
the  line,  of  this  kind,  an  end  run  suddenly  carried  into  ex- 
ecution may  have  considerable  chance  for  success. 

This  suggests  the  thought  that  it  is  possible  to  use  the 
side  line  helpfully  when  the  ball  is  down  very  near  it  and 
when  it  is  impossible  to  make  any  strong  plays  because 
of  the  limitations  which  must  be  met  in  such  a  situation. 
At  such  a  time,  instead  of  attempting  to  make  a  run  out 
toward  the  end,  or  tackle,  which  will  be  expected,  the  play 
should  often  be  straight  forward  or  on  the  side  toward 
the  boundary  line,  until  the  runner  is  finally  pushed  over 
the  line  and  has  the  privilege  of  bringing  the  ball  in  to  a 
more  favorable  position  from  which  to  operate. 

Furthermore,  the  position  near  the  side  line  can  be 
made  more  useful  in  working  tricks  than  a  point  nearer 
the  center  of  the  field,  for  reasons  which  are  evident. 

There  is  no  question  that  kicking  the  ball  has  not 
entered  into  the  tactics  of  football  as  largely  as  its  possi- 
bilities would  warrant.  There  are  many  reasons  for  this. 
First,  there  is  only  here  and  there  a  team  which  has  a 
reliable  kicker.  Punting  and  drop  kicking  are  practiced 
by  a  few  only,  and,  for  the  most  part,  not  intelligently  and 
successfully.  It  is  a  science  with  several  points  of  skill  to 
be  acquired.  Second,  many  teams  have  an  uncertain 
punter  who  does  not  himself  know  exactly  where  the  ball 
will  go,  whether  far  down  the  field  or  just  over  the  rush  line, 
along  the  ground  or  to  one  side,  and  so  place  such  little 
confidence  in  the  value  of  kicking  under  so  great  a  risk 
that  they  will  usually  trust  to  a  run,  even  on  the  third 


252 

down,  if  the  distance  which  they  have  to  gain  is  not  too 
great.  Third,  in  all  but  a  few  leading  colleges  when  the 
teams  are  evenly  matched,  the  question  of  points  is  large- 
ly a  question  of  which  side  has  the  ball.  (_The  offensive 
game  is  much  better  developed  than  the  defensive  game, 
and  it  is  not  infrequent  for  one  team  to  carry  the  ball 
from  one  end  of  the  field  to  the  other  without  losing  it/} 
Under  these  circumstances  the  necessity  for  kicking  is 
seldom  felt,  and  they  would  rather  take  the  risk  of  not 
gaining  the  requisite  number  of  yards,  than  release  their 
right  to  the  ball  by  an  uncertain  kick.  Fourth,  it  is  a 
fact  that  most  punters  can  not  kick  accurately  if  forced  to 
punt  quickly.  They  are,  therefore,  compelled  to  stand  so 
far  back  of  the  rush  line  that  the  value  of  their  punt  is 
decreased  by  several  yards,  or  else  they  run  the  risk  both 
of  a  poor  punt  and  of  having  it  stopped  by  the  opposing 
rushers  who  break  through  the  line. 

No  better  proof  of  the  value  of  a  good  punter  behind 
the  line  is  needed,  than  to  see  a  game  in  which  one  side  is 
visibly  weaker  than  the  other  in  its  power  to  advance  the 
ball  by  running,  but  which,  possessing  a  strong  punter, 
is  able  to  keep  its  opponents  in  check.  Frequent  punts 
are  doubly  effective  when  the  opposite  side  is  without  a 
good  kicker,  or  is  not  accustomed  to  a  kicking  game. 

The  worth  of  an  accurate  kicker  is  magnified  very 
much  when  there  is  a  wind  in  his  favor.  Comparatively 
few  games  are  played  without  a  wind  to  help  or  interfere, 
according  as  it  is  favorable  to  one  side  or  the  other. 
When  the  wind  is  in  the  favor  of  one  side,  they  should 
be  able  to  use  it  to  the  greatest  advantage.  The  captain 
should  be  alive  to  its  value,  and  make  it  a  powerful  factor 
in  his  tactics.  It  would  then  be  a  question  whether  it 
would  not  be  wise  to  kick  the  ball  just  as  soon  as  it  was 


253 

secured,  provided,  of  course,  it  was  not  so  near  the  op- 
ponent's goal  that  it  would  be  wiser  to  hold  the  ball  and 
attempt  to  rush  it  over.  Certain  it  is  that  a  side  should 
never  fail  to  kick  on  the  third  down  except  on  account  of 
the  liability  of  kicking  the  ball  over  the  goal  line  when 
inside  of  the  twenty-five  yard  line,  or  because  so  close  to 
the  goal  line  that  it  is  worth  taking  the  risk  of  losing  the 
ball  in  making  a  supreme  effort  to  get  it  over. 

When  there  is  danger  of  the  ball  being  kicked  across 
the  goal  line  a  clever  punter  will  usually  aim  to  kick 
the  ball  across  the  side  line  into  the  touch  as  near  the 
goal  line  as  possible.  This  is  intentional  and  is  quite  dif- 
ferent from  the  juvenile  efforts  which  do  not  take  the 
wind  or  position  into  account  when  punting  from  near  the 
side  line  and  send  the  ball  outside,  only  a  few  yards  away. 

It  is  sometimes  good  tactics  on  the  third  down,  when 
there  is  considerable  doubt  whether  the  required  advance 
can  be  made,  to  have  the  full-back  kick  the  ball  across 
the  side  line  with  no  intent  perhaps  of  a  gain  in  ground. 
While  giving  the  opposing  team  technically  an  equal 
chance,  it  is  wholly  with  the  purpose  of  having  the  end- 
rusher  secure  the  ball,  which  will  be  upon  the  first  down. 
The  kick  must  be  well  placed,  of  course,  and  must  not  be 
so  much  forward  that  there  will  be  great  risk  of  the  op- 
ponents securing  the  ball,  and  also  not  so  far  ahead  that 
the  full-back  cannot  put  his  men  on  side  easily.  The 
end  man  on  that  side  must  also  know  of  the  full-back's 
intention,  and  place  himself  well  over  toward  the  side 
line.  Such  a  kick  cannot  be  attempted  safely  when  the 
full-back  is  not  able  to  place  his  punts  with  great  ac- 
curacy. The  occasions  when  the  use  of  such  tactics 
would  be  wise,  might  be  when  the  side  in  possession  of 
the  ball  was  able  to  make  good  advances  by  running  but 


254 

had  lost  ground,  perhaps  through  a  misplay  ;  or  when 
they  had  the  ball  inside  their  opponents'  twenty-five  yard 
line  and  were  not  in  a  good  position  to  try  a  drop  kick  ; 
or  when  the  risk  of  making  the  required  gain  by  running 
would  be  too  great. 

Right  here  would  come  in  the  question  of  a  drop  kick 
on  the  third  down  when  inside  the  twenty-five  yard  line, 
and  in  fair  position  to  make  the  trial.  It  is  safe  to  say 
that,  in  general  on  the  third  down,  this  should  be  the 
play  called  for.  It  is  for  the  captain  to  decide  whether 
the  trial  is  worth  the  making;  whether  the  nearness  and 
angle  to  the  goal,  and  the  quickness  and  skill  of  the 
kicker  warrant  a  drop  kick  in  preference  to  the  chances 
of  making  a  further  advance  by  running. 

If  a  run  is  attempted  without  gain  the  ball  will  be 
down  where  it  is  for  the  other  side.  When  the  kick 
is  made  on  the  other  hand,  there  will  be  a  possibility  of 
having  the  ball  stopped  by  the  opposing  rushers,  and 
a  run  made  up  the  field;  or,  if  the  goal  is  missed,  the 
opposing  team  will  be  allowed  to  bring  the  ball  out  to 
the  twenty-five  yard  line. 

The  captain  must  weigh  all  these  possibilities  before 
making  his  decision. 

The  great  advantage  in  the  wind  does  not  consist  alone 
in  the  increased  distance  the  ball  can  be  propelled,  but 
also  in  the  increased  likelihood  that  some  one  upon  the 
side  which  kicked  will  again  secure  the  ball  on  a  muff 
or  fumble.  The  wind  has  added  to  the  problem  of  the 
player  who  attempts  to  catch  the  ball  these  points  of 
difficulty:  greater  distance  covered  by  the  ball,  an  in- 
creased speed,  and  a  greater  probability  that  the  ball 
will  suddenly  veer  to  one  side  or  the  other  from  the  line 
of  direction . 


255 

The  increased  advantage  of  a  favoring  wind  is  in 
direct  proportion  to  the  strength  of  the  wind.  If  the 
wind  is  very  strong,  the  side  which  does  not  have  its 
assistance  is  severely  handicapped,  and  for  the  time  is 
not  able  to  do  any  effective  kicking.  Even  with  the 
best  punters,  it  is  impossible  to  drive  the  ball  far  in  the 
face  of  a  strong  wind,  and  then  the  kick  must  be  low 
or  the  wind  is  likely  to  blow  it  back  near  the  spot  from 
which  it  was  kicked.  On  the  other  hand,  when  kicking 
for  distance  with  the  wind,  it  is  usually  better  to  kick 
the  ball  high,  in  order  that  the  wind  may  affect  it  more 
powerfully  during  the  longer  interval  of  time  in  rising 
and  falling. 

There  is  also  an  economic  reason  for  kicking  the  ball 
whenever  it  can  be  wisely  done.  It  is  a  good  way  to 
rest  the  backs  in  order  to  save  them  for  the  supreme 
effort  of  carrying  the  ball  across  the  line;  for,  if  the  ball 
has  been  carried  for  a  considerable  distance,  they  will 
be  likely  to  be  somewhat  fatigued  as  they  approach  the 
goal  line,  and  they  will  be  weakest  where  and  when  the 
opposing  side  always  puts  in  their  most  determined  and 
desperate  resistance. 

It  is  a  severe  test  of  a  team's  courage  to  bear  up 
against  a  kicking  game  in  the  face  of  a  strong  wind; 
for,  even  if  they  are  able  to  make  good  gains  in  return 
by  running,  the  players  are  constantly  fearing  a  slip  or 
fumble,  which  will  give  the  ball  back  to  the  other  side 
only  to  have  it  returned  with  all  the  chances  of  a  mis- 
play,  if  not  a  gain  in  ground.  The  effect  of  the  wind 
also  is  to  make  the  side  against  it  think  that  they  are 
working  very  much  harder  than  their  opponents  just  to 
hold  their  own. 

There  is  no  question  as  to  the  value  of  having  every 
member  of  the  team  able  to  run  with  the  ball  when  it  is 
17 


256 

possible  and  wise.  The  more  varied  the  style  of  play, 
provided  it  is  strong,  or  is  likely  to  be  successful  because 
unlocked  for,  the  more  powerful  would  be  the  plan  of  at- 
tack and  the  less  effective  the  defense.  This  is  true  for 
two  reasons:  first,  it  keeps  the  opposing  team  constantly 
guessing  as  to  what  the  play  will  be  and  enables  the  side 
with  the  ball  to  secure  advantages  through  the  variety  of 
its  play;  second,  it  distributes  the  labor  and  secures  the 
advantage  of  fresh  strength,  while  it  rests  the  main 
ground-gainers.  For  these  reasons,  then,  it  is  well 
worth  the  while  to  run  the  guards,  tackles,  and  ends, 
although  these  are  not  in  as  advantageous  positions  for 
gaining  ground  as  are  the  half-backs  and  full-back. 

The  most  valuable  of  the  three  rush-line  positions  for 
ground  gaining  is  the  tackle,  because  from  that  position 
the  runner  can  get  under  sufficient  speed  to  carry  him  for- 
ward against  opposition,  and  he  can  also  secure  the  most 
protection  and  help.  The  run  also  can  be  made  in  the 
quickest  time  and  without  being  immediately  noticed. 

The  end  position,  when  the  end  plays  behind  the  line 
and  near  the  tackle,  comes  next  in  value  of  the  line  posi- 
tions for  running  with  the  ball,  because  of  the  large  num- 
ber of  interferers  ahead.  If  rightly  played  by  a  fast 
runner,  the  end  will  be  able  to  make  good  advances  be- 
tween the  tackle  and  end,  and  even  around  the  end  on  the 
other  side. 

The  guard  is  in  the  hardest  rush-line  position  for  ad- 
vancing the  ball,  because  it  is  impossible  for  him  to  get 
under  speed  when  making  a  quick  turn  around  the  quar- 
ter-back, and  on  the  other  hand  he  cannot  afford  to  run 
out  to  the  end,  because  he  would  be  sure  to  be  tackled 
whether  he  ran  close  to  the  line  with  little  interference, 
or  ran  farther  back  with  better  interference  but  with 
greater  risk  of  loss  of  ground. 


SIGNALS. 

In  the  modern  game  of  football  it  is  absolutely  neces- 
sary that  before  each  play  a  signal  should  be  given,  which 
will  inform  every  man  on  the  team  of  the  movement 
about  to  be  executed.  Every  player  has  a  special  duty 
to  perform  each  time  the  ball  is  snapped,  and  unless  he  is 
informed  beforehand  of  the  evolution  intended,  it  will  be 
impossible  to  render  the  requisite  assistance.  It  is  of 
equal  importance  that  the  opposing  team  should  be  kept 
in  absolute  ignorance  in  regard  to  the  intention  of  the 
play,  so  that  they  may  not  anticipate  and  thwart  it. 

That  code  of  signals  will  be  best,  then,  which  will  in- 
dicate in  the  simplest  manner  the  play  intended,  while  at 
the  same  time  being  unintelligible  to  opponents.  Too 
frequently  such  a  complicated  system  of  signals  is  adopted 
that  the  players  themselves  become  confused,  or  at  least 
are  unable  to  comprehend  the  order  upon  the  instant,  and 
the  momentary  delay  thus  caused  proves  a  great  disad- 
vantage. There  is  far  less  likelihood  that  the  opposing 
team  will  be  informed  by  the  signal  what  play  is  in- 
tended, than  that  they  shall  discover  its  probable  direc- 
tion by  the  position  assumed  or  nervousness  betrayed  by 
some  one  of  the  backs  or  rushers. 

There  are  three  systems  of  signals  which  have  a  prac- 
tical value  :  Sign  signals,  word  signals,  and  number  sig- 
nals. Sign  signals  possess  one  advantage  which  neither 
of  the  other  two  can  claim.  They  can  be  understood 
with  readiness  amid  the  most  deafening  cheering  from  the 

(257) 


side  lines.  It  often  happens  that  the  cheering  is  so  con- 
tinuous at  critical  moments  during  the  great'  matches, 
where  many  thousand  people  are  assembled,  that  for  sev- 
eral moments  the  play  is  almost  paralyzed  on  account  of 
the  inability  of  the  captain  to  make  his  orders  heard.  It 
is  readily  perceived  what  an  advantage  it  would  be  to 
have  a  code  of  signals  which  would  direct  the  play 
rapidly  and  unerringly  at  such  a  time. 

On  the  other  hand,  there  is,  perhaps,  more  danger  that 
the  opposing  team  may  notice  and  soon  learn  to  under, 
stand  signs  than  when  spoken  signals  are  used,  for  it  is 
necessary  that  each  man  on  the  side  shall  look  at  the 
quarter-back  or  captain  at  the  time  when  he  gives  the  sig- 
nal (usually  this  will  be  when  the  men  are  lining  up), 
and  this  will  of  necessity  attract  more  or  less  attention  to 
what  it  is  expressly  desired  to  cover  up.  Every  team 
would  do  well,  however,  to  have  a  complete  system  of 
sign  signals,  which  they  can  use  at  critical  times  in  case 
of  emergency. 

The  following  extract  from  a  code  once  in  operation 
will  furnish  suggestions  which  will  enable  any  ingenious 
captain  to  devise  a  practical  set :  Pull  up  trousers  on 
right  side  —  RH  between  c  and  RG.  Pull  up  trousers  on 
left  side  —  LH  between  c  and  LG.  Right  hand  on  right 
thigh  —  RH  between  RG  and  RT.  Right  hand  on  left 
thigh  —  RH  between  LG  and  LT.  Right  hand  on  right 
knee  —  RH  between  RT  and  RE.  Right  hand  on  left  knee 

—  RH  between  LT  and  LE.     Right  hand  on  collar  on  right 
side  —  RH  around  RE.     Right  hand  on  collar  on  leftside 

—  RH  around  LE.     Right  hand  on  chin  —  RT  around  be- 
tween LG  and  LT.     Right  hand  on  right  hip  —  RE  around 
the  LE.     Pull  on  jacket  lacings — kick  down  the  field. 

Similar  motions  with  the   left  hand   will  direct  cor- 


259 

responding  plays  in  the  opposite  direction.  The  mo- 
tions should  be  made  so  naturally  that  they  will  not  at- 
tract attention,  but  in  deciding  upon  movements  care 
should  be  taken  not  to  select  those  which  will  be  used  in- 
voluntarily, lest  signals  be  given  sometimes  without  in- 
tention. 

In  the  system  of  word  signals  peculiar  expressions, 
such  as  "  Brace  up  now,"  "  Now  brace,"  "  Hold  your  men 
hard,"  "Tear  up  this  line,"  "We  must  do  better  now," 
and  the  like,  introduced  by  the  captain  with  a  few  off- 
hand sentences  before  each  play,  direct  the  next  move- 
ment. Again,  speaking  to  the  left  tackle  may  indicate 
that  the  left  half-back  is  to  run  around  the  right  end, 
each  man  being  made  to  indicate  a  different  evolution; 
and  a  word  of  encouragement  or-blame  thus  be  made  the 
signal  for  the  next  play. 

Perhaps  the  system  of  signaling  by  numbers  is  most 
simple  and  satisfactory,  for  it  admits  of  a  great  variety 
of  combinations,  and  the  key  will  not  be  readily  de- 
tected. Sometimes  a  long  sequence  of  numbers  are  called 
out,  the  signal  being  conveyed  by  the  first  two  or  three, 
and  the  others  being  added  merely  to  mystify  the  oppos- 
ing side,  but  a  combination  of  three  numbers  is  rather 
preferable. 

A  very  simple  code  may  be  arranged,  in  which  each 
opening  is  given  a  number,  and  each  player  a  number. 
The  combination  of  two  numbers,  then,  will  indicate  the 
man  who  is  to  receive  the  ball,  and  the  opening  through 
which  he  is  to  pass,  while  a  third  will  be  called  for  the 
sake  of  deception.  For  example  :  We  will  suppose  that 
the  openings  in  the  line,  as  they  radiate  from  the  center, 
have  been  numbered  4,  6,  8,  and  10,  respectively,  upon 
the  right,  and  5,  7,  9,  and  n  upon  the  left;  the  center- 


260 

rusher  will  be  No.  i,  RG  will  be  2,  RT  will  be  4,  RE  will  be 
6,  and  RH  will  be  8  ;  while  on  the  left  LG  will  be  3,  LT 
will  be  5,  LE  will  be  7,  and  LH  will  be  9,  with  FB  n. 
We  will  further  suppose  that  but  three  numbers  are  to 
be  given  each  time  ;  that  the  first  number  called  will 
mean  nothing  ;  the  second  number  called  will  indicate 
the  player  who  is  to  receive  the  ball ;  and  the  third 
number  the  opening  through  which  he  is  to  pass. 

To  illustrate:  The  captain  calls  "9,  5,  8!"  The  9 
means  nothing.  The  second  number  indicates  the  player 
who  is  to  receive  the  ball,  which  in  the  present  instance 
is  No.  5,  the  left  tackle.  The  third  number  shows  the 
opening  through  which  he  is  to  pass  —  in  this  case  No.  8, 
and  hence  between  RT  and  LE.  The  interpretation  of 
the  signal,  then,  is  that  LT  is  to  receive  the  ball,  pass 
around  the  center,  and  dash  into  the  line  between  RT 
and  RE.*  Thus  any  combination  desired  may  be  ef- 
fected. 

If,  after  a  time,  the  opposing  team  discovers  the  sig- 
nal for  one  or  more  of  the  plays,  the  entire  system  may 
be  changed  by  simply  informing  the  team  by  a  peculiar 
signal,  previously  arranged,  that  the  first  number  will 
thereafter  indicate  the  opening,  while  the  third  will  indi- 
cate the  player  who  is  to  take  the  ball.  The  three  num- 
bers admit  of  six  different  arrangements,  and  the  team 
should  be  drilled  upon  at  least  three  of  them  until  they 
can  execute  the  plays  with  equal  readiness  under  each 
arrangement. 

In  more  difficult  systems  each  play  is  given  a  separate 
number,  which  number  may  be  called  out  either  first, 
second,  or  third,  as  determined.  Again,  letting  each 
play  be  indicated  by  a  particular  number,  as  before,  the 


*  See  diagram  nineteen. 


26l 


sum  of  the  last  two  numbers  is  taken  to  make  the  num- 
ber desired.  This  latter  system,  though,  perhaps,  a  little 
more  difficult,  will  prove  the  most  satisfactory. 

If  two  numbers  are  to  be  added  together,  the  captain 
will  do  well  to  make  one  of  them  quite  small,  and  call 
the  larger  number  of  the  two  first,  for  the  addition  will  be 
performed  by  all  much  quicker  and  with  less  effort. 
During  the  first  of  the  season  it  will  be  well  to  use  one 
particular  number  to  represent  a  play,  and  when  these 
have  been  thoroughly  learned  it  will  be  but  a  compar- 
atively easy  matter  to  change  to  the  sum  of  any  two. 

When  the  number  for  the  play  has  reached  twenty,  it 
may  make  the  signals  easier  to  have  all  the  numbers  be- 
tween twenty  and  thirty  indicate  a  certain  other  play; 
all  the  numbers  between  thirty  and  forty,  another;  and 
so  on. 

As  the  kick  is  a  frequent  play,  and  as  it  is  nearly  al- 
ways apparent,  it  may  be  well  to  have  two  numbers, 
either  one  of  which  will  be  the  signal  for  a  kick  down 
the  field. 

Enough  has  now  been  said  to  suggest  how  a  practical 
system  of  signals  may  be  devised. 


AXIOMS. 

Line  up  quickly  the  moment  the  ball  is  down  and  play 
a  dashing  game  from  start  to  finish. 

Never  under  any  circumstances  talk  about  your  hurts 
and  bruises.  If  you  are  unable  to  play,  or  have  a  severe 
strain,  tell  the  captain  at  once.  He  will  always  release 
you. 

When  thrown  hard  always  get  up  as  if  not  hurt  in  the 
slightest.  You  will  be  thrown  twice  as  hard  next  time  if 
you  appear  to  be  easily  hurt  by  a  fall. 

When  coached  upon  the  field  never  under  any  circum- 
stances answer  back  or  make  any  excuses.  Do  as  nearly 
as  possible  exactly  what  you  are  told. 

Always  throw  your  man  hard,  and  toward  his  own  goal, 
when  you  tackle  him. 

Never  converse  with  an  opponent  during  the  game,  but 
wait  until  the  game  is  over  for  the  exchange  of  civilities. 

If  you  miss  a  tackle  turn  right  around  and  follow  the 
man  at  utmost  speed  ;  some  one  else  may  block  him  just 
long  enough  for  you  to  catch  him  from  behind. 

Never  play  a  "  slugging  game  "  ;  it  interferes  with  good 
football  playing. 

Try  to  make  a  touch-down  during  the  first  two  minutes 
of  the  game,  before  the  opponents  have  become  fairly 
waked  up. 

Play  a.  fast  game  ;  let  one  play  come  after  the  next  in 
rapid  succession  without  any  waits  or  delays.  The  more 
rapidly  you  play,  the  more  effective  it  will  be.  Therefore 

(262) 


263 

line  up  quickly  and  get  back  in  your  regular  place  in- 
stantly after  making  a  run. 

When  thrown,  allow  yourself  to  fall  limp,  with  legs 
straight,  and  then  you  will  not  get  hurt.  Do  not  try  to 
save  yourself  by  putting  out  a  hand  or  arm  ;  it  may  be 
sprained  or  broken.  If  you  are  flat  on  the  ground  you 
cannot  be  hurt,  no  matter  how  many  pile  on  top  of  you. 

Always  tackle  low.  The  region  between  the  knees  and 
waist  is  the  place  to  be  aimed  at.  When  preparing  to 
tackle,  keep  your  eyes  on  the  runner's  hips,  for  they  are 
the  least  changeable  part  of  the  body. 

Lift  the  runner  off  his  feet  and  throw  him  toward  his 
own  goal.  When  not  near  enough  to  do  this,  spring 
through  the  air  at  him  and  hit  him  as  hard  as  possible 
with  the  shoulder  ;  at  the  same  time  grip  him  with  the 
arms  and  drag  him  down.  Always  put  the  head  down  in 
doing  this  and  throw  the  weight  forward  quickly  and 
hard.  Crawl  up  on  the  runner  when  he  falls  and  take  the 
ball  away  if  possible  ;  at  least  prevent  its  being  passed. 

When  the  runner  is  in  a  mass,  or  wedge,  drive  in  and 
lift  his  legs  out  from  under  him,  or  fall  down  in  front  of 
him. 

If  the  runner's  feet  are  held,  push  back  on  his  chest 
and  make  him  fall  toward  his  own  goal. 

Don't  wait  for  the  runner  to  meet  you  ;  meet  the  runner. 

Always  have  a  hand  in  the  tackle.  Don't  "  think  "  the 
runner  is  stopped  ;  make  sure  of  it. 

Follow  your  own  runners  hard;  you  may  have  a  chance 
to  assist  him,  or  block  off  for  him.  Always  be  in  readi- 
ness to  receive  the  ball  from  the  runner  when  he  is  tackled. 

Fall  on  the  ball  always  in  a  scrimmage,  or  when  sur- 
rounded by  opponents.  When  the  ball  is  kicked  behind 
your  own  goal,  or  across  the  side  line,  do  not  fall  on  it 


264 

until  it  stops  unless  there  is  danger  of  the  opponents  being 
put  on  side. 

Put  your  head  down  when  going  through  the  line  and 
dive  in  with  your  whole  weight. 

Call  "down"  loudly,  but  not  until  it  is  impossible  to 
make  further  advances. 

Squeeze  the  ball  tightly  when  tackled,  or  when  going 
through  the  line. 

Never  under  any  circumstances  give  up  because  the 
other  side  seems  to  be  superior.  They  may  weaken  at 
any  moment,  or  a  valuable  player  be  ruled  off  or  tem- 
porarily disabled.  Let  each  man  encourage  the  others 
on  the  team  by  monosyllables  and  keep  up  a  "  team 
enthusiasm." 

Be  the  first  man  down  the  field  on  a  kick. 

Block  your  men  hard  when  the  opponents  have  the 
ball. 

Tear  up  the  line,  break  through  and  stop  every  kick 
that  is  made. 

Never  take  your  eyes  off  the  ball  after  the  signal  has 
been  given,  if  you  are  a  man  behind  the  line. 

Do  not  be  contented  with  a  superficial  reading  on  foot- 
ball, but  study  it  carefully,  if  you  would  master  it. 


RULES  ADOPTED 

BY   THE 

AMERICA*  INTERCOLLEGIATE  FOOTBALL  ASSOCIATION 

FOR    1893. 


(Copyrighted  and  printed  by  permission  of  A.  G.  Spaulding 
&  Bros.) 

RULE  i.  (a)  A  drop-kick  is  madfe  by  letting  the  ball 
fall  from  the  hands  and  kicking  it  at  the  very  instant  it 
rises. 

(b)  A  place-kick  is  made   by  kicking  the  ball  after  it 
has  been  placed  on  the  ground. 

(c)  A  punt  is  made  by  letting  the  ball  fall  from  the 
hands  and  kicking  it  before  it  touches  the  ground. 

(d)  Kick-off  is  a  place-kick  from  the  center  of  the  field 
of  play,  and  cannot  score  a  goal. 

(e)  Kick-out  is  a  drop-kick,  or  place-kick,  by  a  player 
of  the  side  which  has  touched  the  ball  down  in  their  own 
goal,  or  into  whose  touch-in-goal  the  ball  has  gone,  and 
cannot  score  a  goal.    (See  Rules  32  and  34.) 

(f)  A  free-kick  is  one  where  the  opponents  are  re- 
strained by  rule. 

RULE  2.     (a)  In  touch  means  out  of  bounds. 
(b)  A  fair  is  putting  the  ball  in  play  from  touch. 


NOTE.    The  ball  adopted  and  used  by  the  American  Intercol- 
legiate Association  is  the  "  Spaulding  J."  ball. 

(265) 


266 

RULE  3.     A  foul  is  any  violation  of  a  rule. 

RULE  4.  (a)  A  touch-down  is  made  when  the  ball  is 
carried,  kicked,  or  passed  across  the  goal  line  and  there 
held,  either  in  goal  or  touch-in-goal.  The  point  where  the 
touch-down  scores,  however,  is  not  necessarily  where  the 
ball  is  carried  across  the  line,  but  where  the  ball  is  fairly 
held  or  called  "  down." 

(£)  A  safety  is  made  when  a  player  guarding  his  goal 
receives  the  ball  from  a  player  of  his  own  side,  either  by 
a  pass,  kick,  or  a  snap-back,  and  then  touches  it  down 
behind  his  goal  line,  or  when  he  himself  carries  the  ball 
across  his  own  goal  line  and  touches  it  down,  or  when  he 
puts  the  ball  into  his  own  touch-in-goal,  or  when  the  ball, 
being  kicked  by  one  of  his  own  side,  bounds  back  from 
an  opponent  across  the  goal  line  and  he  then  touches  it 
down. 

(c)  A  touch-back  is  made  when  a  player  touches  the 
ball  to  the  ground  behind  his  own  goal,  the  impetus  which 
sent  the  ball  across  the  line  having  been  received  from  an 
opponent. 

RULE  5.  A  punt-out  is  a  punt  made  by  a  player  of  the 
side  which  has  made  a  touch-down  in  their  opponents' 
goal  to  another  of  his  own  side  for  a  fair  catch. 

RULE  6.  A  goal  may  be  obtained  by  kicking  the  ball 
in  any  way  except  a  punt  from  the  field  of  play  (without 
touching  the  ground,  or  dress,  or  person  of  any  player 
after  the  kick)  over  the  cross-bar  or  post  of  opponents' 
goal. 

RULE  7.  A  scrimmage  takes  place  when  the  holder  of 
the  ball  puts  it  down  on  the  ground,  and  puts  it  in  play 
by  kicking  it  or  snapping  it  back. 

RULE  8.  A  fair  catch  is  a  catch  made  direct  from  a 
kick  by  one  of  the  opponents,  or  from  a  punt-out  by  one 


267 

of  the  same  side,  provided  the  catcher  made  a  mark  with 
his  heel  at  the  spot  where  he  has  made  the  catch,  and  no 
other  of  his  side  touch  the  ball.  If  the  catcher,  after 
making  his  mark,  be  deliberately  thrown  to  the  ground 
by  an  opponent,  he  shall  be  given  five  yards,  unless  this 
carries  the  ball  across  the  goal  line. 

RULE  9.  Charging  is  rushing  forward  to  seize  the  ball 
or  tackle  a  player. 

RULE  10.  Interference  is  using  the  hands  or  arms  in 
any  way  to  obstruct  or  hold  a  player  who  has  not  the  ball. 
This  does  not  apply  to  the  man  running  with  the  ball. 

RULE  ii.     The  ball  is  dead: 

I.  When  the  holder  has  cried  down,  or  when  the  referee 
has  cried  down,  or  when  the  umpire  has  called  foul. 

II.  When  a  goal  has  been  obtained. 

III.  When  it  has  gone  into  touch,  or  touch-in-goal,  ex- 
cept for  punt-out. 

IV.  When  a  touch-down  or  safety  has  been  made. 

V.  When  a  fair  catch  has  been  heeled.     No  play  can 
be  made  while  the  ball  is  dead,  except  to  put  in  play  by 
rule. 

RULE  12.  The  grounds  must  be  330  feet  in  length  and 
1 60  feet  in  width,  with  a  goal  place  in  the  middle  of  each 
goal  line,  composed  of  two  upright  posts,  exceeding  20 
feet  in  height,  and  placed  18  feet  6  inches  apart,  with 
cross-bar  10  feet  from  the  ground. 

RULE  13.  The  game  shall  be  played  by  teams  of  eleven 
men  each,  and  in  case  of  a  disqualified  or  injured  player 
a  substitute  shall  take  his  place.  Nor  shall  the  disqualified 
or  injured  player  return  to  further  participation  in  the 
game. 

Amendment  adopted  at  a  special  meeting  of  the  Inter- 
collegiate Association,  1893:  "  No  member  of  a  graduate 


268 

department,  nor  a  special  student  shall  be  allowed  to 
play,  nor  any  undergraduate  who  has  registered  or 
attended  lectures  or  recitations  at  any  other  university  or 
college  nor  by  any  undergraduate  who  is  not  pursuing  a 
course  requiring  for  a  degree  an  attendance  of  at  least 
three  years." 

RULE  14.  There  shall  be  an  umpire  and  a  referee.  No 
man  shall  act  as  an  umpire  who  is  an  alumnus  of  either 
of  the  competing  colleges.  The  umpires  shall  be  nomi- 
nated and  elected  by  the  Advisory  Committee.  The 
referee  shall  be  chosen  by  the  two  captains  of  the  oppos- 
ing teams  in  each  game,  except  in  case  of  disagreement, 
when  the  choice  shall  be  referred  to  the  Advisory  Com- 
mittee, whose  decision  shall  be  final.  All  the  referees 
and  umpires  shall  be  permanently  elected  and  assigned 
on  or  before  the  third  Saturday  in  October  in  each  year. 

RULE  15.  (a)  The  umpire  is  the  judge  for  the  players, 
and  his  decision  is  final  regarding  fouls  and  unfair  tactics. 

(b)  The  referee  is  judge  for  the  ball,  and  his  decision  is 
final  in  all  points  not  covered  by  the  umpire. 

(c)  Both  umpire  and  referee  shall  use  whistles  to  indi- 
cate cessation  of  play  on  fouls  and  downs.     The  referee 
shall  use  a  stop-watch  in  timing  the  game. 

(d)  The  umpire  shall  permit  no  coaching,  either  by 
substitutes,  coaches,  or  any  one  inside  the  ropes.     If  such 

„  coaching  occur  he  shall  warn  the  offender,  and  upon  the 
second  offense  must  have  him  sent  behind  the  ropes  for 
the  remainder  of  the  game. 

RULE  16.  (a)  The  time  of  a  game  is  an  hour  and  a 
half,  each  side  playing  forty-five  minutes  from  each  goal. 
There  shall  be  ten  minutes'  intermission  between  the  two 
halves.  The  game  shall  be  decided  by  the  score  of  even 
halves.  Either  side  refusing  to  play  after  ordered  to  by 


269 

the  referee,  shall  forfeit  the  game.  This  shall  also  apply 
to  refusing  to  commence  the  game  when  ordered  to  by 
the  referee.  The  referee  shall  notify  the  captains  of  the 
time  remaining,  not  more  than  ten,  nor  less  than  five, 
minutes  from  the  end  of  each  half. 

(b)  Time  shall  not  be  called  for  the  end  of  a  three- 
quarter  until  the  ball  is  dead ;  and  in  the  case  of  a  try-at- 
goal  from  a  touch-down  the  try  shall  be  allowed.  Time 
shall  be  taken  out  while  the  ball  is  being  brought  out, 
either  for  a  try,  kick-out,  or  kick-off. 

RULE  17.  No  one  wearing  projecting  nails  or  iron 
plates  on  his  shoes,  or  any  metal  substance  upon  his  per- 
son, shall  be  allowed  to  play  in  a  match.  No  sticky  or 
greasy  substance  shall  be  used  on  the  person  of  players. 

RULE  18.  The  ball  goes  into  touch  when  it  crosses  the 
side  line,  or  when  the  holder  puts  part  of  either  foot 
across  or  on  that  line.  The  touch  line  is  in  touch,  and 
the  goal  line  in  goal. 

RULE  19.  The  captains  shall  toss  up  before  the  com- 
mencement of  the  match,  and  the  winner  of  the  toss  shall 
have  his  choice  of  goal  or  of  kick-off.  The  same  side 
shall  not  kick  off  in  two  successive  halves. 

RULE  20.  The  ball  shall  be  kicked  off  at  the  begin- 
ning of  each  half;  and  whenever  a  goal  has  been  ob- 
tained, the  side  which  has  lost  it  shall  kick  off.  (See 
Rules  32  and  34.) 

RULE  21.  A  player  who  has  made  and  claimed  a  fair 
catch  shall  tak"e  a  drop-kick,  or  a  punt,  or  place  the  ball 
for  a  place-kick.  The  opponents  may  come  up  to  the 
catcher's  mark,  and  the  ball  must  be  kicked  from  some 
spot  behind  that  mark  on  a  parallel  to  touch  line. 

RULE  22.  The  side  which  has  a  free-kick  must  be  be- 
hind the  ball  when  it  is  kicked.  At  kick-off  the  opposite 


270 

side  must  stand  at  least  ten  yards  in  front  of  the  ball 
until  it  is  kicked. 

RULE  23.  Charging  is  lawful  for  opponents  if  a  pun- 
ter advances  beyond  his  line,  or  in  case  of  a  place-kick, 
immediately  the  ball  is  put  in  play  by  touching  the 
ground.  In  case  of  a  punt-out,  not  till  ball  is  kicked. 

RULE  24.  (a)  A  player  is  put  off  side,  if,  during  a 
scrimmage  he  gets  in  front  of  the  ball,  or  if  the  ball  has 
been  last  touched  by  his  own  side  behind  him.  It  is  im- 
possible for  a  player  to  be  off  side  in  his  own  goal.  No 
player  when  off  side  shall  touch  the  ball,  or  interrupt, 
or  obstruct  opponent  with  his  hands  or  arms  until  again 
on  side. 

(b)  A  player  being  off  side  is  put  on  side  when  the  ball 
has  touched  an  opponent,  or  when  one  of  his  own  side 
has  run  in  front  of  him,  either  with  the  ball,  or  having 
touched  it  when  behind  him. 

(c)  If  a  player  when  off  side  touches  the  ball  inside  the 
opponents'  five-yard  line,  the  ball  shall  go  as  a  touch- 
back  to  the  opponents. 

RULE  25.  No  player  shall  lay  his  hands  upon,  or  in- 
terfere by  use  of  hands  or  arms,  with  an  opponent,  unless 
he  has  the  ball.  The  side  which  has  the  ball  can  only  in- 
terfere with  the  body.  The  side  which  has  not  the  ball 
can  use  the  hands  and  arms,  as  heretofore. 

RULE  26.  (a)  A  foul  shall  be,,  gran  ted  for  intentional 
delay  of  game,  off  side  play,  or  holding  an  opponent, 
unless  he  has  the  ball.  No  delay  arising  from  any  cause 
whatsoever  shall  continue  more  than  five  minutes. 

(b)  The  penalty  for  fouls  and  violation  of  rules,  except 
otherwise  provided,  shall  be  a  down  for  the  other  side; 
or,  if  the  side  making  the  foul  has  not  the  ball,  five  yards 
to  the  opponents. 


RULE  27.  (a)  A  player  shall  be  disqualified  for  unnec- 
essary roughness,  hacking  or  striking  with  closed  fist. 

(b)  For  the  offenses  of  throttling,  tripping  up  or  inten- 
tional tackling  below  the  knees,  the  opponents  shall  re- 
ceive twenty-five  yards,  or  a  free-kick,  at  their  option.  In 
case,  however,  the  twenty-five  yards  would  carry  the 
ball  across  the  goal  line  they  can  have  half  the  distance 
from  the  spot  of  the  offense  to  the  goal  line,  and  shall  not 
be  allowed  a  free-kick. 

RULE  28.  A  player  may  throw  or  pass  the  ball  in  any 
direction  except  towards  opponents'  goal.  If  the  ball  be 
batted  in  any  direction  or  thrown  forward  it  shall  go 
down  on  the  spot  to  opponents. 

RULE  29.  If  a  player  when  off  side  interferes  with 
an  opponent  trying  for  a  fair  catch,  by  touching  him  or 
the  ball,  or  waving  his  hat  or  hands,  the  opponent  may 
have  a  free-kick,  or  down,  where  the  interference  oc- 
curred. 

RULE  30.  (a)  If  a  player  having  the  ball  be  tackled 
and  the  ball  fairly  held,  the  man  so  tackling  shall  cry 
"  held,"  the  one  so  tackled  must  cry  "  down,"  and  some 
player  of  his  side  put  it  down  for  a  scrimmage.  The 
snapper  back  and  the  man  opposite  him  cannot  pick  out 
the  ball  with  the  hand  until  it  touch  a  third  man;  nor  can 
the  opponents  interfere  with  the  snapper-back  by  touch- 
ing the  ball  until  it  is  actually  put  in  play.  Infringement 
of  this  nature  shall  give  the  side  having  the  ball  five 
yards  at  every  such  offense.  The  snapper-back  is  en- 
titled to  full  and  undisturbed  possession  of  the  ball.  If 
the  snapper-back  be  off  side  in  the  act  of  snapping  back, 
the  ball  must  be  snapped  again;  and  if  this  occurs  three 
times  on  same  down,  the  ball  goes  to  opponents.  The 
man  who  first  receives  the  ball,  when  snapped  back  from 


272 

a  down,  or  thrown  back  from  a  fair,  shall  not  carry  the 
ball  forward  under  any  circumstances  whatever.  If,  in 
three  consecutive  fairs  and  downs,  unless  the  ball  cross 
the  goal  line,  a  team  shall  not  have  advanced  the  ball 
five  or  taken  it  back  twenty  yards,  it  shall  go  to  the  op- 
ponents on  spot  of  fourth.  "  Consecutive  "  means  with- 
out leaving  the  hands  of  the  side  holding  it,  and  by  a 
kick  giving  opponents  fair  and  equal  chance  of  gaining 
possession  of  it.  When  the  referee,  or  umpire,  has  given 
a  side  five  yards,  the  following  down  shall  be  counted 
the  first  down. 

(b)  The  man  who  puts  the  ball  in  play  in  a  scrimmage 
cannot  pick  it  up  until  it  has  touched  some  third  man. 
"  Third  man  "  means  any  other  player  than  the  one  put- 
ting the  ball  in  play  and  the  man  opposite  him. 

RULE  31.  If  the  ball  goes  into  touch,  whether  it  bounds 
back  or  not,  a  player  on  the  side  which  touches  it  down 
must  bring  it  to  the  spot  where  the  line  was  crossed,  and 
there  either 

I.  Bound  the  ball  in  the  field  of  play  or  touch  it  in  with 
both  hands  at  right  angles  to  the  touch  line,  and  then  run 
with  it,  kick  it,  or  throw  it  back;  or 

II.  Throw  it  out  at  right  angles  to  the  touch  line;  or 

III.  Walk  out  with  it  at  right  angles  to  touch  line  any 
distance  not  less  than  five  nor  more  than  fifteen  yards,  and 
there  put  it  down,  first  declaring  how  far  he  intends  walk- 
ing.    The  man  who  puts  the  ball  in  must  face  field  or  op- 
ponents' goal,  and  he  alone  can  have  his  foot  outside 
touch  line.     Any  one  except  him  who  puts  his  hands  or 
feet  beween  the  ball  and  his  opponents'  goal  is  off  side.    If 
it  be  not  thrown  out  at  right  angles  either  side  may  claim 
it  thrown  over  again,  and  if  it  fail  to  be  put  in  play  fairly 
in  three  trials  it  shall  go  to  the  opponents. 


273 

RULE  32.  A  side  which  has  made  a  touchdown  in  their 
opponents' goal  must  try  at  goal,  either  by  a  place-kick  or 
a  punt-out.  If  the  goal  be  missed  the  ball  shall  go  as  a 
kick-off  at  the  center  of  the  field  to  the  defenders  of  the 
goal. 

RULE  33.  (a)  If  the  try  be  by  a  place-kick,  a  player  of 
the  side  which  has  touched  the  ball  down  shall  bring  it  up 
to  the  goal  line,  and,  making  a  mark  opposite  the  spot 
where  it  was  touched  down,  bring  it  out  at  right  angles  to 
the  goal  line  such  distance  as  he  thinks  proper,  and  there 
place  it  for  another  of  his  side  to  kick.  The  opponents 
must  remain  behind  their  goal  line  until  the  ball  has  been 
placed  on  the  ground. 

(b)  The  placer  in  a  try-at-goal  may  be  off  side  or  in 
touch  without  vitiating  the  kick. 

RULE  34.  If  the  try  be  by  a  punt-out  the  punter  shall 
bring  the  ball  up  to  the  goal  line,  and,  making  a  mark  op- 
posite the  spot  where  it  was  touched  down,  punt  out  from 
any  spot  behind  line  of  goal  and  not  nearer  the  goal  post 
than  such  mark,  to  another  of  his  side,  all  of  whom  must 
stand  outside  of  goal  line  not  less  than  fifteen  feet.  If  the 
touchdown  was  made  in  touch-in-goal  the  punt-out  shall 
be  made  from  the  intersection  of  the  goal  and  touch  lines. 
The  opponents  may  line  up  anywhere  on  the  goal  line  ex- 
cept space  of  five  feet  on  each  side  of  punter's  mark,  but 
cannot  interfere  with  punter,  nor  can  he  touch  the  ball 
after  kicking  it  until  it  touch  some  other  player.  If  a  fair 
catch  be  made  from  a  punt-out  the  mark  shall  serve  to  de- 
termine positions  as  the  mark  of  any  fair  catch.  If  a 
fair  catch  be  not  made  on  the  first  attempt  the  ball  shall 
be  punted  over  again,  and  if  a  fair  catch  be  not  made  on 
the  second  attempt  the  ball  shall  go  as  a  kick-off  at  the 
center  of  the  field  to  the  defenders  of  the  goal. 


274 

RULE  35.  A  side  which  has  made  a  touch  back  or  a 
safety  must  kick  out,  except  as  otherwise  provided  (see 
rule  32),  from  not  more  than  twenty-five  yards  outside  the 
kicker's  goal.  If  the  ball  go  into  touch  before  striking  a 
player  it  must  be  kicked  out  again,  and  if  this  occurs 
three  times  in  succession  it  shall  be  given  to  opponents  as 
in  touch  on  twenty-five-yard  line  on  side  where  it  went 
out.  At  kick-out  opponents  must  be  on  twenty-five-yard 
line  or  nearer  their  own  goal. 

RULE  36.  The  following  shall  be  the  value  of  each  point 
in  the  scoring: 

Goal  obtained  by  touchdown,  6 

Goal  from  field  kick,    -  -           5 

Touchdown  failing  goal,         -  4 

Safety  by  opponents.    -  -          2 


IS    matari-il   +„    iU-    MI 

^PL*™*^^ 


